Home

Nortel Networks BCM50 User's Manual

1. critical Media Path MPS unable to open Contact your local es es es es Server FUMP channels support group MPS service aborted critical Media Path MPS FUNP channel Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Server not ready MPS support group service aborted critical Media Path MPS reset by Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Server network manager support group critical Media Path MPS received Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Server connection lost from support group MSM MPS service aborted critical Media Path IMPS unable to Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Server create event MPS jsupport group service failed to start critical Media Path IMPS unable to Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Server initialize NNU support group messaging framework ritica edia Pa unable to ontact your loca es es es es Server initialize message support group loop thread warning Media Path MPS codec Contact your local Yes No No 0 Server incompatible call support group dropped warning Media Path MPS endpoint Contact your local Yes No No Server registration failed support group critical Media MGS Exception Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Gateway software error support group Server critical Media MGS shutting down Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Gateway due to gateway support group Server creation failure critical Media MGS shutting down Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Gate
2. Header Name Header Description Field Value Read Write DN Directory Number In accordance with DN numbering system Read Model Type of device or set example T7316 or 12004 Read BCM50 Administration Guide 130 Chapter 5 Using the BCM50 Hardware Inventory Figure 24 Hardware Inventory Devices tab 6CM Element Manager 192 168 249 130 1 5 x File Edit View Metwork Session Tools Help ca Exit Element Navigation Panel X Cut Ra Copy Ea Paste Web Page Yalidate Device L Eana gs Refresh g Auto refresh Task Navigation Panel Hardware Inventory Configuration Administration eneral _ arms _ Aarm settings _ SNMP Irap Destinatic lelephony Metrics utities a backup and Kestore F Logs i onware Management 1120E 2002 DNs of type Analog may not necessarily be populated with a physical telephon oe one L M 0 L m 0 po 1 v Include ACKed alarms To view information about attached devices In the BCM50 Element Manager connect to a BCM50 device 2 Select Administration General Hardware Inventory The Hardware Inventory panel opens Click the Devices tab View the information displayed in the Attached Devices table Viewing additional information about the BCM50 hardware inventory The Additional Information tab displays additional information about the BCM50 main unit such as
3. 192 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 293 711400 minor Platform Platform Status erify that external Yes INO INO 0 Status Monitor Power power is per Monitor Failed operational limits If alarm persists contact your local support group 295 11405 critical Platform Platform Status Check Fan operation Yes Yes Yes Yes Status Monitor Local land room Monitor Temperature above temperature as fan tolerance action has failed to maintain acceptable system temperatures 296 11406 critical Platform Platform Status Check Fan operation Yes Yes es Yes Status Monitor Remote and room Monitor Temperature above temperature as fan tolerance action has failed to maintain acceptable system temperatures 297 11408 critical Platform Platform Status Check Fan operation Yes Yes Yes Yes Status Monitor Fan speed as fan is apparently Monitor is reading O for over malfunctioning If 1 minute alarm persists replace fan 298 t1409 critical Platform Platform Status Check Router Yes Yes es Yes Status Monitor Router operation as it is Monitor does not Exist apparently malfunctioning If alarm persists replace router 299 11502 critical Platform Platform Status Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Status Monitor System support group for Monitor out of Memory assistance in analyzing memory condition B00 T2001 major Backup and Backup and Restore Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Restore Backup file could
4. ccccessccceeeeeseeceeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeeertenses 96 To enable or disable an account on a timed basis ccceeesseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeteeneaes 96 Te enable disable exclusive ACCESS uiarni einer ioiii tases came s EE 97 Using the BCM50 Hardware Inventory 0 20ee cece eens 125 To view or update information about the BCM50 main chassis c sccceeeeeeees 126 To view or update BCM50 system expansion information ccccccccsssseeeessnteeeeeees 128 To view or update other information about the BCM50 main unit cceeeeeeees 129 To view information about attached devices ciiccccscssssccsisesssenssassvnctenniveaisnesvincsenaees 130 To view additional information about the BCM50 hardware inventory s s 132 Managing BCM50 with SNMP 000 ce eee eee eee 133 Te conmigure the BOMSO SNMP ab ent sesimin eels eens 136 Te contiqure BCM50 SNMP SQ thi Gs ssccccciadccusitcaies cess iiaae iei 136 To add an SNMP manager to the BCM50 SNMP manager list 0 ccecceeeeeeteees 137 TO delete an SNMP PAM AG pnia a a eacbanteench 138 To delete a community string Vale usisni a 139 BCM50 Administration Guide 4 Task List To configure pass phrases for a service ACCESS POIN eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 141 To view details associated with a service ACCESS POIN eee eeeseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeeeeee 141 To deletie a service access ON ceesicbs access ceeysaceatcess
5. Attribute Action HTTP Server Enter the hostname or IP address of the HTTP server User Name Enter the user name associated with the HTTP server Password Enter the password associated with the HTTP server Directory Enter the path to the subdirectory as applicable Use HTTPS Specify whether the server requires SSL Connecting to Element Manager through a router If you have a BCM50 with an integrated router BCM Element Manager cannot be used from the WAN until the router is configured properly This section explains the necessary settings for enabling BCM Element Manager operation from the WAN side of the integrated router Consult the BCM50a or BCM50e documentation for information on how to modify these settings Configuring firewall settings If the firewall is enabled add the following rule e Source address Element Manager IP address or Any This is the IP address of the system that the Element Manager resides on e Destination address BCM50 LAN IP address This is the IP address listed in Element Manager under System IP Subsystem General Settings e Service Type TCP 5989 443 and 80 port number for OpenWben https and http e Action forward Adding NAT rules You must configure these three services for NAT OpenWbem HTTPs and HTTP Configure them using the following three rules e Name OpenWbem e Start Port 5989 e End Port 5989 e Server IP address The BCM50 LAN IP address e Name HTTPs
6. 0 60 eee eee eee 341 About Call Detail Recording 2 00c0csce0e bene eee eee kee eee ve ee owee ees 341 Using Gall Detail Rearing cc cceses derrr aserte paneer eed ot Boas EES 342 COR TOME tieteodiehcaceng auth kere eee ebaakep eer anEes oeauuee as 342 NN40020 600 Contents 13 Appendix A Management Information Bases 000 eee e eee eee eee 343 SUS OMIM MBS 230 5o cha Seed cee nad bed SA hee eee 343 MIB Tle CESCHnDUONS oc cacnccrtanteeer ieee Sees c ee wnt sE er E eee 343 Accessing compiling and installing MIB files 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee 345 Cll Se ME ii cig ies eee sek eae oeeeeadetangi Sheree were awe 346 Small Site Event MIB x2cage ou ae coe beeeaghn eee ked be ietek sds desene canes 347 BCM50 Administration Guide 14 Contents NN40020 600 15 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM50 This section contains information on the following topics About this guide on page 15 Audience on page 17 Acronyms on page 17 Symbols and conventions used in this guide on page 19 Related publications on page 20 How to get Help on page 21 About this guide The BCM50 Administration Guide describes how to manage and maintain BCM50 systems at the Release 2 0 level using Business Element Manager Purpose The concepts operations and tasks described in the guide relate to the FCAPS fault configuration accounting performance and security management
7. BCM50 Administration Guide 74 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment e Start Port 443 e End Port 443 e Server IP address The BCM50 LAN IP address e Name HTTP e Start Port 80 e End Port 80 e Server IP address The BCM50 LAN IP address After these rules are configured the BCM50 Element Manager can be accessed from the WAN NN40020 600 75 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges allows you to establish system wide security policies and maintain access security on your system using settings on the Element Manager This chapter describes the security policies that you can configure through the Element Manager The BCM50 provides security capabilities such as NAT VPN DoS alert data communication DHCP VLAN and PPP a Security Note This symbol is used throughout this section to indicate areas of possible security concern primarily in regard to default settings that could pose a security risk if they are not changed The information in this chapter is organized as follows Security Policies panel on page 75 describes the fields on the Security Policies panel Configuring system security policies on page 80 provides procedures for setting system level security that applies to all configured users for installing the web server certificate and for downloading the SSH key pair Configuring user accounts user groups and pri
8. Status Description Available The software update is available to be applied to the BCM50 Only an Available software update can be applied to the BCM50 Invalid A newer version of software has been applied to the BCM50 or a problem has been detected with the software update and has rendered this software update invalid An update will also be listed as invalid if a requirement for the update is not met reequirements may include keycodes or a related update Installed The software update has been applied to the BCM50 In Progress The software update is in the process of being applied to the BCM50 An update may be In Progress for up to 15 minutes depending on the size of the update file Scheduled A download of the software update is scheduled You can change the order of columns in the Updates in Progress table by clicking a column heading and dragging it to a different place in the table To view details about software updates in progress 1 Inthe task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Software Management folder and then click the Software Update task The Software Update panel opens and displays the Updates in Progress tab 3 View the details in the Updates in Progress table Once a software update is complete the entry is removed from the Updates in Progress table and a new entry is added to the Software History table to document the installation of the software update Applying software updates
9. 1 Click on the Action menu item 2 Select Clear 3 Close the panel 4 If you determine that the call denials are too numerous increase lines that support the affected service type Hunt Group Metrics Hunt groups provide a service where incoming calls ring on a targeted group of telephones called a Hunt group When you designate a Hunt group you define the group as a unique Directory Number DN This DN receives and distributes calls to the telephones assigned to the group BCM50 Administration Guide 236 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics This section provides the procedure for To access the Hunt Group metrics Note You can include Hunt Group hourly metrics files with the CDR data files when the are transferred to the central server For more information on configuring this option refer to the Call Detail Recording System Configuration Guide NN40020 605 To access the Hunt Group metrics To access the Hunt Group metrics to evaluate total call processing by hunt group member 1 Inthe Element Manager select the Administration tab then the Telephony Metrics and Hunt Group Metrics in the navigation tree See Figure 35 on page 236 Figure 35 Hunt Group Metrics Table Nortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager 192 168 249 27 0 x File View Network Session Tools Help pot p scones amp Refresh sg Auto retrest Element Navigation Panel 4 Task Navigation Panel Hunt Group
10. Most Recent Date and Time E Recent DN desktop E desktop 14 13 28 53 0 09 14 0 N A 2005 09 14 13 28 53 0 0 N A fu cA rhe MS pams WS Vv Include ACKed alarms Table 64 describes each field on the panel Table 64 PVQM Metrics fields violations MTBV for desktop Attribute Value Description Number of connections lt read only gt Displays the total number of connections by IP sets on the system since the last reset This count includes non interactive features such as dial tones call progress tones and music on hold Last rest lt read only gt Displays the time of the last reset Most recent date and time lt read only gt Displays the time of the most recent threshold violation Most recent DN lt read only gt Displays the DN of the most recent threshold violation Desktop count lt read only gt Displays the number of times a desktop client violated a threshold Soft client count lt read only gt Displays the number of times a soft client violated a threshold Mean time between lt read only gt Displays the mean time between threshold violations of a particular metric for desktop clients measured in seconds Mean time between violations MTBV for soft client lt read only gt Displays the mean time between threshold violations of a particular metric for soft clients measured in seconds BCM50 Administration Guide 244 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status
11. Proxy Server UDP port lt lt utpsPort lt lt Terminating with error lt lt errorCode 606 600TT critical Unistim UTPS failed to Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal retrieve vital support group Proxy Server jinformation about the network adaptors present on ithe BCM UTPS is aborting with error lt lt errorCode 507 50012 Critical Unistim The published IP Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal address has just support group Proxy Server been changed the UTPS will restart land start using the new published IP address 508 50013 Critical Unistim UTPS failed to Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal obtain the detailed support group Proxy Server terminal list from the core telephony lengine The detailed error description is lt lt detailedString 509 60014 critical Unistim UTPS failed to Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal retrieve vital support group Proxy Server jinformation about the UDP socket used to communicate with IP sets terminating with error lt lt lerrorCode BCM50 Administration Guide 204 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 610 pO0OTS critical Unistim e UTPS couldnt Contact your local es es es es Terminal find the network support group Proxy Server jadaptor that is lbound to the lpublished IP address abort
12. Blocking user accounts There are different ways that you can block user access to the system based on your security and administrative requirements NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 111 e Primarily you can block unauthorized access by ensuring that you change all default passwords once the system is set up and verified e You can also block user access by simply changing the password Note that you must retain a record of the password since this information is not displayed either on the Element Manager panel or in the programming record file e You can increase the complexity required for both Element Manager and telset passwords to make it more difficult for unauthorized users to inadvertently guess the correct password Complexity is increased by increasing the type of characters that are required and by increasing the minimum length of the password e You can set up the system to lock out a user if the password is entered incorrectly a configurable number of times You can unlock the account through the user account record or the user can wait for the lockout timer to run out before attempting to log on again The user account shows the last time a user failed to logon e You can set a user account to automatically expire on a given date e You can manually disable the account If the user is currently logged in this takes effect at the next log in e If you only want to de
13. Creating a group on page 94 e Deleting a group on page 94 View by Groups General on page 118 Modifying group privileges on page 94 View by Groups Members on page 120 Adding a user account to a group on page 95 e Deleting a user account from a group on page 95 Click on the navigation tree heading then press F1 to access general information about user management Security note This symbol is used throughout this section to indicate areas of possible Q security concern primarily in regard to default settings that could pose a security risk if they are not changed Adding a new user account Administrators can create user accounts when the BCM is configured to authenticate users locally After you create a new user account you can assign groups to that account Groups are sets of privileges based on user tasks or roles For information about creating groups and assigning groups to accounts see Creating a group on page 94 and Adding a user account to a group on page 95 To add a new user account 1 Select Configuration Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges View by Account tab 2 Click the Add button NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 91 O NOAA OQ 11 12 13 In the Add Account dialog box enter a description of the account in the Description field Enter the user s identifier in the User ID field
14. Media gateway Dynamic snapshot 0 of 11 0 iS Cur 29 Min 29 Max 29 active Signaling channels On the File menu select Dynamic Snapshot Start BCM Monitor starts taking snapshots and saves the snapshot data in a file located in the folder you specified when you configured the dynamic snapshot settings Stopping a dynamic snapshot On the File menu select Dynamic Snapshot Stop BCM Info tab The BCM Info tab displays static information about the BCM50 system such as e information about the main hardware components of the BCM50 system e software installed on the system e IP configuration data You can use the information on this tab to verify the software release level of the BCM50 the published IP address and default gateway of the BCM50 main unit the last time the BCM50 was rebooted as well as IP address information about other Ethernet interfaces on the BCM50 main unit J BCM Monitor Bem_m50r1 3 i File Statistics Help m BCM Hardware Installed Devices O x Media Card Voice Ports IP Devices RIP Sessions uIP Line Monitor Usage Indicators Platform BCM50 R1 Alpha 2 CPU 8270 266 MHz Memory 251 MB Hard drive Maxtor 6Y080M0 Profile INZA System ID O00F6AFD3DAO Serial number INNFXA2000132 M BCM Software Version 2 0 0 52 Boot time 3 13 06 3 07 PM m IP Configuration Published IP address 92 168 24
15. No warning Voice CTI Voice CTT Less than 20 percent voice file space available Check voice mailboxes for excessive messages land if problem persists contact your local support group Yes No No critical Voice CTI Voice CTI Less than 5 percent voice file space available Check voice mailboxes for excessive messages land if problem persists contact your local support group Yes Yes es critical Unistim Terminal Proxy Server The UTPS cannot determine whether lor not the BCM is running in SRG mode Without that information the UTPS cannot continue aborting with error lt lt lerrorCode Contact your local support group Yes Yes es es critical Unistim Terminal Proxy Server The UTPS cannot determine whether lor not the BCM is running in SRG mode Without that information the UTPS cannot continue aborting with error lt lt lerrorCode Contact your local support group Yes Yes Yes Yes critical Unistim Terminal Proxy Server UTPS failed to initialize itself because of an internal error The UTPS is aborting critical Unistim Terminal Proxy Server Contact your local support group Yes Yes es es as determined that the ISRG keycode has lbeen applied but the ISRG process is not running properly UTPS is aborting with error lt lt lerrorCode critical
16. Restoring BCM50 system data You can restore BCM50 configuration and application data using the BCM50 Element Manager The restore software determines compatibility with the backup archive Incompatible backups cannot be restored at all Compatible backups may have incompatible sub components which will be automatically excluded from a Restore operation This situation can occur if your BCM50 software is upgraded and a component changes the data that it includes in the backup New backups should be made after any change to your BCMS0 software to avoid this situation However it may be possible to recover data for components that have not changed from backups made prior to your software upgrade Restore operations are available on demand only they cannot be scheduled You can retrieve the most recent backup file that you want to use for the restore operation from the BCM5S0 or from an external storage location Nortel recommends that you always use the same storage location when you perform a restore operation This practice will avoid potential mismatches in the backup archives For information about storage locations see Backup destinations on page 274 When you restore data the following details are available to you e the size of the backup file e the backup date e the backup version Restore options You can select the components which you want to restore NN40020 600 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data
17. This chapter provides e an overview the BCM50 service management system e alist of BCM50 services e information about how to start stop and restart BCM50 services Overview of the BCM50 service management system You can view details about the services that run on the BCM50 system including e the name of a service e whether a service is enabled to automatically start up e the status of the service running on the BCM50 You can also administer services by starting stopping and restarting certain services Caution Use the BCM50 Services Manager only as directed by Nortel Technical Support Improper use of the BCM50 Services Manager may adversely affect system operation You can keep a record of BCM50 services using the programming record For more information see Saving programming records on page 58 BCM50 services Table 52 lists BCMSO services Table 52 BCM50 Services Service Name Description BCMInventoryProvider Agent Cimom Provider BCMPerfMonProviderAgent Cimom Provider BCMSystemProviderAgent Cimom Provider BCMUPSProviderAgent Cimom Provider BCMWebProviderAgent Cimom Provider BCM_DCMProviderAgent Cimom Provider BCM50 Administration Guide 216 Chapter 8 Using the BCM50 Service Management System Table 52 BCM50 Services Service Name Description BCM_Doorphone Doorphone Service BCM_HostProviderAgent Cimom Provider BCM_IPMusicProvid
18. To expand a UIP message 1 Click the UIP tab The Universal ISDN Protocol Messages area displays detailed information about monitored UIP modules 2 Inthe Universal ISDN Protocol Messages area double click a UIP message Information elements appear below the UIP message To clear UIP message details 1 Click the UIP tab The Universal ISDN Protocol Messages area displays detailed information about monitored UIP modules 2 Inthe Universal ISDN Protocol Messages area right click a UIP message or information element and select Clear Tree The entire tree is cleared from the Universal ISDN Protocol Messages area f BCM Monitor BCM40027 5 x File Statistics Help BCM Info Media Card Voice Ports IP Devices RTP Sessions ai Line Monitor Usage Indicators UIP Modules Universal ISDN Protocol Messages MCDN Over IP L Bus 2 x Oft Q PRI C BAI C Loop 1 2 3 4 Modei Frrr Module2 Frrr Modes TTT m Logging Log UIP data E m Timeout Settings UIP monitoring timeout Disable timeout Line Monitor tab The Line Monitor tab shows the status of lines on the BCM50 system You can view the number of active lines and view all lines on the BCM50 system including inactive lines For all lines displayed in the line monitor area you can view the following information e number and name displays the line number and line name NN40020 600 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilit
19. You can view the amount of time after which monitoring of selected UIP modules will be disabled and you can disable the monitoring timeout If you are investigating intermittent problems an extended monitoring period may be required In this case disable the monitoring timeout and enable logging of UIP data To configure timeout settings 1 Click the UIP tab 2 To disable the timeout select the Disable Timeout check box Caution Before you disable the monitoring timeout consider the potential impact on system performance if the BCM50 system handles a high number of PRI calls Viewing UIP message details The Universal ISDN Protocol Messages section displays a folder for each UIP module that is enabled for monitoring Each folder displays up to 20 most recent UIP messages You can expand UIP messages that contain at least one information element An information element can contain data which you can expand as well Each UIP message line contains the following information e the direction in relation to the BCM50 gt for incoming or lt for outgoing e the message type CC for Call Control MTC for Maintenance e the direction in relation to the call reference origin gt Cref Origin for incoming or lt CRef Origin for outgoing e the message name or a hexadecimal value if the name is unknown BCM50 Administration Guide 260 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities e additional data extracted from information elements
20. 10 Click the OK button The log file is saved as a tar file in the location you specified Performing an immediate log transfer to an FTP server Note The time required to transfer log files varies with the amount of log data gt being collected and the speed of your devices and network To perform an immediate log transfer to an FTP server Click the Administration tab and then open the Logs folder 2 Click the Log Management task The Log Management panel opens Click the Immediate Log Transfer tab In the Transfer To selection field select FTP Server Configure the Transfer to FTP Server attributes Table 91 Configure Transfer to FTP Server attributes Attribute Action FTP Server Enter the hostname or IP address of the FTP server User Name Enter the user name associated with the FTP server Password Enter the password associated with the FTP server Directory Enter the path to the subdirectory as applicable optional Click the Transfer button The Transfer window opens Select the log file categories that you want to include in the log file transfer Click the OK button A confirmation window opens and displays applicable warnings Click the Yes button to initiate the transfer The Progress Update window opens When the log files are transferred the Transfer Complete window opens NN40020 600 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs 309 10 Click the OK button The
21. BCM50 Administration Guide BCM50 2 0 Business Communications Manager Document Status Standard Document Number NN40020 600 Document Version 01 01 Date September 2006 NORTEL Copyright 2006 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved All rights reserved The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks Trademarks Nortel the Nortel logo and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks Microsoft MS MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Task List Getting started with BCM50 0 20 cece eee ee 15 Overview of BCM50 Administration 000 e eee eee 23 BCM50 Management Environment 000e eee seen eee eee 31 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 75 To Sel system access control policies scais cisdesccsstsdanndantsdassaaantesdsdneldedacabaaeedainandieiedsaaeiets 81 FO Set SHO GS all TIN KEY ec 81 Te Set lockout policy for failed IQOWIGS viassssvssasscseryseessenapnadiannns conead
22. BCM50 Help system on page 66 e BCM50 common file input output processes on page 69 e Connecting to Element Manager through a router on page 73 BCM50 web page The BCMS0 web page facilitates the download of applications documentation and other information necessary for running the BCM50 and its services You connect to the BCM50 web page by typing the IP address of your BCMS0 device into your browser A valid user name and password are required in order to access the web page There are two default user accounts configured on the BCMS0 at time of shipping the nnadmin user account and the nnguest user account See Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges on page 75 for information on user accounts and security You can choose to make the nnguest account available to general users This account can be configured to provide users with access to download end user documents and applications that they require from the BCM50 web page The BCM50 web page contains the following links e User Applications Applications listed in Table 2 that are available to the end users of the BCM5S0 e User Documentation Documentation for the BCM50 end users to explain the end user applications and BCM50 specific tasks e Administrator Applications Applications listed in Table 2 that are available to BCM50 administrators e Administrator Documentation Documentation for the BCM50 administrators to explai
23. Obps m Remote IP Endpoints IP to IP 0 Est bandwidth 0 bps m Media Gateways Active fon call 0of3 UIP tab The UIP tab displays information about Universal ISDN Protocol UIP activity associated with IP trunks MCDN messages BRI loops and PRI loops on the BCM50 You can monitor UIP modules by e enabling or disabling monitoring of MCDN over IP messages for calls made over IP trunks e selecting and configuring a bus used by expansion modules e selecting the type of ISDN module connected to the expansion unit e enabling or disabling monitoring of loops on BRI modules connected to the expansion unit BCM50 Administration Guide 258 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities Enabling UIP message monitoring Caution Monitoring UIP messages may affect the performance of the BCM50 system or connected peripherals For example if IP sets or voice ports make or receive a high number of calls over PRI trunks monitoring UIP increases the amount of signalling data and may increase the response time for IP sets or voice ports Therefore it is strongly recommended that you monitor only a single UIP module at a time and restrict the monitoring time 1 Click the UIP tab 2 To enable or disable monitoring of MCDN over IP messages for calls made over IP trunks select or clear the MCDN over IP check box 3 To select an expansion module select one of the following from the Bus selection
24. User Management provides procedures for managing access to both the Element Manager and to the telset configuration menus You can control when users can log on how much they can see and what they can do within the configuration menus The Accounts and Privileges context panels allow you to e view the user ID and last successful login of the current user e view user accounts and add delete and modify accounts e view group profiles and add delete and modify groups BCM50 Administration Guide 90 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges Job Aid These links provide navigation to the sections of the panel for each user management item Panel tabs Tasks Current Account on page 111 Enabling and disabling exclusive access on page 97 View by Accounts on page 114 e Adding a new user account on page 90 e Modifying a user account on page 91 e Deleting a user account on page 92 e Changing a user s password on page 93 e Changing the current user s password on page 93 e Adding callback for a dial up user on page 92 e Re enable a locked out user on page 96 View by Accounts General on page 116 e Enabling and disabling an account on page 96 View by Accounts Group Membership Adding a user account to a group on page 95 on page 117 e Deleting a user account from a group on page 95 View by Groups on page 118 e
25. on page 75 for more information on grouping users and assigning privileges The BCM50 retrieves task bullet data in real time and in sequential order Once you select a task bullet Element Manager searches for the data to populate the panels and any associated detail sub panels or tables for the task The first search must complete before Element Manager can start the search for the data required for the second selected task The first task data request is not cancelled by the second task data request You should only select a second task after the first task request is completed Although there is some data caching done larger tables take longer to load as do panels with more information in them Field data is committed by using add or modify buttons in panels that contain the buttons For panels without a Commit button use the tab or space keys to leave the field after the data has been filled in to commit the data Administrators have the ability to lock out other users for a maximum of 240 minutes from Element Manager by using the Enable Exclusive Access function in the Administrator Access gt Accounts and Privileges gt Current Account tab This ensures that there are no other users creating changes at the same time as the administrator See Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges on page 75 for more information on how to use Enable Exclusive Access Element Manager data features The Element Manager
26. 0 000 cee 81 Setting credential complexity 0 000 c cette 81 Setting lockout policy for failed logins 0 00 e eee 82 Setting password expiry policy 00 cece eee eee 83 Setting password history policy ss isrseetinisis andisi diirei eee 83 Setting the authentication method 0 00 eee ee 83 Configuring an authentication Server 0 cee ee tenes 84 Setting the idle session timeout 0 00 c cee 88 Uploading a Web Server Certificate 0 0 0 ene 88 Transferring an SSH Key Pair 2 2 000e0ee0 bbe e eee eee see ee ee 89 Configuring user accounts user groups and privileges 00000 eee 89 Adding a new user ACCOUNT pacnn ee innehi eee ea seee PERE S ae eE ORE DOES 90 Modifying a USEF ACOOUN cou ccc cancer te ete dents Gk tae ee eee odes 91 Adding callback for a dial up user oo ease weed dean ee he eeee eek eae a 92 Adding Telset access for a user 2nd dca bance e ance Geaeen deeb nn ke ee Rw SE 92 Deleting a user acCOunt 2 cick scdais coed e hehe ee Rh oe eee daw ee bea eees 92 Changing a users password oc a cee ee kes ee eee eee 93 Changing the current user s password 0 eee nee 93 Creat SOUS 244036624 544 oFSE 2 OSes SE SE CREE SERRE ED EE Bae EEE S 94 NN40020 600 Contents 9 DSA WU cicieees tees ede gues hheee ee he Ranra 94 Modifying group privileges 22 cc sced eh boas i ebb ones ieee ee ded ee Ress 94 Adding a user account TO a group 2
27. 2 625 wee eae ee eee eee 95 Deleting a user account from a group 20 eee ees 95 Re enable a locked out user 00 e eee eee 96 Enabling and disabling An ACCOUNT 2c seaes cone oeade Wee ew wears ReRE Se RoHS 96 Enabling and disabling exclusive access 000 cece ees 97 User account and user group management fundamentals 97 Veer eo COUNIS cvctoucvee hota aang eal Pek eee Wee Mom ee aw EET ERENER 97 Deis pasow 5 dees peda eden s 0540 R SERRE RE RR ERE Eee RS EEE 99 SE COIS EEEN Senda amas ae Guess Ui ial heen eed ate eae ed 99 Default access privileges excluding set based privileges 101 Telset abcess Secu ci 5 4 Ohad Aes VRS Pees amp Rade eG ERR Rees HERS 109 Telset group access privileges 2 00 cee eee eee 110 Blocking USEF ACCOUNIS 2 cent saas ciate sone esewss been ade oe eee ee 110 Accounts and Privileges panel cs ccccek eine cugs Shaw ne bees eee eewes a kaws 111 CUCM ARCO ccaheceeaGarihhdateeiaGets euasd Gs eaeeew ae serianes 111 VOW DY ACCOUN pcigas Cieladdeen ees os bees eha Sess deeb gees 114 View by Accounts General i4 cc ee keke ee kee 116 View by Accounts Remote Access 2000 e eee eens 116 View by Accounts ABI 223 icsdeneeiessbeneeee coeeeetenn erase ees 117 View by Accounts Group Membership 00000 cece eee eee 117 View BY GOUS su cecae deer enoar bee Ghee LeSe eb Ges SE Ses Samed ewes 118 View by Groups General occ cde i
28. 2 ccccccek es dee cede he dew en eee a aeee hee eee we Ee 266 o cb 25 pce ESS eGR SERIE eke eee EGS oes eee eee ees ees 267 Diagnosi GHUINGS onic cat saueds eee eS Reve sues eee Samed w one Shae 269 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 020 eee seen eee 271 Overview of backing up and restoring data 0 00 c eee eee 271 Backup and restore ODUONE cs sace phe Hee bS ORE RH RORE DERE URES ORR ESOS 271 Viewing backup and restore activity 22 cccecieseceencvaeveneeecraaseces 272 ADO RN erer detach SP Gets aad Sm cat She Saclay i a 272 BCM50 Administration Guide 12 Contents BOMs0 PICKU TIE 26 seGeceare euch ede heen eset R e EEA 273 Backup GeSlhAUONe lt ad e0es a Rade wees Peed eeRA Seah ewe heh ERE Se ERS 274 Performing immediate backups 2 2 20a 6 wee ee ee a ee 275 Performing an immediate backup to the BCM50 00000 275 Viewing and performing scheduled backups 0 cece eee 281 Modifying and deleting scheduled backups 2000 cee eee eee 289 Restoring BCM50 system data 0 0c ccs 290 eS OOS eke bat bce a See eae Soles Leek 290 Eels GN ING SYCIGM cece aceasdaneneat Woks eS Kote Mes mR Rs CERES wOD 292 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 LOg6 22 224 irrasice cireni tredir suriri osier Erni 301 Overview of BCM50 IGS oc ocak dee wie does s oa bd ee ee wee ea 301 LOO TPES cnet ctu cebab crate seee Reade Soaked Ps oeans odee deme Swab 301 Overview of tr
29. 3 main office Endpoint in Gatekeeper database is Originating Call Server major Survivable Survivable Remote Check your local Yes Yes es Yes Remote Gateway DN XXX configuration Gateway Local Mode Net network connectivity Connect Server land ensure the main Unreachable office is on line major Survivable Survivable Remote Check your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Remote Gateway DN XXX configuration Gateway Local Mode Main network connectivity Office TPS land ensure the main Unreachable office is on line major Survivable ISurvivable Remote Check your firmware Yes Yes Yes Yes Remote Gateway DN XXX jon the system to Gateway Local Mode ensure it s the same Firmware is not revision as the main available on the office SRG critical Survivable _ Survivable Remote Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Remote Gateway SRG support group Gateway terminated unexpectedly critical LAN Driver CAN Driver Check in diagnostics Yes Yes es Yes Duplicate IP logs for messages address detected on log for futher startup of LAN information Also interface Check your network to ensure no other devices are using the same IP address as the system BCM50 Administration Guide 214 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System NN40020 600 215 Chapter 8 Using the BCM50 Service Management System You can use the Element Manager to view and administer the services that run on the BCM50 system
30. 3 Click the Scheduled Backups tab The Scheduled Backups panel opens 4 Click the Add button The Add Scheduled Backup window opens In the Backup To selection field select Network Folder Configure the Network Folder attributes Table 78 Configure Network Folder attributes Attribute Action Network Folder Enter the hostname or IP address of the network folder and resource name For example lt server gt lt resource gt User Name Enter the user name associated with the network folder Password Enter the password associated with the network folder Directory Enter the path to the subdirectory optional 7 Click the OK button The Add Scheduled Backup window opens 8 Inthe Optional Components table select or clear the check box to include or exclude these components from the backup operation NN40020 600 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 285 9 Configure the schedule attributes Table 79 Configure schedule attributes Attribute Action Memo Enter a note for the scheduled backup as applicable Recurrence Select how often the scheduled backup is to occur Options are Once Daily Weekly Monthly Depending on the option you choose the window displays selections for the month and day of month If you select Weekly days of the week are displayed Select the check box for Daily to select the day Month Select the month in which the scheduled bac
31. Available Click the Apply button A confirmation window opens Click the Yes button The Software Update Complete confirmation window opens Click the OK button The Updates in Progress table lists the update as In Progress A software update that has the Reboot Required field checked will automatically reboot the BCM50 once the update has been applied Applying an update from an FTP server e Caution Applying a software update to the BCM50 is a service affecting operation Nortel recommends that you schedule updates for low traffic hours Caution If a software update has a checkmark applied against it in the Reboot Req d column of the Find Software Updates window the BCMS0 will automatically reboot as soon as the update has been applied You will not receive a reboot confirmation before the reboot occurs To apply an update from an FTP server In the task panel click the Administration tab Open the Software Management folder and then click the Software Update task The Software Update panel opens The Updates in Progress tab is open Click the Get New Updates button The Get New Updates window opens Select FTP Server from the Retrieve From selection field Configure the FTP Server attributes Table 100 Configure FTP Server attributes Attribute Action FTP Server Enter the IP address or host name of the remote computer and the port number if required User Name Ent
32. B08 112009 major Backup and Backup and Restore Check your Yes Yes Yes Yes Restore Could not connect connection to the ftp site configuration parameters and make sure FTP server is active B09 12010 minor Backup and Backup and Restore Check your login Yes No No fe Restore Could not credentials to the authenticate with FTP server the ftp site BTO M2011 minor Backup and Backup and Restore Check your FTP Yes No INO 0 Restore Could not change server configuration fto modes on the ftp site BIT 12012 major Backup and Backup and Restore Check your Yes Yes Yes Yes Restore Could not send the connection file to the ftp site configuration parameters and make sure FTP server is active B12 12013 major Backup and Backup and Restore Check your Yes Yes Yes Yes Restore Could not retrieve connection the file from the ftp configuration site parameters and make sure FTP server is active B13 12014 major Backup and Backup and Restore Attempt another Yes Yes es Yes Restore Backup file backup or restore integrity error B14 12015 major Backup and Backup and Restore Attempt another Yes Yes es Yes Restore Backup file backup or restore integrity error B15 T2016 warning Backup and Backup and Restore No Action Required Yes No No Restore Backup is busy serving another request B16 12017 warning Backup and Backup and Restore Use a different Yes No No Restore File integrity error backup file Contents altered since creat
33. In the Optional Components table select or clear the check box for each component to include or exclude these components from the backup operation Click the OK button A warning window opens Read the warning carefully before proceeding Click the Yes button to proceed A progress window opens When the backup preparation is complete the Backup Complete message displays Click the OK button NN40020 600 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 279 Performing an immediate backup to a USB storage device Caution A backup operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever the backup will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a backup that does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a backup at a time when the system is typically not in use To perform an immediate backup to a USB storage device 1 Inthe task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Backup The Backup panel opens and displays the Immediate Backup tab In the Backup To selection field select USB Storage Device Click the Backup button The Backup window opens 5 Inthe Optional Components table select or clear the check box for each component to include or exclude these components from the backup operation 6 Click the OK button A warning window op
34. PSIN Fallback Metrics Listening R Factor 0 100 wt Packet Loss Lg Log Management Round Trip Delay ms Software Management 2 Configure the threshold value for each PVQM metric The options are e warning desktop e warning soft client e unacceptable desktop e unacceptable soft client Note The term desktop indicates IP sets that are desktop models The term soft client indicates IP sets that are software applications such as the 2050 and the 2050MVC Since desktop IP sets may provide better voice quality than software based IP sets you can specify different threshold levels for each type of IP set NN40020 600 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics 241 Table 64 describes the settings Table 62 PVQM threshold settings Default Value Default Value for for Warning Unacceptable Metric Description Value Range thresholds thresholds Packet Loss Rate The fraction of RTP data 0 100 1 5 packets from the source lost since the beginning of the call expressed as a percentage Inter arrival Jitter The inter arrivak time of 0 1000 50 ms 500 ms incoming RTP packets as defined in RFC 1889 Expressed in milliseconds RTCP Round Trip The round trip time of 0 1000 300 ms 500 ms Delay incoming RTP packets as defined in RFC 1889 Measured in milliseconds Listening R Factor A scale from 0 lowest quality 0 100 65 n a to 100 highe
35. Refresh s Auto retresh Voice Messaging Contact Center Configuration administration Centralized Voice Messaging Voice Message Centers Message Waiting Indication String 1 ANM AN O 2 AN AN O ANM AN O 4 ANY AN O 5 ANM AN O Local Voice Messaging Contact Center Launch CallPilot Manager You can access the BCM Monitor through the Launch BCM Monitor button under Administration Task gt Utilities gt BCM Monitor or you can choose Tools gt BCM Monitor Figure 15 on page 65 shows the location of the Launch BCM Monitor button NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 65 Figure 15 Launch BCM Monitor button Bc Element Manager 192 168 249 130 10 xj File Edt View Network Session Tools Help E Exit y Cut be COPY g Paste Web Page Validate Device Bi Disconnect amp Refresh g Auto refresh Element Navigation Panel Task Navigation Panel BCM Monitor Configuration Administration Launch BCM Monitor Hoa General amp system Metrics mn lelephony Metrics ee Ututes igali race Koute _ Ethernet Activity e Reset Viagnostic Settings fe Backup and Restore cy Logs iy Sotware Management co M 0 Lm 6 Lows Vv Include ACKed alarms BCM50 feature licensing You require a keycode to enable software features on the BCM The keycode is a 24 digit code that authenticates the feature or bundle of features you pu
36. Sets Active Sets Manage line access capabilities preferences and restrictions of set DNs Active Application Manage line access capabilities preferences and restrictions of DNs application DNs Inactive DNs Manage line access capabilities preferences and restrictions of inactive DNs All DNs Manage line access capabilities preferences and restrictions on all system DNs Lines Active Physical Lines Active VoIP Lines Manage active physical line parameters Manage active VoIP line parameters Target Lines Manage target line parameters Inactive Lines Manage inactive line parameters All Lines Manage all lines Loops View type protocol sampling ONN blocking for BRI lines Scheduled Services Manage scheduled service and list of possible services Dialing Plan General Manage settings access codes and direct dial sets DNs Manage DNs Public Network Manage settings DN lengths and carrier codes Private Network Manage settings MCDN VoIP IDs ETSI Line Pools View pool and access code Routing Add or delete routes and destination codes Ring Groups Manage group membership and line settings Call Security BCM50 Administration Guide 50 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment Table 5 Configuration task navigation panel headings Continued Restriction Filters Add or delete restrictions and exceptions for restrict
37. Tovon EMOn II an 267 To eerie ihe BOMI ici cratresasiarses rosia RAAN ESAE EEEE 268 To perform a warm reset of BCM50 telephony services n 268 To perform a cold reset of BCM50 telephony Services rererere 269 We Bea ekas POOE uani 269 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 00 cece neces 271 To perform an immediate backup to the BOM50 c cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeneees 275 To perform an immediate backup to your personal computer ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 277 To perform an immediate backup to a network folder ec ceeeeeeseeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeneeeeees 278 To perform an immediate backup to a USB storage device eeeeeteeeeeteeeeteeees 279 To perform an immediate backup to an FTP Server essccceeeesseneeeeeeeseeeeeteseeneeeeetes 279 To perform an immediate backup to an SFTP S Ivel c cccseseeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeeees 280 TS IE schoduled CIOS recski a deat eee 282 To perform a scheduled backup to the BOM50 cescceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeenaeees 283 To perform a scheduled backup to a network folder 0 00 0 ee cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeneeeeetee 284 To perform a scheduled backup to a USB storage device eceeeceeeeesteeeesseneeeeees 285 To perform a scheduled backup to an FTP server ccessccceeeessecceeeeeseeeeeeeeseneeeeete 286 To perform a scheduled backup to an SFTP S rvel ccccsceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 288 To m
38. Yes No No fe Status Monitor failed to iif problem persists Monitor read Power contact your local support group 280 1120T major Platform Platform Status Contact local Yes Yes es Yes Status Monitor Hard drive support group for Monitor near capacity assistance in recovering drive Space 281 11202 major Platform Platform Status Contact local Yes es es Yes Status Monitor Memory support group for Monitor near capacity assistance in analyzing memory lusage NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 191 T1203 minor Platform Platform Status Use BCM Monitor es No No Status Monitor CPU load for real time view of Monitor above threshold CPU activity Monitor for alarm 11005 to indicate CPU recovered If problem persists contact local support group 11204 major Platform Platform Status Verity that Customer Yes Yes Yes Yes Status Monitor 1 rx_byte LAN is performing Monitor sec greater than las expected 50 of LAN speed 2 tx_byte sec greater than 50 of LAN speed 3 rx_errors sec of LAN gt 4 tx_errors sec of LAN gt 5 rx_dropped sec of LAN gt 6 tx_dropped sec of LAN gt T1209 major Platform Platform Status Reboot system and Yes Yes es Yes Status Monitor Failed to lif problem reoccurs Monitor read Local contact your local Temperature
39. either Microsoft Excel format or HTML Tools This selection provides a point from which tools relevant to the selected element can be launched This prompt is only active when a connected device is selected on the Network Elements tree e BCM Monitor This is a separate application which can be installed at the same time as Element Manager and provides a number of panels that display current system operational information NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 45 Table 3 Initial Element Manager window attributes Continued Help Provides information to assist in using the Element Manager PDF Documents Provides a link to the documentation interface on the Business Communications Manager web page where you can find various PDF books describing the BCM50system and programming Contents Provides a link to the help system Note A brief function description appears when you mouse over field headings You can also access help contents by clicking on a heading and pressing F1 Refer to BCM50 Help system on page 66 for more details on Element Manager help available Application Log Collects messages generated by the Element Manager during normal operations Customer Support Provides a link to a Nortel Networks customer support web site About Provides information about the Element Manager such as the Element Manager Release level Icon Toolbar Icons are available if the Network Eleme
40. make the changes you require If callback for dial up users is required see Adding callback for a dial up user on page 92 If telset access is required see Adding Telset access for a user on page 92 Click OK to save the user account BCM50 Administration Guide 92 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges Adding callback for a dial up user As an administrator you can provide callback access to a user who is accessing the system through a dial up connection Callback security If a user is connecting to the system using a modem you can enhance your access security by assigning that person a specific user account that prompts the system to acknowledge the user then hang up and dial back the user at a designated telephone number before allowing the person to have access to the system To add callback for a dial up user 1 Select Configuration Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges View by Account Remote Access tab Select an existing user on the Accounts table If the user is connecting through a modem enter the number the system dials to contact the client modem in the Modem Callback Number field and enter a passcode in the Modem Callback Passcode field Ensure you include the correct routing codes If the user is connecting through ISDN enter the number the system dials to contact the client in the ISDN Callback Number field and enter a passcode in the ISDN Callbac
41. new keycodes No Action Required Yes No No Warning Service Manager Service Manager Time Service tmwservice has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped This will affect the synchronization of time in the system No Action Required Yes No No Warning Service Manager Service Manager Platform Status Monitor psm has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped This will affect the monitoring of system hardware and drivers No Action Required Yes No No NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 185 Warning Service Manager Service Manager Web Server httpd has been stopped either due to user laction or because Service Manager has stopped this service due toa dependency on another service that has been stopped This will affect the lonbox web pages downloads and documentation No Action Required es INO No Warning Service Manager Service Manager On Box Management Framework owcimomd has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been
42. ools Hey backup and Restore o ad _ Restore Logs Hea sotware Management Scheduled Backups aan Destination Schedule Add Delete Madity NN40020 600 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 283 Performing a scheduled backup to the BCM50 Caution A backup operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever the backup will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a backup that does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a backup at a time when the system is typically not in use To perform a scheduled backup to the BCM50 7 In the task panel click the Administration tab Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Backup The Backup panel opens and displays the Immediate Backup tab Click the Scheduled Backups tab The Scheduled Backups panel opens Click the Add button The Add Scheduled Backup window opens In the Backup To selection field choose BCM Click the OK button The Add Scheduled Backup window opens Read the warning carefully before proceeding In the Optional Components table select or clear the check box to include or exclude these components from the backup operation Click the OK button Configure the schedule attributes Table 77 Configure schedule attributes A
43. support group 11210 major Platform Platform Status Reboot system and Yes Yes Yes Yes Status Monitor Failed to lif problem reoccurs Monitor read Remote contact your local Temperature Support group T1212 major Platform Platform Status Check Fan operation Yes Yes es Yes Status Monitor Fan Below as fan is apparently Monitor Tolerance not working orrectly If alarm persists replace fan T1213 major Platform Platform Status Check the router IYes Yes Yes Yes Status Monitor Failed to jand if needed Monitor get Router status replace it T1274 warning Platform Platform Status Check the OAM Port Yes No No Status Monitor OAM Port physical LAN Monitor Link Down connection Tt215 warning Platform Platform Status Check the Customer Yes No No Status Monitor Customer LAN Port 1 physical Monitor LAN Port 1 Link LAN connection Down T1216 warning Platform Platform Status Check the Customer Yes No No 0 Status Monitor Customer LAN Port 2 physical Monitor LAN Port 2 Link LAN connection Down T1217 warning Platform Platform Status Check the Customer Yes No No Status Monitor Customer LAN Port 3 physical Monitor LAN Port 3 Link LAN connection Down T1250 major Platform Platform Status Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Status Monitor The size of Support group Monitor XXX Log file is greater than 16MB XXX Log file will be deleted to recover war log partition BCM50 Administration Guide
44. 27 7 NetWork stem Status lelephony Metrics Irunk Module Metrics The denied call details for each type of service supported by the line pool is displayed See Figure 34 on page 235 NN40020 600 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics 235 Figure 34 Denied calls details Details for Pool ROstr01 Calls denied because ChC limits were exceeded Service Type INCOMING due to Outgoing Min 4 due to Incoming Max OUTGOING due to Incoming Min due to Outgoing Max Table 58 describes each field on the two CbC metrics panels Table 58 Details for a Line Pool Attribute Value Call By Call Limit Metrics table Line Pool Read only The pool of lines that call by call limits are applied to Calls denied because CbC limits were exceeded table Service Type Read only The type of service that the limits apply to INCOMING due to Outgoing Read only The number of incoming calls that have been Min blocked due to the call by call limits due to Incoming Max Read only The number of incoming calls that have been blocked due to the call by call limits Outgoing due to Incoming Min Read only The number of outgoing calls that have been blocked due to the call by call limits due to Outgoing Max Read only The number of outgoing calls that have been blocked due to the call by call limits Actions Clear To clear the table so you can start a monitoring period
45. 3 Click the Restore button The Select Components to Restore window opens Restore Restore from BCM Restore from BCM Restore Select the optional components that you want to include from the backup file Click the OK button A warning window opens and displays information about components that will be affected by the restore operation Read the warning carefully before proceeding BCM50 Administration Guide 294 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 6 Click the Yes button to proceed A progress window opens When the operation is complete the Restore Complete window opens 7 Click the OK button Restoring data from your personal computer Caution A restore operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever restoring data will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a restore operation that does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a restore operation at a time when the system is typically not in use To restore data from your personal computer 1 Inthe task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Restore The Restore panel opens 3 Inthe Restore From selection field select My Computer Click the Restore button The Open window opens 5 Select the backup file to restore A window opens and displa
46. A log file tracks all backup and restore activities that occur on the system You can retrieve and view this file in the Operational Logs category The file name is lt archiver systemlog gt For information about BCM50 logs see Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs on page 301 NN40020 600 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 293 Restoring data from the BCM50 Caution A backup operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever the backup will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a backup that does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a backup at a time when the system is typically not in use To restore data from the BCM50 1 Inthe task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Restore The Restore panel opens The Restore From selection field has BCM as a default value Nortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager 192 168 249 27 File View etwor Session Tools Help i Exit Element Navigation Panel Task Navigation Panel ae g Refresh Autorefresh Configuration Administration enera system status h lelephony Metrics bg Hines _ BUM Monitor g Ping L lrace koute m Ethernet Activity Reset _ Diagnostic Settings Loe Data Debug ools ce Backup and Restore L Sotware Management
47. Base MIB II for use with network management protocols in TCP IP based internets SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB rfc2261 mib This is the SNMP Management Architecture MIB This standard MIB displays parameters related to the SNMP agent on the BCM50 ENTITY MIB HOST MIB IF MIB rfc2737 mib rfc2790 mib rfc2863 mib This MIB defines physical and logical system components on the BCM and associations between these components This MIB is used to manage host systems It is useful for monitoring resource usage and system performance This MIB describes generic objects for network interface sub layers Table 107 lists the file names and file descriptions of each supported Nortel MIB Table 107 MIB file descriptions for Nortel MIBs MIB File Name Notes Small Site MIB Smallsite mib This MIB defines the upper level hierarchy of an enterprise 1 nortel 562 sub branch called smallsite This Nortel MIB is the basis for several Nortel smallsite products In the BCM50 this MIB is a prerequisite for the Small Site Events MIB Small Site Events MIB Smallsiteevents mib This MIB defines the events traps that the Small Site product or component can use This MIB describes the events generated by the BCM This MIB contains fields such as eventld eventSource eventTime and EventDescr NN40020 600 Appendix A Management Information Bases 345 Accessing compiling
48. Based No Action Required Yes No No Based Admin Admin IP s ip laddress changed successfully B92 17010 Information System Set System Set Based No Action Required Yes No No Based Admin Admin MASK s subnet mask changed successfully B93 7011 Information System Set System Set Based No Action Required Yes No No No Based Admin Admin Gateway X ip gateway changed successfully B94 17012 Information System Set System Set Based No Action Required Yes No INO Based Admin Admin Keycode validated B95 170T3S Information System Set System Set Based No Action Required Yes No No Based Admin Admin Reboot required B96 17015 Information System Set System Set Based No Action Required Yes No No Based Admin Admin Modem Enabled Disabled B97 17100 warning System Set System Set Based Problem exists using Yes No No Based Admin Admin System Set System Set Based Based Admin Admin If problem general warning persists contact your alarm local support group B98 7111 warning System Set System Set Based Log back into Yes No No Based Admin Admin UserID X System Set based password changed admin to verify failed change If problem persists contact your local support group B99 17112 warning System Set System Set Based Log back into Yes No No Based Admin Admin UserID X System Set based user account admin to verify creation failed change If problem persists contact your local support group 400 17113
49. Creating a group As an administrator you can create new groups to satisfy organizational requirements To create a group 1 N Oo oO FP WO ND Select Configuration Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges View by Groups tab Click the Add button In the Add Group dialog box enter a name for the new group Click OK Select the new group from the Groups list In the Group Privileges area click the Add button In the Add Privilege to Group dialog box select one or more group privileges to assign to the group and click OK See Default groups on page 99 and Default access privileges excluding set based privileges on page 101 for more information Populate the group using Adding a user account to a group on page 95 Deleting a group As an administrator you can delete groups as organizational requirements change To delete a group 1 Select Configuration Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges View by Groups tab Select a group and click the Delete button Click Yes on the confirmation box to remove the groups from the list Modifying group privileges Only user created groups can be modified default group privileges cannot be modified NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 95 To modify group privileges 1 Select Configuration Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges View by Groups tab Select a group and then click the G
50. File menu select Snapshot Settings The Snapshot Settings panel opens Click the Static Snapshot Settings tab In the Path and Filename area enter the filename for the static snapshot in the Output Filename field For additional options click the Arrow button to the right of the Output Filename field Configure the Output Filename attributes Table 65 Output filename attributes Attribute Action Auto Increment Counter Automatically increments the filename so that subsequent files do not overwrite earlier files Adds lt counter gt to the filename in the Output Filename field BCM Name Adds the name of the BCM to the filename Position your cursor in the filename field where you want the name to be added Adds lt BCM name gt to the filename in the Output Filename field Time Adds the time to the filename Position your cursor in the filename field where you want the name to be added Adds lt time gt to the filename in the Output Filename field Date Adds the date to the filename Position your cursor in the filename field where you want the name to be added Adds lt date gt to the filename in the Output Filename field In Output Folder field enter the path of the folder where you want to store static snapshots To browse for a folder click the button to the right of the Output Folder field The Browse for Folder dialog box opens Select a folder or make a new folder and then click the O
51. Groups table Click the Delete button Click OK on the confirmation box to remove the groups from the list BCM50 Administration Guide 96 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges Re enable a locked out user As the administrator you can re enable a locked out user when the user has exceeded the login retry threshold The system shows an enabled check box under the Locked Out column on the Accounts table To release a locked out user 1 Select Configuration Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges View by Accounts tab Select the user record with the Locked Out status check box checked Click the Locked out check box to clear it Enabling and disabling an account As the administrator you can enable or disable accounts on an immediate basis or a timed basis a Security note Remember to disable unused accounts To enable or disable an account immediately 1 Select Configuration Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges View by Accounts tab Select the user you want to disable enable on the Accounts table Under the Disabled column either check disable or clear enable the check box for the user The change will apply to the user s next login To enable or disable an account on a timed basis 1 Select Configuration Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges View by Accounts tab Select the user you want to disable enable on the Accounts table Clic
52. If long term alarms occur get your network provider to check the ircuit during robiei conditions minor Core Core Telephony Check your cabling Yes No No Telephony Errored Second from any DTM short term alarm modules to the threshold has been external network and exceeded on the Irun loopback tests DTM The module is on the circuit to in a no new calls check for network state issues If long term alarms occur get your network provider to check the ircuit during problem conditions BCM50 Administration Guide 164 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 46 B26 minor Core Core Telephony Check your cabling No No Telephony l Slip Underflow from any DTM short term alarm modules to the threshold has been external network and exceeded onthe Irun loopback tests DTM The module is on the circuit to in ano new calls check for network state issues If long term alarms occur get your network provider to check the ircuit during problem conditions 47 minor Core Core Telephony Check your cabling No No Telephony Slip Overflow shortifrom any DTM term alarm modules to the threshold has been external network and exceeded onthe Irun loopback tests DTM The module is on the circuit to in ano new calls check for network state issues If long term alarms occur get your network provider to check the ircuit during problem conditions 48 minor Core C
53. In the User password field enter the user s password In the Confirm password dialog box enter the user s password again In the Telset password field enter the telset password for the user In the Confirm password dialog box enter the user s password again If the user is connecting through a modem enter the number the system dials to contact the client modem in the Modem Callback Number field and enter a passcode in the Modem Callback Passcode field Ensure you include the correct routing codes If the user is connecting through ISDN enter the number the system dials to contact the client in the ISDN Callback Number field and enter a passcode in the ISDN Callback Passcode field Select the Change Password on Login checkbox to force a password change when the user logs into Element Manager Select the Change Password on Login Telset checkbox to force a password change when the user logs into Telset Click OK to save the user account After the account is created the user can change their own password through the Current Account panel Refer to Changing the current user s password on page 93 Modifying a user account As an administrator you can modify user accounts To modify a user account 1 O ao A ODN Select Configuration Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges View by Account tab Select an existing user on the Accounts table and click the Modify button On the Modify Account dialog box
54. Include ACKed alarms Table 60 describes each field on the panel Table 60 PSTN Fallback Metrics fields Attribute Value Description Last reset time lt read only gt This is the date and time the metrics table was last reset Fallback requests lt read only gt The number of calls that were not able to route through the preferred trunk Fallback failures lt read only gt The number of calls that were not able to route through the fallback trunk Note If there is no fallback trunk assigned all fallback requests will fail Actions Reset Click this button to clear out the metrics table The Last reset time will display the current date and time Proactive Voice Quality Management Proactive Voice Quality Management PVQM metrics allow you to monitor the quality of VoIP calls You can also use the PVQM metrics to diagnose infrastructure problems in your network NN40020 600 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics 239 You can use PVQM to configure and report threshold violations for the following voice quality metrics e packet loss packets lost in transit due to errors or network failures e inter arrival jitter the variable delay on a packet as it traverses a network e round trip delay e listening R the transmission quality as experienced by the user this metric reflects the segment of the call that is carried over the RTP session There are two thresholds for PVQM metrics
55. Metrics Configuration Administration Hunt Groups eneral eH S stem status Answered Avg Time s a lelephony Metrics g J funk Module metrics _ UPE Lmt metrics e iaa o allpaci rics Lgrvyom fess Ututies Ha Backup and Restore B S Logs L g Log Management E a Sotware Management Details for Hunt Group 01 Last Reset Time 2005 09 15 11 59 20 Reset gt ju C 15 ua ww Law 6 Vv Include ACKed alarms Table 59 describes each field on the panel Table 59 Hunt Group Metrics fields Attribute Value Hunt Groups table Hunt group name Read only Name of hunt group Name Read only Name entered on DN record NN40020 600 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics 237 Table 59 Hunt Group Metrics fields Continued Attribute Value Total calls Read only Total number of calls Answered Total Read only Total number of answered calls Answered Average Read only Average number of answered calls Answered Average time s Read only Average answer time in seconds Abandoned Total Read only Total number of abandoned calls Abandoned Average Read only Average number of abandoned calls Busy Total Read only Total number of busy calls Busy Average Read only Average number of busy calls Overflow Total Read only Total number of overflow calls Overflow Average Read only Average number of overflow calls Time in Queue Read only Time
56. Status and Metrics Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates Chapter 14 Accounting Management Appendix A Management Information Bases Contents This chapter introduces management concepts and techniques This chapter contains information on the different tools available to manage your BCMB50 It also describes the Element Manager application in detail This chapter describes Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges which allow you to establish system wide security policies and maintain system access security using Element Manager This chapter describes how to use the Hardware Inventory which displays information about the BCM system such as connected expansion units populated Media Bay Modules MBMs and attached telephone devices This chapter describes the management of the BCM50 using SNMP SNMP is a set of protocols for managing complex networks SNMP compliant devices called agents store data about themselves in Management Information Bases MIBs and provide this data to SNMP requesters This chapter contains information about managing alarms generated by the system and administering alarm settings This chapter describes how to use Element Manager to view and administer the services that run on the system This chapter describes how to use Element Manager to view det
57. Unistim Terminal Proxy Server Contact your local support group Yes Yes es Yes UTPS has determined that the SRG process is not running but cannot determine whether lor not the SRG keycode has been applied the UTPS cannot continue without that information aborting with error lt lt lerrorCode Contact your local support group Yes Yes es Yes NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 203 bOT P0006 Critical Unistim UTPS failed to Contact your local es es es es Terminal establish a link to support group Proxy Server the SRG process Aborting with error lt lt errorCode 502 60007 critical Unistim UTPS opened a link Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal with the SRG support group Proxy Server process but failed to get the SRG keycode information Aborting with error lt lt errorCode 503 0008 critical Unistim UTPS has lostits Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal link to the SRG support group Proxy Server process and can no longer continue terminating 504 60009 Critical Unistim UTPS waited for Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal SRG process to support group Proxy Server supply SRG keycode information but no response was received terminating 605 60010 critical Unistim UTPS failed to Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal create socket on support group
58. User Documentation Web Application Download Web Download Callpilot Unified Messaging Web Application Download Web Download Desktop Assistant Web Application Download Web Download Desktop Assistant Pro Web Application Download Web Download 2050 Soft Phone Web Application Download Web Download Personal Call Manager Web Application Download Web Download Lan CTE Client Admin Download access privileges Web Documentation User Documentation Web Documentation Admin Documentation Web Application Download Web Download Element Manager Web Application Download Web Download NCM for BCM50 Web Application Download Web Download Callpilot Unified Messaging BCM50 Administration Guide 104 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges e Web Application Download Web Download Desktop Assistant e Web Application Download Web Download Desktop Assistant Pro e Web Application Download Web Download 2050 Soft Phone e Web Application Download Web Download Personal Call Manager e Web Application Download Web Download Lan CTE Client e Web Application Download Web Download BCM Monitor e Web Application Download Web Download CDR Client Wrapper Utility e Web Application Download Web Download SSH Exclusive Access access privileges e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User e Web Documentation User Documentation e Web User Applications Admin access
59. Warning and Unacceptable A violation of the Warning threshold indicates that the voice quality is reduced but is still within an acceptable range A violation of the Unacceptable threshold indicates a severe degradation in voice quality PVQM is fully supported on Phase 2 IP sets Phase 1 IP sets support only the following PVQM metrics packet loss inter arrival jitter and rould trip delay Table 61 lists the IP Phones that support PVQM Table 61 PVQM support IP Set Type Description IP Phone 2001 Phase 2 firmware IP Phone 2002 Phase 1 and Phase 2 firmware IP Phone 2004 Phase 1 and Phase 2 firmware IP Phone 2050 v2 PC based soft client IP Phone 2007 Phase 2 firmware IP Phone 1120E Phase 2 firmware IP Phone 1140E Phase 2 firmware This section provides procedures To configure PVQM threshold settings and To access PVQM metrics and also provides information about PVQM alarms To configure PVQM threshold settings 1 Inthe Element Manager select the Administration tab then click the Telephony Metrics gt PVQM gt Threshold Settings in the navigation tree The Proactive Voice Quality Monitoring panel displays See Figure 36 on page 238 BCM50 Administration Guide 240 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics Figure 37 PVQM panel lement Manager 192 168 249 27 Auto retresh lelephony Metrics Nunk Module Metrics o CHC Limit Metrics Hunt Group Metrics
60. When you proceed to the next step the selected file will overwrite the backup file that is stored on the BCM Ensure that the correct backup file is selected before proceeding 5 Click the Open button The Select Components to Restore window opens Select the optional components that you want to include from the backup file Click the OK button A warning window opens and displays information about components that will be affected by the restore operation Read the warning carefully before proceeding 8 Click the Yes button to proceed A progress window opens When the operation is complete the Restore Complete window opens NN40020 600 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 297 9 Click the OK button Restoring data from an FTP server Caution A restore operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever restoring data will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a restore operation that does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a restore operation at a time when the system is typically not in use To restore data from an FTP server 1 In the task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Restore The Restore panel opens 3 In the Restore From selection field select FTP Server Configure the Restore from FTP
61. Yes Yes open license file jor enter keycodes lagain 435 critical Keycodes Keycodes failed to Reboot the system Yes Yes Yes Yes read system id land if problem persists contact your local support group 436 81056 critical Keycodes Keycodes cannot Restorelicensingfilejves Nes Yes Yes find system id tag jor enter keycodes lagain 437 critical Keycodes Keycodes failed to Restore licensing file Yes Yes Yes Yes read sequence lor enter keycodes number again 438 critical Keycodes Keycodes cannot Restore licensing file Yes Yes Yes Yes find sequence tag jor enter keycodes lagain 439 critical Keycodes Keycodes failed to Restore licensing file Yes Yes Yes Yes read key type ior enter keycodes lagain 440 critical Keycodes IKeycodes failed to Restore licensing file Yes Yes es Yes read key code lor enter keycodes keycode size gt again 441 critical Keycodes IKeycodes failed to Restore licensing file Yes Yes es Yes again ritica eycodes eycodes failed to Ensure component Yes es es es 443 critical Keycodes Keycodes invalid Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes data range for support group feature lt feature code gt lt feature data gt 444 critical Keycodes Keycodes wrong Check the system ID Yes Yes es Ye s system id in your licensing configuration 445 critical Keycodes Keycodes wrong Check the sequence Yes Yes es Yes sequence number number in your licensi
62. Yes Yes es Yes Manager On Box corresponding alarm Management 10121 or 10321 If Framework service doesn t owcimomd has restart then reboot stopped system and contact unexpectedly your local support Element Manager group will be unable to connect with the system Service Manager is attempting to restart the service NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 175 m45 critical Service Service Manager Check for es es es es Manager IP Terminal Service corresponding alarm EchoServer has 10124 or 10324 If stopped service doesn t unexpectedly This restart then reboot will affect IP system and contact terminals from your local support operating properly group Service Manager is attempting to restart the service T46 critical Service Service Manager Check for Yes Yes es Yes Manager IP Terminal corresponding alarm Firmware upload 10125 or 10325 If Service UftpServer service doesn t has stopped restart then reboot unexpectedly This system and contact will affect the ability your local support to download new group firmware to IP terminals Service Manager is attempting to restart the service T50 critical Service Service Manager Check for Yes Yes Yes Yes Manager Doorphone service corresponding alarm BCM_Doorphone 10129 or 10329 If has stopped service doesn t unexpectedly This restart then reboot will affect
63. _jissues ATS information System System No Action Required Yes No No Authenticatio Authentication In User Lockout lended aTa information System System No Action Required No No No 0 Authenticatio Authentication In User logon User X Host Y Comp Z ATS information System System No Action Required No No No Authenticatio Authentication In User logoff User X Comp SBA ATG minor System System onitor user activity Yes No No fe Authenticatio Authentication for lockout condition In User failed to login f concerned check User X Host Y Last successful Comp Z login timestamp on View by Accounts panel AT7 information System System No Action Required Yes No No Authenticatio Authentication In User logon User X Host Y Comp WWW ATS information System System No Action Required Yes No No 0 Authenticatio Authentication In Account created ATI information System System No Action Required Yes No No Authenticatio Authentication In Account updated 420 information System System No Action Required Yes No No Authenticatio Authentication In Account password changed 421 information System System No Action Required Yes No No fe Authenticatio Authentication In Account enabled 422 80304 information System System NoActon Required Yes No No No Authenticatio Authentication In Account deleted User X Comp Y 423 information System System No Action Required Yes No No fe Authenticatio Auth
64. account notifications user ID and authentication method System Identification View system information Date and Time View and set current date and time including selection of time source Keycodes Retrieve view and manage keycodes IP Subsystem View information about the IP subsystem Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges Manage users groups and privileges Security policies Manage passwords and other security policies including authentication methods SNMP Manage SNMP settings and trap destinations NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 49 Table 5 Configuration task navigation panel headings Continued Resources Application Resources Media Gateways Reserved resources as well as resources in use Manage level of Echo cancellation and T 38 UDP redundancy for all media gateways Port Ranges Add or delete Ports for IP Telephony Telephony Resources Manage location type and status of both physical and virtual modules including media gateways IP trunks and Sets Telephony Global Settings Feature Settings Manage feature settings and timers Advanced Feature Settings Manage SWCA ONN Blocking Silent Monitor and Call Log Space IP Terminal Features Add or delete features and view List of Key Labels System Speed Dial CAP Assignment Manage speed dial numbers with bypass restrictions View Cap number and set DN
65. after restore of restore with a known data good backup If problem persists contact your local upport group 36 critical Core Core Telephony erify that all types Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony Digital station loop of attached sets error peripherals initialize land function If something is not working reset it If the problem persists contact your local PRPO group 37 minor Core Core Telephony erify all trunks lines Yes INO INO 0 Telephony Line presence test are connected to the failure on system system and in startup due to no Working condition If battery feedona hot disable enable trunk line the trunk interfaces If problems persists contact your local support group 38 minor Core Core Telephony Check the trunk Yes No No Telephony No dialtone on trunk interfaces to see if line during seizure dialtone is present If no dialtone is present contact your network provider Bg minor Core Core Telephony Check the analog Yes No No 0 Telephony _ Invalid disconnect _ trunk interfaces to sequence error on_ ensure all lines are lan analog trunk line joperating correctly If a trunk is showing busy with no active calls disable the trunk interface and re enable it If problems persist contact your local support group 40 minor Core Core Telephony Check the trunk Yes No No 0 Telephony Outgoing trunk interfaces to ensure could not be seized all lines are Handshake between operating correctly the system and If a trunk is
66. and MBMs see the BCM50 Release 2 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide NN40020 302 BCM50 applications BCM50 supports many high value applications You enable applications by entering the appropriate keycodes Some applications are e Voice Messaging for standard voicemail and autoattendant features e Unified Messaging providing integrated voicemail management between voicemail and common email applications e Fax Suite providing support for attached analog fax devices e Voice Networking features e LAN CTE e Digital Mobility additional hardware is required Management Model Whether BCMS0 is being installed as a standalone element is part of a network of many BCM50s or is part of a network encompassing both BCM50s and other devices it is necessary to be able to perform a range of administrative tasks to keep the system or systems providing the services which they were deployed to provide The individual or organization responsible for performing the administration of the system needs to be able to do some or all of the following types of tasks e monitor to validate that the system is healthy For example power is available services are running CPU and memory are within a normal operating envelope e monitor for fault conditions e monitor link status and utilization e system programming is consistent with the requirements of the services e backups are being kept of the configuration BCM50 Administration Guide
67. and Metrics Table 64 PVQM Metrics fields Attribute Value Description Actions Reset Metrics Click this button to clear out the metrics table The Last reset time will display the current date and time NN40020 600 245 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities This chapter contains information about the utilities that are part of the Element Manager These utilities provide information about the BCM50 system so that you can monitor and analyze system status and performance BCM50 utilities are e BCM Monitor e Ping e Trace Route e Ethernet Activity e Reset e Diagnostic Settings About BCM Monitor BCM Monitor is a stand alone diagnostic application that the system administrator can use to view real time system and IP telephony information about BCM50 systems BCM Monitor is included with the installation of the Element Manager You do not need to download the utility unless you are an administrative user who requires access to only this management tool and you do not have or require the Element Manager Using BCM Monitor you can monitor the following e overall system status e IP telephony functions of the BCM50 system including IP device activity and VoIP session information e utilization of resources e operation of telephony applications for example Voice Mail and Contact Center e lines PRI BRI and IP trunks You use BCM Monitor from a remote PC that has IP con
68. and maximum values are deleted and BCM Monitor starts recording new values To reset the minimum and maximum values for a statistic 1 Click the value you want to reset 2 Do one of the following a On the Statistics menu click Reset Current Min Max b To reset the minimum and maximum values for all statistics select Reset All Min Max from the Statistics menu NN40020 600 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities 265 Ping Ping Packet InterNet Groper is a utility that you can use to verify that a route exists between the BCM50 and another device Ping sends an ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol echo request message to a host It expects an ICMP echo reply which you can use to measure the round trip time to the selected host You can measure the percent packet loss for a route by sending repeated ICMP echo request messages Zjnortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager oj x Fie View Network Session Tools Help gt Pee eres Refresh g Autorefresh Element Navigation Panel 4 Task Navigation Panel system Status lelephony Metrics g Bem montor o _ Trace koute _ Reset _ Diagnostic Settings _ Vata Networking Utities backup and Kestore Logs Sotware Management To ping a device Ping Address Png Results co p M92 m0 W0 pg Include ACKed alarms Click the Administration tab 2 Open the Utilities folder and then click Ping The Ping panel opens 3 Inthe Address
69. and the number of records found You can stop the retrieval by clicking the Stop button The Log Browser displays all the records it has found to a set maximum display limit The maximum display limit is 3000 records Most log files exceed this limit when this happens you cannot view the remaining records in the log file If this is the case try using filter criteria for a specific date or dates to reduce the number of results You can sort the contents of the table by clicking the headings in the table You can view details about a log record by selecting a log record or multiple log records in the Retrieval Results area To filter information displayed in the Retrieval Results table you can select or clear the check boxes in the Show area below the Retrieval Results table You can filter the results by alarm severity Debug Info Warn or Error To filter information in the Retrieval Results table 1 Retrieve log files See the procedure To specify retrieval criteria on page 319 2 Below the Retrieval Results table select or deselect any of the following filters e Critical displays only Critical level e Major displays only Major level e Minor displays only Minor level e Info displays only Information level e Warn displays only Warning level Log Details area The Log Details area located below the Retrieval Results list displays the details for a selected log record or multiple log records Viewing l
70. are assigned to Contact Center and Voice Mail e how many assigned ports are currently active and the DN of the user assigned to the port e voice port details which show information about activity on each enabled voice port I BCM Monitor Bem_m50r1 i jel a Fie Statistics Help BCM Info Media Card Voice CTI Ports Voice Port Details Modem group DN 396 Active on call Resource limit 11 Enabled ports 11 Assigned ports 11 Active on call 1 m Call Center Assigned ports N A Active on call N A IVR Assigned ports N A Active on call N A m Voice Mail Assigned ports 10 P Devices RIP Sessions UIP Line Monitor Usage Indicators 396 Standby Modem Voice Mail group DN 395 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 IP Devices t ab The IP Devices tab displays information about call activity associated with IP sets wireless sets and IP trunks IP sets include IP clients for example the i2050 softphone i200x IP sets and wireless sets The IP Devices tab shows how many sets in each category are enabled connected and active The tab displays the DN IP address and type of set for each active call BCM50 Administration Guide 256 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities BCM Monitor Bem_m50r1 j File Statistics Help BCM Info Media Card Voice Ports If IP C
71. be applied jnortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager 192 168 249 27 ioj x Fie View Metwork Session Tools Help Eis Exit acd amp Refresh g Auto retresh Software Updates Updates in Progress Scheduled Updates F eneral h system status HHA lelephony Metrics h g vimes h oy Backup and Restore ie fia Logs ae 501 Scheduled Software Updates Yersion Description Size Reboot Req d Status Location Retrieve Apply Add Modify _ Sottware Inventory 4 gt is ia Be T 4 MS Wate S p m Wi14 jg Include ACKed alarms Table 97 lists the information that is available on the Updates in Progress table Table 97 Information about updates in progress Detail Description Name The name of the software update Version The version of the software update Description A brief description of the software update Size The size of the software update in KB Reboot Req d Displays whether the software update causes the BCM50 to reboot when the update has been applied If a reboot is required the check box is checked Location The location from which the software update is being retrieved for example an FTP server or a network folder Status The status of the update See Table 98 for information NN40020 600 Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates 325 Table 98 lists the statuses of software updates Table 98 Software update statuses
72. can be changed to suit your specific requirements Security Note Nortel recommends changing all default system passwords after the system is up and running and operation is verified Considerations Consider the following e Do you want administrative users to be able to access the system through the telset configuration menus e How much access to the Element Manager interface are users allowed Access is based on user privileges defined through user group membership There is one default Element Manager administrator account nnadmin This account has a default telset user ID and password There is also a read only guest default account nnguest which does not have a default telset user ID and password You can delete the guest account to increase security if you wish e Do you need to have a temporary account that expires e How long do you want the Element Manager to remain open if there is no input from the user e How long do you want a user account to be locked out after a specified number of incorrect passwords are entered e How complex do you want user IDs and passwords to be in terms of length and character requirements e Do you want modem access to use callbacks NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 123 e Do you require the added security of a private SSL certificate Core system configuration such as resources and network management should be restricted
73. failed cannot find standby Hot Desking session 640 60125 major Unistim Lost Connection to Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal SRG support group Proxy Server b4T 60192 major Unistim AppFwCriticalSectio Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal n init support group Proxy Server josCreateEvent rc lt lt errorCode 542 60193 major Unistim AppFwCriticalSectio Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal n init support group Proxy Server josCreateEvent rc lt lt errorCode 643 60194 major Unistim AppFwCriticalSectio Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal n MessageToSelf support group Proxy Server josReceiveError lt lt lerrorCode 544 50195 major Unistim AppFwCriticalSectio Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal n Acquire support group Proxy Server josReceiveError lt lt errorCode 545 B0196 major Unistim In Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal Application Initializasupport group Proxy Server tionComplete but NnuServicelnitialize d returned lt lt errorCode lt lt APPLICATION WILL BE SHUT DOWN 646 60197 major Unistim Application Run Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal caught unspecified support group Proxy Server exception FORCING EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 207 major Unistim Application Run Contact your local es es es es Terminal caught exceptio
74. features of the BCM50 system This guide also describes additional administrative tasks such as log management backups software updates monitoring and inventory management Use the Element Manager to perform these administrative tasks In brief the information in this guide explains Network structure and concepts Management tools Fault management amp monitoring Performance management Security administration Backup management Software updates Inventory management Organization This guide is organized for easy access to information that explains the administrative concepts operations and procedures associated with using the BCM50 management application BCM50 Administration Guide 16 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM50 The tasks described in this guide assume that you are using the Element Manager with full administrative privileges If you do not have full administrative privileges you may see only a subset of the tasks and panels described in this guide Table 1 BCM50 Administration Guide organization Chapter Chapter 2 Overview of BCM50 Administration Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges Chapter 5 Using the BCM50 Hardware Inventory Chapter 6 Managing BCM50 with SNMP Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System Chapter 8 Using the BCM50 Service Management System Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50
75. field Bus 3 Bus 4 Bus 5 Bus 6 Bus 7 Bus 8 4 Select the type of ISDN module or modules PRI enables monitoring of a DTI module BRI enables monitoring of BRI loops For example you can monitor UIP messages for loops 1 and 2 of a BRI module connected to Bus 5 and a PRI module connected to Bus 6 To do this you would Select Bus 5 BRI then select Module 1 Loop 1 SelectBus 5 BRI then select Module 1 Loop 2 Select Bus 6 PRI To disable monitoring of UIP messages 1 Click the UIP tab 2 From the Bus drop down list select the bus you want to disable 3 Select the Off radio button Note To disable monitoring of UIP messages for MCDN over IP you must deselet the MCDN over IP check box NN40020 600 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities 259 To log UIP data 1 Click the UIP tab 2 Select the Log UIP Data check box You can log UIP data to track the most recent 20 UIP messages If you enable UIP logging BCM Monitor writes UIP messages in log files which are created in the log folder in the BCM Monitor startup directory One log file is generated for each monitored system and each module or loop Log files are named IPAddr_MCDN log IPAddr_PRI_BusX log and IPAddr_BRI_BusXModuleYLoopZ log To view UIP log files 1 Locate the log file that is saved to the BCM Monitor startup directory 2 Open the log file with a text editor such as Notepad or a spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel
76. field enter the IP address of the element you want to ping Click the Ping button The results appear in the Results area BCM50 Administration Guide 266 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities Note Establishing a PPP link over a modem make take some time If the Ping utility times out before the modem call can be established click the Ping button again Trace Route You can use Trace Route to measure round trip times to all hops along a route This helps you to identify bottlenecks in the network Trace Route uses the IP TTL time to live field to determine router hops to a specific IP address A router must not forward an IP packet with a TTL field of 0 or 1 Instead a router discards the packet and returns to the originating IP address an ICMP time exceeded message Traceroute sends an IP datagram with a TTL of 1 to the selected destination host The first router to handle the datagram sends back a time exceeded message This message identifies the first router on the route Trace Route then transmits a datagram with a TTL of 2 The second router on the route returns a time exceeded message until all hops are identified The Traceroute IP datagram has a UDP Port number not likely to be in use at the destination normally greater than 30 000 The destination returns a port unreachable ICMP packet The destination host is identified To perform a trace route 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Open the Utilities folder and
77. field it overwrites any IP address that was previously configured on the Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces gt ISDN Dial In Parameters panel NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 117 View by Accounts History The History panel provides user account and login histories and account control settings Table 28 describes each field on this panel Table 28 View by Accounts History fields Attribute Value Description Account history Account created read only Specifies the date that the user record was added Created by Specifies the userlD of the person who added the user account Last Modified read only Specifies the date the user record was last modified Modified by Specifies the userlD of the person who last modified the account Login history Last successful login read only Specifies the date the user last successfully logged on to either the Element Manager Failed login count read only Specifies the number of times the user tried and failed to log on before successfully logging in or being locked out If the count matches the failed login threshold a value of true is displayed in the Locked Out column on the Accounts table Last failed login read only Specifies the date that the user last tried and failed to logon From read only Element Manager Displays the IP address of the Element Manager Telset login his
78. group 406 17141 warning System Set System Set Based Log back into Yes No No 0 Based Admin Admin LAN subnet System Set based mask change failed admin to verify mask X change If problem persists contact your local support group 07 17142 warning System Set System Set Based Log back into Yes No No Based Admin Admin LAN System Set based Gateway change admin to verify failed gateway X change If problem persists contact your local support group 408 T7200 Critical System Set System Set Based Problem exists using Yes Yes es Yes Based Admin Admin System Set System Set Based Based Admin Admin If problem general critical persists contact your alarm local support group 409 T9002 Critical Startup ProfileStartup Profile Check logfile on Yes Yes es Yes Startup Profile had 1 USB device or more errors when trying to apply 410 T9010 Information Startup ProfileStartup Profile No Action Required Yes No No fe Startup Profile completed successfully ATT T9TOT warning Startup ProfileStartup Profile Delete existing log Yes No No Startup Profile failed file on USB to to apply because continue previous log file exists on USB device NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 199 At2 major System System Check user account Yes es es es Authenticatio Authentication for potential security In User Locked out
79. gt cT lt gt eT lt gt nLR k gt dR lt gt bD lt gt bL kK gt gD lt gt gL lt gt leSD lt gt aNL lt l gt aSP lt gt rTT lt gt No Action Required Yes Yes No warning Unistim Terminal Proxy Server Inter Arrival Jitter Violation Warning lt gt near DN lt gt source IP lt gt source port lt gt destination IP lt gt destination port lt gt cT lt gt eT lt gt nLR k gt dR lt gt bD lt gt bL k gt gD lt gt gL lt gt leSD lt gt aNL KkI gt aSP lt gt rTT lt gt No Action Required Yes Yes No minor Unistim Terminal Proxy Server Inter Arrival Jitter Violation Unacceptable lt gt near DN lt gt source IP lt gt source port lt gt destination IP lt gt destination port lt gt CT lt gt eT lt gt nLR lt gt dR lt gt bD lt gt bL lt gt gD lt gt gL lt gt eSD k gt aNL lt I gt aSP K gt TT lt gt No Action Required Yes Yes No NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 209 information Unistim Terminal Proxy Server Round Trip Delay Violation Cleared lt gt near DN lt gt source IP lt gt Source port lt gt destination IP lt gt destination port lt gt cT lt gt eT lt gt nLR k gt dR lt gt bD lt gt bL kK gt gD lt gt gL lt gt leSD lt gt aNL lt
80. gt many megabytes depending on the software components addressed by the software update The amount of time required to transfer the software update to the BCM50 before you apply the update depends on the size of the software update file and on the type of connectivity between the location of the software update and the BCM50 being updated You can apply software updates that have a status of Available The application of software generates an information event but does not generate an alarm condition You can apply updates from the following storage locations e a USB storage device e your personal computer e a shared folder e an FTP server e an HTTP server with or without SSL You can view details about a software update before you apply it You can apply a software immediately or schedule the update for a future time Applied software is displayed in the Software Update History table NN40020 600 Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates 327 Applying an update from your personal computer Caution Applying a software update to the BCM50 is a service affecting operation Nortel recommends that you schedule updates for low traffic hours Caution If a software update has a checkmark applied against it in the Reboot Req d column of the Find Software Updates window the BCM50 automatically restarts as soon as the update is applied You do not receive a reboot confirmation before the reboot
81. in queue Details Last Reset time Read only Time and date format depends country profile of system Reset 1 On the Hunt Groups table select the hunt group member for which you want to reset the metrics 2 Inthe lower frame click the Reset button PSTN Fallback Metrics When trunks are out of service traffic can be switched to PSTN fallback lines You can view how many fallback attempts and fallback failures occur within a specific period using the PSTN Fallback Metrics panel This section provides the procedure To access PSTN Fallback metrics To access PSTN Fallback metrics 1 Inthe Element Manager select the Administration tab then click the Telephony Metrics and PSTN Fallback Metrics in the navigation tree The PSTN Fallback metrics display immediately See Figure 36 on page 238 BCM50 Administration Guide 238 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics Figure 36 Fallback Metrics panel iolxi Fie View Network Session Tools Help Es Exit Element Navigation Panel 4 Task Navigation Panel ee Econ E Refresh g Suto refrest PSTH Fallback Metrics Last reset time 2000 01 01 01 00 00 w twa n a System Status L Sq leleprony metrics Fallback requests 0 L e lrunk Module Metrics CPC Lmt metrics eric Sunt Group metrics oE J janye ana oe y Utities Reset Backup and Restore Sq Logs Lg Log Management g Software Management fu 2 ua uays ji W11 Vv
82. l gt aSP lt gt rTT lt gt No Action Required es es No warning Unistim Terminal Proxy Server Round Trip Delay Violation Warning lt gt near DN lt gt source IP lt gt source port lt gt destination IP lt gt destination port lt gt ICT lt gt eT lt gt nLR k gt dR lt gt bD lt gt bL kK gt gD lt gt gL lt gt leSD lt gt aNL kIl gt aSP lt gt rTT lt gt No Action Required Yes Yes No minor Unistim Terminal Proxy Server Round Trip Delay Violation Unacceptable lt gt near DN lt gt source IP lt gt source port lt gt destination IP lt gt destination port lt gt CT lt gt eT k gt nLR lt gt dR K gt bD lt gt bL lt gt gD lt gt gL lt gt eSD lt gt aNL lt Il gt aSP lt gt rTT lt gt No Action Required Yes Yes No information Unistim Terminal Proxy Server Listening R Factor Violation Cleared lt gt near DN lt gt source IP lt gt source port lt gt destination IP lt gt destination port lt gt cT lt gt eT lt gt nLR k gt dR lt gt bD lt gt bL kK gt gD lt gt gL lt gt leSD lt gt aNL lt l gt aSP lt gt rTT lt gt No Action Required Yes Yes No warning Unistim Terminal Proxy Server Listening R Factor Violation Warning lt gt near DN lt gt source IP lt gt so
83. lerrorCode 519 60103 major Unistim Unable to update Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal the feature table in support group Proxy Server the PDR error lt lt ret lt lt 520 60104 major Unistim tPerDNConfiguratio Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal n ListenerDnChang support group Proxy Server led could not find entry for DN lt lt oldDn 521 650105 major Unistim Attempting to save Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal jitter for the invalid support group Proxy Server DN of lt lt dn 522 60106 major Unistim Attempting to save Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal codec for the invalid support group Proxy Server DN of lt lt dn NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 205 bOT08 major Unistim Error lt lt errorCode Contact your local es es es es Terminal lt lt writing support group Proxy Server jadvertisement logo lt lt logo lt lt to PDR 50109 major Unistim Error lt lt errorcode Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal lt lt changing support group Proxy Server registration flag in registry 50110 major Unistim Error lt lt errorCode Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal lt lt changing global support group Proxy Server password flag in registry 50111 major Unistim Error lt lt errorCode Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal lt lt attempting to su
84. log file is saved as a tar file in the location you specified Performing an immediate log transfer to an SFTP server Note The time required to transfer log files varies with the amount of log data being collected and the speed of your devices and network Note You must set up the SFTP server to allow the BCM50 to communicate with the SFTP server For information about how to set up an SFTP server and about SSH keys see Transferring an SSH Key Pair on page 89 To perform an immediate log transfer to an SFTP server Click the Administration tab and then open the Logs folder Click the Log Management task The Log Management panel opens Click the Immediate Log Transfer tab In the Transfer To selection field select SFTP Server Configure the Transfer to SFTP Server attributes Table 92 Configure Transfer to SFTP Server attributes Attribute Action SFTP Server Enter the hostname or IP address of the SFTP server User Name Enter the user name associated with the SFTP server Directory Enter the path to the subdirectory as applicable optional 6 Click the Transfer button 10 The Transfer window opens Select the log file categories that you want to include in the log file transfer Click the OK button A confirmation window opens and displays applicable warnings Click the Yes button to initiate the transfer The Progress Update window opens When the log files are transferre
85. network element tree and create a new instance of a network element in the tree with a new IP address If the IP address of the device changes you must delete the original entry in the Element Manager network element tree and create a new instance of a network element in the tree with a new IP address e Connect When selected Element Manager attempts to open a connection to the selected element You can also connect to a network element by right clicking on the selected element e View Logs Opens a View Logs dialog box which allows you to view any log files for the selected element See Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs on page 301 for more information on viewing logs Session Allows you to select actions for any of the network elements to which there is a currently active Element Manager session If there are no active Element Manager sessions then this selection will be greyed out e Show If multiple devices are connected allows you to easily select one of the connected elements from the presented list and switch the active Element Manager view to that element e Disconnect Allows you to disconnect from the device A warning dialog box is presented asking if you really want to disconnect from the device You can also disconnect from a device by right clicking on the device in the network element tree and selecting Disconnect The Element Manager remains open e Save Programming Record Allows you to save programmed information in
86. not able network failed to be used contact your network provider NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 163 minor Core Core Telephony Ifthe event occurs Yes No INO Telephony _ Set initialization more than once ina error from an invalid 5 minute span then message from the disconnect the set in set question If problem stops replace set land check cable between set and ystem minor Core Core Telephony A Verity that all types Yes No No Telephony Iset is trying to lof attached sets initialize thathas peripherals initialize incompatible land function If firmware on the something is not system working reset it If the problem persists contact your local support group minor Core Core Telephony Check your cabling Yes No No Telephony Degraded Minute from any DTM short term alarm modules to the threshold has been external network and exceeded on the Irun loopback tests DTM The module is on the circuit to in a no new calls check for network state issues If long term alarms occur get your network provider to check the ircuit during problem conditions minor Core Core Telephony Check your cabling Yes No No Telephony l Severely Errored from any DTM Second short term modules to the alarm threshold has external network and been exceeded on Irun loopback tests the DTM The ion the circuit to module is in a no check for network new calls state issues
87. on Irun loopback tests the DTM ion the circuit to check for network issues Get your network provider to check the circuit during problem conditions T4 critical Core Core Telephony Check your cabling Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony Remote Alarm from any DTM Indication long term modules to the alarm threshold has external network and been exceeded on Irun loopback tests the DTM ion the circuit to check for network issues Get your network provider to check the circuit during problem conditions T5 critical Core Core Telephony Check your cabling Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony Loss of Signal long from any DTM term alarm modules to the threshold has been external network and exceeded on the Irun loopback tests DTM ion the circuit to check for network issues Get your network provider to check the circuit during problem conditions T6 critical Core Core Telephony Check your cabling Yes Yes es Yes Telephony Alarm Indication from any DTM Signal long term modules to the alarm threshold has external network and been exceeded on Irun loopback tests the DTM ion the circuit to check for network issues Get your network provider to check the circuit during problem conditions BCM50 Administration Guide 160 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 17 7 critical Core Core Telephony Check your cabling Yes es es es Telephony Remot
88. operation Nortel recommends that you schedule updates for low traffic hours Caution If a software update has a checkmark applied against it in the Reboot Req d column of the Find Software Updates window the BCMS0 will automatically reboot as soon as the patch has been applied You will not receive a reboot confirmation before the reboot occurs To apply an update from a shared folder In the task panel click the Administration tab Open the Software Management folder and then click the Software Update task The Software Update panel opens The Updates in Progress tab is open Click the Get New Updates button The Get New Updates window opens Select Network Folder from the Retrieve From selection field Configure the network folder attributes Table 99 Configure Network Folder attributes Attribute Action Network Folder Enter the IP address or host name of the remote computer User Name Enter the user name associated with the shared folder Password Enter the user name associated with the shared folder Directory Enter the name of the shared folder as well as the path to update if itis a subdirectory of the shared folder BCM50 Administration Guide 330 Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates 10 Click the OK button The Find Software Updates window opens and displays a list of updates found in the specified location Select an update The update must have a status of
89. panel is displayed 4 Click the Add button The Add Trap Destination dialog box opens 5 Configure the Add Trap Destination attributes Table 44 Add Trap Destination Attributes Attribute Action Name Enter a name for the trap Host Enter the IP address of the trap destination Port Enter the UDP port number from which the trap will be sent The default value is 162 SNMP Version Select the version of the SNMP Agent for the trap Options are v1 v2C and v3 Community String Enter the community string to use for the SNMP trap User Name For v3 only enter the user name for the SNMP trap 6 Click the OK button The new trap destination is displayed in the Trap Destinations table Note When the SNMP agent is restarted the System Uptime is reset The SNMP agent is restarted whenever you reboot the system make an SNMP configuration change or enable disable the SNMP agent Viewing and modifying SNMP trap destinations Once you have configured SNMP settings you can view and administer SNMP trap destinations You can delete and modify SNMP trap destinations Note You can configure and administer SNMP trap destinations in both the gt Configuration tab and the Administration tab of the Element Manager This allows operators who manage BCM50 faults to configure SNMP trap destinations without having to access the SNMP settings on the Configuration panel SNMP must be enabled on the SNMP Gene
90. privileges e all privileges DATA Admins group access privileges e EM CONFIG System IP Subsystem e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Dial In e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Dial Out e EM CONFIG Resources Media Gateways e EM CONFIG Data Services DHCP Server Settings e EM CONFIG Data Services Class 1 Router e EM ADMIN General Alarm e EM ADMIN General Alarm Setting e EM ADMIN Utilities BCM Monitor e EM ADMIN Utilities Ping e EM ADMIN Utilities Trace Route Web Documentation User Documentation e Web User Applications NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 105 Remote Access access privileges EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User EM CONFIG Administrator Access SNMP EM CONFIG Administrator Access Dial In EM CONFIG Administrator Access Dial Out EM ADMIN General SNMP Trap Destinations Web Documentation User Documentation Guests access privileges Read only access to all but Utilities Backup and Restore and Log Management EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User Web Documentation User Documentation Web User Applications Voice Admins access privileges EM CONFIG System Identification EM CONFIG System Time and Date EM CONFIG System Keycodes EM CONFIG System IP Sub
91. such as whether it is a DSM16 or DSM32 MBM Asset ID Enter the asset ID of the MBM Numeric Write MBM Field Indicates if the unit is considered True if checked Replaceable field replaceable by the manufacturer To view or update BCM50 system expansion information In the BCM Element Manager connect to a BCM50 device 2 Select Administration General Hardware Inventory The Hardware Inventory panel opens and displays the BCM50 System tab View the information displayed in the BCM50 System Expansion area To update information about the expansion chassis click the Present checkbox to indicate that an expansion chassis is installed and enter an ID in the Asset ID field 5 To update information about the media bay modules enter an ID in the MBM Asset ID field Viewing and updating other information about the BCM50 system The Other Information area in the System tab displays other information associated with this particular BCM system such as e the name of the administrator and their contact information e the location of the BCM50 system You can add or update this information The date on which this information is updated is displayed BCM5S0 area in accordance with LastChangeTime of the Entity MIB Table 35 lists the fields displayed in the Other Information area Table 35 Other Information fields Field Name Field Description Field Value Read Write Owner name The owner s name or any
92. support group no be renamed BOT 112002 major Backup and Backup and Restore Use a good backup Yes Yes Yes Yes Restore Backup type is to attempt the incorrect for its restore filesystem location B02 12003 major Backup and Backup and Restore Use a good backup Yes Yes es Yes Restore This backup type to attempt the ican not be restored restore B03 12004 major Backup and Backup and Restore Try backup again Yes Yes es Yes Restore Internal error land if problem Could not find persists contact your lassociated local support group connection definition B04 12005 major Backup and Backup and Restore Try backup again Yes Yes es Yes Restore Internal error land if problem Could not create a_ persists contact your file local support group B05 12006 major Backup and Backup and Restore T ry backup again Yes Yes Yes Yes Restore Internal error land if problem Could not build the persists contact your dynamic rule file local support group 06 12007 major Backup and BackupandRestore Iry backup again Yes Nes yes Yes Restore Internal general land if problem error persists contact your local support group NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 193 B07 12008 warning Backup and Backup and Restore Iry a different es No No fe Restore Backup file is not backup file recognizable
93. telephony portion of the BCM configuration BackupOperator 21 The ability to backup a BCM RemoteMonitoring 22 The ability to remotely connect to and manage the BCM configuration ie SNMP configuration SoftwareUpgrade 23 The ability to upgrade the BCM AlarmViewer 24 The ability to view the alarm screen BCM50 Administration Guide 88 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges Operational Logs 26 The ability to download operational logs Diagnostic Logs 27 Full access to download any logs ISDN Dial in 30 The ability to use ISDN for dial in WAN Dial in 32 The ability to use WAN for dial in PPP access Setting the idle session timeout You can use the idle session timeout feature to automatically log out users who have been inactive for a specified period of time Follow this procedure to specify the period of time before inactive sessions are timed out To set the idle session timeout 1 Select Configuration Administrator Access Security Policies gt Session Management Policy In the Session timeout box enter the number of minutes to wait after a period of inactivity before the session times out Uploading a Web Server Certificate This procedure allows you to upload a private security certificate to replace the generic web certificate provided with BCM50 Using a custom site specific certificate you can have site validation which
94. the BCM50 will automatically reboot as soon as the update has been applied You will not receive a reboot confirmation before the reboot occurs To apply an update from an HTTP server In the task panel click the Administration tab Open the Software Management folder and then click the Software Update task The Software Update panel opens The Updates in Progress tab is open Click the Get New Updates button The Get New Updates window opens Select HTTP Server from the Retrieve From selection field BCM50 Administration Guide 332 Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates 5 Configure the HTTP Server attributes Table 101 Configure HTTP Server attributes Attribute Action HTTP Server Enter the IP address or host name of the remote computer and the port number if required Use HTTPS Check this box if the HTTP server requires SSL User Name Enter the user name associated with the HTTP server Password Enter the user name associated with the HTTP server Directory Enter the path to the location of the update The path is relative to the root of the HTTP server you are logging into For example if the root of the HTTP server you have logged into is public and your patches are located under public patches you enter patches as the directory 10 Click the OK button The Find Software Updates window opens and displays a list of updates found in the specified location Select
95. the RADIUS server to provide one or more privilege levels when the user authentication is accepted Table 20 lists the privilege levels These must be provided as a 32 bit integer in big endian format network byte order NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 87 Table 20 Privilege levels Privilege name Value Description VoiceMailAdmin 0 Voice Mail Administrator Contact Center 1 MMCC Administrator SBAInstaller 2 Set Based Administrator Level 4 SBASystemCoord 3 Set Based Administrator Level 3 SBASystemCoordBasic 4 Set Based Administrator Level 2 SBABasic 5 Set Based Administrator Level 1 Security 6 Security Administrator CTEApp 7 LAN CTE DA Pro AE User SBA IP Set Registration 8 IP set registration privilege from IP telephone sets Application BCMMonitor 9 BCM Monitor user CDRApp 10 CDR Application Privilege Modem Login 11 Dial in PPP user GuestLogin 12 Access to BCM Web pages user level AdminDownload 13 Administrative application download ExclusiveAccess 14 Access to the BCM when exclusive access flag enabled Admin 16 Access to the BCM configuration DataAdmin 17 Access to the data portion of CIM XML interface RemoteAccess 18 Access to remote access fields of BCM configuration Guest 19 Access to all of the BCM configuration for read only access VoiceAdmin 20 The ability to administer the
96. the Yes button to proceed A progress window opens When the operation is complete the Restore Complete window opens 9 Click the OK button Restoring data from a USB storage device Your BCM50 supports the ability to recover using the USB device The backup must have been created on the USB device while directly attached to a BCM50 The BCM will select the most recent backup made to the USB device for the restore operation If you want to restore an older backup archive you must attach the USB storage device to your computer and chose the option Restore From My Computer Caution A restore operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever restoring data will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a restore operation that does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a restore operation at a time when the system is typically not in use To restore data from a USB storage device 1 Inthe task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Restore The Restore panel opens 3 Inthe Restore From selection field select USB Storage Device Select the backup file to restore A window opens and displays information about the backup file including a warning that the selected backup file will replace the backup file currently stored on the BCM Caution
97. the ability system and contact to use a doorphone your local support on the system group Service Manager is attempting to restart the service T53 minor Service Service Manager Check for Yes Yes Yes 0 Manager IP Music Service corresponding alarm BcmAmp has 10132 or 10332 If stopped service doesn t unexpectedly This restart then reboot will affect the ability system and contact to use IP music your local support Service Manager is group attempting to restart the service T54 minor Service Service Manager Check for Yes No INO 0 Manager IP Music Service corresponding alarm ToneSrvr has 10133 or 10333 stopped This can be caused unexpectedly This by changing music will affect the ability sources If service to use IP music doesn t restart then Service Manager is reboot system and attempting to restart contact your local the service support group T56 critical Service Service Manager Reboot system and Yes Yes Yes Yes Manager Core Telephony has contact your local stopped support group unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager BCM50 Administration Guide 176 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System M57 MOTOZ critical Service Manager Service Manager CallPilot has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager Reboot system and contact your local support group es es es es T58 MOTOS Critical Service Manager Mana
98. then open the Logs folder 2 Click the Log Management task The Log Management panel opens 3 Click the Scheduled Log Transfer tab The Scheduled Log Transfer panel opens 4 Click the Add button The Add Scheduled Transfer window opens 5 In the Transfer To selection field select the location to which you want to transfer the log files e Network Folder e USB Storage Device e FTP Server e SFTP Server 6 Configure the Transfer To attributes For information about how to configure Transfer To attributes see the procedures in Performing immediate log archive transfers on page 304 7 Click the OK button The Add Scheduled Transfer window opens NN40020 600 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs 311 8 Select the log file categories that you want to include in the log file transfer 9 Configure the schedule attributes Table 94 Configure schedule attributes Attribute Action Memo Enter a note for the scheduled log transfer as applicable Recurrence Select how often the scheduled transfer is to occur Options are Once Daily Weekly Monthly Depending on the option you choose the window displays selections for the month and day of month If you select Weekly days of the week check boxes appear so that you can select the days on which the transfer will occur Month Select the month in which the scheduled transfer is to occur Day of Month Select the day of the month on which the scheduled transf
99. this is a good solution for on demand transfers it is not an option for scheduled tasks Network folder A network folder is the only solution that covers backups logs software updates and keycodes You must make sure that the folder is set up as a shared Windows resource and the BCMS0 is properly configured to have write access to the network folder For information on setting up a network folder contact your network administrator Saving information to a network folder can take a significant amount of time The speed and security of the transfer are based on the speed and security of the network See Table 13 for the information required to use a network folder Table 13 Configure Network Folder attributes Attribute Action Network Folder Enter the hostname or IP address of the network folder User Name Enter the user name associated with the network folder Password Enter the password associated with the network folder Directory Enter the path to the subdirectory as applicable FTP servers Storing information on an FTP server is similar to storing information in a network folder It offers a centrally accessible way to store BCM50 data The speed of transferring to an FTP server is based on the speed of your network Transfers to an FTP server generally have a low level of security unless the transfer is set up to run through a VPN See Table 14 for the information required to use an FTP server Table
100. to activate or deactivate the telset default access user accounts You can also use this interface to change the password for these accounts For further information about using telset features see the Telset Admin Guide The Telset group privileges apply specifically to the following telset interfaces e FEATURE 9 8 Administrator access only e FEATURE 266344 CONFIG telephony interface e FEATURE 983 CallPilot interface These interfaces are meant to be used only as supplementary configuration portals You can also block access to these interfaces when you set up the system Security Policies Table 23 Default Telset access Configuration Heading Parameters Comments System ID A read only field in Feature 9 8 used for keycode entry Region Uses Feature PROFILE on the set See Norstar documentation IPADDRESS DHCP Address Subnet Dfltgwy License Entitlement Code Uses Keycodes that can be entered one at a time through Feature 9 8 TelephonyStartup Template Uses Feature STARTUP on telset within 15 minutes of a bootup of BCM See Norstar documentation StartDN Uses Feature STARTUP on telset within 15 minutes of a bootup of BCM See Norstar documentation VOICEMAILSTARTUP ATTENDANTDN Uses Feature 983 the first time you initialize CallPilot See CallPilot documentation UISTYLE Uses Feature 983 the first time you initialize CallPilot See CallPilot documentation LANG
101. to an administrator level account Use the group profiles to define other levels of users with access to the headings that are specific to their task This also helps to prevent overlap programming if more than one person is using the interface at the same time Dial in access Restrict this user group to users who require this interface If modem access is not required the modem interface can be disabled to provide further security Note There is also a Nortel support default user which cannot be deleted or modified This account is set up to allow Nortel troubleshooting technicians to access areas of the system that are not available to other users You can change the default challenge key but be sure to retain a record of the change so that support technicians can access your system For more information talk to your Nortel service representative Firewalls Secured communications over a WAN require firewall protection Depending on the hardware being used and the type of security being employed specific firewall rules must be set to enable communication between the BCM50 and the Element Manager If the firewall is enabled add the following rule e Source address Element Manager IP address or Any This is the IP address of the system that the Element Manager resides on e Destination address BCM LAN IP address e Service type TCP 5989 443 and 80 port number for CIM XML https and http e Action forward Yo
102. use the icons for the elements defined within the Element tree to perform various functions associated with that element such as connecting to the element or viewing log files associated with that element Creating folders for network elements Before you add a BCMS0 to the network element tree you can create folders and subfolders to organize the devices in your network 1 While disconnected from the BCM50 device click the New Folder icon on the task bar You can also right click on Network Elements in the Network Element Navigation panel and select New Folder Right click on the new folder and select Rename Enter a name for the folder Adding a BCM50 to the Network Element tree Before you can connect to a BCM50 you must define it in Element Manager as a Network Element 1 Select Network Elements from the Network Element Navigation panel or if you have defined subfolders select the subfolder where you want to save the device You can define subfolders by right clicking on Network Elements and selecting New Folder If you want to move devices between folders they must be deleted from the old folder and recreated in the new folder Select Network from the menu bar or right click on the folder heading Select New Network Element gt Business Communications Manager In the Business Communications Manager Entry dialog box enter the IP address for the new network element BCM50 Administration Guide 40 Chapter 3 BCM50
103. warning System Set System Set Based Log back into Yes No No Based Admin Admin UserID X System Set based user account admin to verify deletion failed change If problem persists contact your local support group BCM50 Administration Guide 198 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System HOT 17120 warning System Set System Set Based Log back into es No No Based Admin Admin Key code System Set based activation failed admin to verify change If problem persists contact your local support group 402 17121 warning System Set System Set Based Log back into Yes No No Based Admin Admin Key code System Set based set failed admin to verify keyccode If problem persists contact your local support group 403 17130 warning System Set System Set Based Log back into Yes No No Based Admin Admin Get modem System Set based PDR value failed jadmin to verify modem settings If problem persists contact your local support group 404 t7131 warning System Set System Set Based Log back into Yes No No Based Admin Admin Set modem System Set based PDR value failed jadmin to verify modem settings If problem persists contact your local support group 405 117140 warning System Set System Set Based Log back into Yes No No 0 Based Admin Admin LAN ip System Set based address change admin to verify failed ip X change If problem persists contact your local support
104. 0 Restore Could not detach connection and flash ithe USB device device B33 12034 warning Backup and Backup and Restore Use a different Yes No No Restore Backup file is not backup file and if recognizable problem persists contact your local support group B34 12035 warning Backup and Backup and Restore Use a different Yes No No Restore Backup file is not backup file and if recognizable problem persists contact your local support group NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 195 warning Backup and Backup and Restore Use a different es No No Restore Backup file is not backup file and if recognizable problem persists contact your local support group minor Backup and Backup and Restore Attempt another Yes No No Restore Internal error backup or restore land if problem perists contact your local support group minor Backup and Backup and Restore Attempt another Yes No No Restore A backup file does backup or restore not exist land if problem perists contact your local support group minor Backup and Backup and Restore Attempt another Yes No No Restore Internal error backup or restore land if problem perists contact your local support group major Backup and Backup and Restore Restart the system Yes Yes Yes Restore The Voice land attempt another Application Interface restore I
105. 0 main unit To view or update information about the BCM50 main chassis In the BCM Element Manager connect to a BCM50 device 2 Select Administration General Hardware Inventory The Hardware Inventory panel opens and displays the BCM50 System tab 3 View the information displayed in the BCMS50 main unit area NN40020 600 Chapter 5 Using the BCM50 Hardware Inventory 127 4 If you want to add or update the asset ID for the BCM50 main unit enter an asset ID in the Customer Asset ID field Figure 23 Hardware Inventory BCM Element Manager 192 168 249 130 Fie Edit View Network Session Tools Help iol x gt x Cut 5 Copy Element Navigation Panel 4 Task Navigation Panel Configuration Administration eneral pas m r Alarms e Alarm Settings SNMP Irap Destinatio system Metrics lelephony Metrics BH h Hog Utities EHS backup and Restore Hea Logs pHa Sottware Management ga Pasie Web Page Validate Device t pdi Refresh g Auto refrest Hardware Inventory evices l Additional Information BCMS50 Main Unit System Type chassi Systemname jem soR2 SystemiD og16CA41 Obe Serial number NNTMH401 Model Customer asset ID BCM50 System Expansion Ensure that Expansion Chassis and MBM information entered here accurately reflects the actual system hardware configuratior BCM50 Expansio
106. 01 Telset access security on page 109 Blocking user accounts on page 110 User accounts User accounts are defined by a unique user ID that is visible only to authenticating services Element Manager IDs are alphanumeric and Telset IDs are numeric a unique user name assigned for either or both the Element Manager and telset configuration that has a minimum length that you define when you set up the security policies a unique password assigned for any user ID that is defined Either password must satisfy the Password Policy settings for the system that you define when you set up the security policies a list of group attributes which allow the user specific access privileges in the system BCM50 Administration Guide 98 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges After you create an account you can assign groups to that account Groups are sets of privileges based on user tasks or roles For example if you have a user who is responsible for remote monitoring you can create an account for that user and then assign a group to the account the group that you assign would contain the appropriate privileges for that role The BCM has default groups available but you can refine the privileges available within a group to suit the needs of your network In this example you could assign the default group called Remote Monitoring which would allow the user to do such things as view metrics and alarms You can create
107. 05 Critical Modem Call Modem Call Control Reboot system and Yes Yes Yes Yes Control MCC failed to get a contact your local modem DN support group 94 8008 Critical Modem Call Modem Call Control Reboot system and Yes Yes Yes Yes Control MCC state contact your local machine error support group 95 B009 Critical Modem Call Modem Call Control Reboot system and Yes Yes Yes Yes Control MCC state contact your local machine error support group 96 critical Modem Call Modem Call Control Reboot system and Yes Yes es Yes Control MCC state contact your local machine error support group 97 critical Modem Call Modem Call Control Reboot system and Yes Yes es Yes Control MCC state contact your local machine error upport group 98 Warning Modem Call Modem Call Control Contact your local Yes No No Control MCC Failed to support group Transfer the call CTI Return Code Pld 99 Warning Modem Call Modem Call Control Reboot system and Yes No No Control MCC Cannot contact your local Monitor Incoming support group Line CTI Return Code ld TOO 4 Warning Modem Call Modem Call Control Contact your local Yes No No Control MCC Can only support group Transfer to Modem DN Manually CTI Return Code ld TOT S015 Warning Modem Call Modem Call Control Contact your local Yes No No 0 Control MCC Cannot Stop Support group to Monitor the Line Number CTI Return Code ld T02 Bote Warning Modem Call Mo
108. 14 Configure FTP server attributes Attribute Action FTP or server Enter the hostname or IP address of the FTP server User Name Enter the user name associated with the FTP server Password Enter the password associated with the FTP server Directory Enter the path to the subdirectory as applicable BCM50 Administration Guide 72 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment SFTP servers The process of using an SFTP server is similar to the process for using an FTP server However an SFTP server has a greater level of security than an FTP server and more credentials are required to use an SFTP server You must set up and manage security keys and certificates including generating a SSH key which you must then install on the SFTP server For information on using SFTP servers and generating SSH keys see Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges on page 75 See Table 15 for the information required to use an SFTP folder Table 15 Configure FTP or SFTP Server attributes Attribute Action FTP or SFTP Server Enter the hostname or IP address of the SFTP server User Name Enter the user name associated with the SFTP server Password Enter the password associated with the SFTP server Directory Enter the path to the subdirectory as applicable USB storage device Storing information to a USB storage device is a very quick way of saving information as the transfer
109. 200 information User logon User nnadmin Host 207 175 Logs g fig SOttwere Management 30200 information s se t 207 178 30202 User failed to login User nnadrmin Host Alarm Details Time Thu Sep 15 13 14 27 EDT 2005 Problem description fuser logon User nnadmin Host 207 179 154 62 4695 Comp CIM Problem resolution o Action Required 4 gt I H jae ha i C 6 Law Luna 3 a9 jv Include ACKed alarms The Alarm Banner provides counts of Critical Major Minor and Warning alarms Information alarms are not included You can specify whether to include acknowledged alarms in the Alarm Banner NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 153 Each alarm severity counter has a graph which represents a data sample of the last 20 polling intervals The graph has a color to indicate a data change The colors are as follows Table 50 Alarm graph colors Color Indicates Green There are no alarms of this severity or there are alarms of this severity but the count has decreased since the last polling interval Yellow There are alarms of this severity but they are older than at least 1 polling interval Red A new alarm has occurred since the last polling interval The system polls for new alarms every 30 seconds by default If you clear the alarm log from the BCM Element Manager the alarms displayed on the Alarm Banner are also cleared and reset to 0 To include or omit acknowledged alar
110. 26 Chapter 2 Overview of BCM50 Administration e review logs of operational information e retrieve and view logs containing diagnostic information in the event of a system issue e manage system inventory e manage software updates e make changes to the system configuration to change service definitions or add users including adding new features through the application of keycodes The descriptions and procedures in this guide will assist the administrator in performing these tasks The following management model demonstrates how BCM50 manageability is achieved by breaking the management functions into layers At the base of the model is the element itself In order to be a manageable system the element must provide not only the ability to configure services but must also regulate access to the system by administrative users generate alarms in the event of issues support the easy addition of new features through the application of keycodes provide a means for making a backup of the configured data and other administrative functions The management tools at the next layer provide a user interface to control these functions for a selected BCM50 device The primary management application for BCM50 is the Element Manager complemented by other management applications as explained in BCM50 Management Environment and Applications on page 33 For BCM releases prior to 4 0 the management application is Unified Manager If the BCMS0 is
111. 291 You can restore a backup to a different system for example to quickly bring a second system into service in a new installation In this case not all of the configuration information in the Configuration backup is relevant to the second system You can select whether to restore device specific configuration information such as network settings You may wish to exclude certain components from being restored For example the network settings are often excluded from a restore operation to avoid giving two machines on your network the same identity Backup information can be restored only to another unit that has the same software release level If the second unit has an older software release level you can use the Reset button on the BCM50 front panel to reset the BCM50 unit to the factory default software level and default configuration settings You can then apply software updates to bring the unit to the same software release level as that of the unit from which the backup was taken For information about applying software updates to the BCM50 see Chapter 13 Managing BCM5SO Software Updates on page 323 The BCM50 verifies that the software release level of the unit to which the backup is being applied is consistent with the software release level of the backup file If a potential issue is detected the BCM Element Manager provides you with an error message Optional components You can restore configuration or application data
112. 3 BCM50 Management Environment 43 Figure 3 Element Manager Window no defined Elements jnortel Business Element Manager Network Elements O gt File Edit View Network Session Tools Help a qet Y Cut Cop da Paste VYeb Page J Validate Device con ect x Delete fa New Folder Element Navigation Panel 3 Network Elements Table 3 lists and describes the initial Element Manager window Table 3 Initial Element Manager window attributes Element Description Title bar When you connect to a device this area indicates the type of device Nortel Networks BCM50 Element Manager Network Elements and the IP address for the connected device Menu bar The items on the menu bar are static however some items may be greyed out at various stages File This menu provides two selections e Exit a standard exit prompt that closes the Element Manager application You can also click on the X box on the upper right corner of the window or click Ctrl X e View Network Element Logs opens a dialog box that allows you to search for and to view logs that are available for the connected element View This menu provides three selections e Preferences Allows you to choose a different appearance for the Element Manager window e Network Elements Enabled by default If you uncheck this setting the Network Elements panel closes far left panel This does not disconnect any connected device e Ref
113. 48 Host berm_sustaining bem_sustaining bem_sustaining berm_sustaining bem_sustaining bem_sustaining berm_sustaining berm_sustaining berm_sustaining bem_sustaining Host bcm_sustaining Component Security Process 961 gil a Viewing log files using other applications Using the Element Manager Log Browser to view log files enables you to control how you view log events by means of retrieval criteria and sorting tools You can also view log files using other applications if the Element Manager is not available For example you can use WordPad to view systemlog and log files tab delimited or you can open the files using Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel BCM50 Administration Guide 322 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs NN40020 600 323 Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates This chapter contains information about managing BCM50 software updates During the lifecycle of the BCM50 you can apply software updates to the BCMS50 unit to introduce new functionality Between software upgrades you may find it necessary to apply software updates to resolve field issues Both software upgrades and software updates are applied in the same manner Using the BCM50 you can e obtain software updates from different storage locations such as an FTP site or USB storage device e view the software upgrade and update history of the BCM50 e apply and in some cases remove sof
114. 50 Data 277 Performing an immediate backup to your personal computer Caution A backup operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever the backup will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a backup that does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a backup at a time when the system is typically not in use To perform an immediate backup to your personal computer 1 In the task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Backup The Backup panel opens and displays the Immediate Backup tab In the Backup To selection field select My Computer Click the Backup button The Backup window opens 5 Inthe Optional Components table select or clear the check box for each component to include or exclude these components from the backup operation 6 Click the OK button A warning message appears Read the warning carefully before proceeding 7 Click the Yes button to proceed A progress window opens When the backup preparation is complete the Save window opens 8 Specify the directory and enter a file name in the File Name field Enter a file name with a tar extension e g backup2 tar so that you can examine the file with a utility such as WinZip If you do not select the folder backup the new backup file will be stored in the root of this fo
115. 50 Service Management System 217 Table 52 BCM50 Services Service Name Description core_file_monitor core file monitoring service crond Cron Scheduler cti server CTI service feps Functional Endpoint Proxy Server VoIP Gateway httpd HTTP Daemon Ims Line Monitor Server mgs Media Gateway Server modemcc modem service mib2agt MIB II service mps IP Telephony Media Path owcimomd Open Wbem Cimom Server Daemon psm qmond QoS Monitor securityservice Authentication and Authorization srg SRG service ssba System Set Based Admin Service Feature 9 8 sshd Secure Shell Daemon tmwservice Time Service utps UniSTIM Terminal Proxy Server IP Sets voicemail Voicemail Process To view details about services 1 Start the BCM50 Element Manager In the Element pane select an element Click the Connect button The Task pane is displayed Click the Administration tab Open the General folder and then click the Service Manager task The Service Manager page opens Services are displayed in the Services table BCM50 Administration Guide 218 Chapter 8 Using the BCM50 Service Management System Starting stopping and restarting services You can stop any of the services that are running on the BCMS0 system Caution Use the BCM50 Services Manager only as directed by Nortel Technical Support Improper use of the BCM50 Services Manager m
116. 9 25 Next hop 192 168 249 1 NIC ethO IP Mask MAC NIC eth1 Mask MAC NIC eth2 Mask MAC 10 10 99 1 255 255 255 252 00 0F 64 FD 3D 40 192 168 249 25 255 255 255 0 00 0F 6A FD 3D A1 10 10 11 1 255 255 255 252 00 0F 64 FD 3D A2 The installed devices on the BCM50 Info tab are displayed as follows BCM50 Administration Guide 254 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities Eth0O indicates a LAN internal to the BCMS0 system Eth1 indicates a customer LAN This is the LAN accessible to the customer through ports 1 2 and 3 on the front panel of the BCM50 main unit Eth2 OAM LAN This is a dedicated OAM port accessible as port 0 the left most Ethernet port on the front panel of the BCM50 main unit Media Card tab The Media Card tab provides information about the telephony system of the BCMS0 This tab provides the following information for a BCMS50 the hardware of the BCM50 main unit on which the telephony software resides the telephony software component release level and market profile configuration information such as media channels 64 Kbps B channels and the total number of logical DSP resource units the available tasks and tasks in service The Media Card tab provides the following information for BCM systems J BCM Monitor Bcem_m50r1 loj x Media Card hardware including type and revision and voice bus channels Media Card firmware including core load and market pro
117. 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics The UPS Status panel confirms that a UPS is connected including model and serial number its current status and provides a read out of the current values Additionally an indication is given whether the value is within the normal range or not The UPS Status panel tracks occurrences of alarms pertaining to UPS operation These alarms are also sequentially viewable in the Alarm panel The metrics correspond to alarms in the BCM50 and appear in the alarm panel as well See Figure 29 Figure 29 UPS Status Monitor alnortel Bem 4 0 tement Manager 4713516351 ate Element Navigation Panel BBY Network Elements 47 135 163 968 47 135 163 151 47 135 163 225 Task Navigation Panel Configuration Administration General EHA System Status LED Status QoS Monitor oi us NTP Metrics Interface Metrics Disk Mirroring QoS Metrics EHS Telephony Metrics Trunk Module Metrics ChC Limit Metrics Hunt Group Metrics PSTN Fallback Metrics Pvom EHE Litilties BCM Monitor Ping Trace Route Reset Diagnostic Settings Data Debug Tools EHS Backup and Restore Backup Restore ii HE Logs __ Software Management Uninterrupted Power Supply Status Status Metrics Status Name APC model Serial number Interface type Current V
118. ADSL router The BCM50ba main unit provides similar functionality to the BCM50a main unit The difference is that the BCM50ba main unit has two integrated BRI ports that replace the four analog lines on the RJ 21 telephony connector BCM50be main unit with Ethernet router The BCM50be main unit provides similar functionality to the BCM50e main unit The difference is that the BCMS50be main unit has two integrated BRI ports that replace the four analog lines on the RJ 21 telephony connector NN40020 600 Chapter 2 Overview of BCM50 Administration 25 All of the BCM50 main units provide call processing and data networking functions They also provide connections for telephones as well as LAN and WAN connections You can install MBMs to provide connections for Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN lines For detailed information about the main units see the BCM50 Release 2 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide NN40020 302 Expansion units and media bay modules MBMs In addition to the main unit the BCM50 system can have up to two BCM50 expansion units An expansion unit connects to the main unit and provides additional functionality The BCM50 expansion unit is designed to accomodate one media bay module MBM that enables you to connect addtional telephony equipment to the BCM50 system The MBMs connect with external devices to implement various types of voice trunks and stations For detailed information about expansion units
119. Administration tab Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Backup The Backup panel opens and displays the Immediate Backup tab In the Backup To selection field choose BCM BCM50 Administration Guide 276 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 3 Click the Backup button The Backup window opens jnortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager 192 168 249 27 File View etwork Session Tools Help E Exit Element Navigation Panel 4 Task Havigation Panel oe amp Refresh s Aute retresti Backup work Elements SUES by Configuration Administration ey 2 Immediate Backup Scheduled Backups eneral 5 Oy System status Backupto Fa L lelephony Metrics L_ Utlities e BCM Monitor Backup to BCM ern _ Irace Koute Backup _ tthernet Activity 6 _ reset _ Diagnostic Settings _ Vata Debug oals Hea backup and Restore 4 _ Restore Logs Hey Software Management 4 Inthe Optional Components table select or clear the check box for each component to include or exclude these components from the backup operation 5 Click the OK button A warning window opens Read the warning carefully before proceeding 6 Click the Yes button to proceed A progress window opens When the backup is complete the Backup Complete message appears 7 Click the OK button NN40020 600 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM
120. Alarms panel opens BCM50 Administration Guide 152 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 3 On the Alarms panel click the Clear Alarm Log button The Alarms table is cleared Any new alarms will be displayed after the next alarm polling interval Using the Alarm Banner You can use the Alarm Banner in the BCM Element Manager to view current alarm counts and recent alarm activity on the BCM system The Alarm Banner appears on the bottom right corner of the BCM Element Manager window The Alarm Banner is visible at all times so you do not have to navigate to the Alarms panel to view alarms If you notice a change in alarm conditions in the Alarm Banner for example a red spike in the Critical category you can navigate to the Alarms Panel to view the actual alarm Nortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager 192 168 249 27 5 x File View Network Session Tools Help ge p iee 5 Refresh Auto retresh Element Navigation Panel 4 Task Navigation Panel Alarms wor lements fi z A Configuration Administration EnEral Problem Description L_e farm settings HT AAAS ee User logon User nnadmin Host 207 175 _ SNMP Irap Destinatio Ee Service Manager User logon User nnadmin Host 207 17S Hardware Inventor I o00s 09 1513 05 28 m st lt i ss Cs 30200 User logon User nnadmin Host 207 17 oy System status 3 laepnony memes 30200 information User logon User nnadmin Host 207 17 ca Utimes E ea oe Heaters 30
121. BCM50 system including LAN CTE Voicemail and IP telephony This operation does not affect configuration parameters or programming Cold Reset Telephony Resets telephony programming of Affects all telephony services Services the BCM50 system to the factory including LAN CTE Voicemail and IP telephony Telephony services restart with all telephony programming at default values for the specified region template and start DN for the current software release level A cold reset erases voice message mailboxes and messages if the DN length is not set to system defaults For information about setting the DN length refer to the BCM50 Device Configuration Guide Cold Reset Router Resets the router programming to the factory defaults Affects services that rely on the WAN BCM50 Administration Guide 268 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities Rebooting the BCM50 system Caution Rebooting the BCMS50 system temporarily stops all services running on the system To reboot the BCM50 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Open the Utilities folder and then click Reset The Reset panel opens 3 Click the Reboot BCM50 System button A confirmation dialog box opens 4 Click the OK button The operating system of the BCM50 restarts Performing a warm reset of BCM50 telephony services e Caution All active calls on the BCM50 system will be dropped To perform a warm reset of BCM50 telephony serv
122. BUO F prO F pann F ERRA 10x i 3005 03 14 0O SS Parri 4137D retrieved rat 9000 eoceectect V LogCetets H a BCM50 integrated launch of related applications BCM50 Voicemail and CallCenter applications are managed by CallPilot Manager and real time system activity is monitored with the BCM Monitor All of these applications can be launched through buttons provided at an appropriate location in the Element Manager You can specify whether you want to pass logon credentials to applications launched from the Element Manager under View gt Preferences gt Tool Launch When you pass logon credentials to these applications you do not need to re enter your password when the BCM Element Manaager launches them These applications also have application based Help systems You can launch CallPilot Manager by clicking by the Launch CallPilot Manager button under Configuration Task gt Applications gt Voice Messaging Contact Center Figure 14 on page 64 shows the location of the Launch CallPilot Manager button See the CallPilot Manager Setup and Operation Guide for more information on the CallPilot Manager application The Launch CallPilot Manager button is only visible in Element Manager to groups with the CallCenter privilege assigned to them BCM50 Administration Guide 64 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment Figure 14 Launch CallPilot Manager button File View Metwork Session Tools Help C Exit oo Ees amp
123. Contact Center Contact Center Only access to the Contact Centre application is available if this is the only group assigned to a user account Contact Center access privileges on page 101 CDR Application CDRApp Only access to the call detail record functions is available if this is the only group assigned to a user account CDR Appl access privileges on page 103 CTE Application CTEAppl CTE Appl access privileges on page 102 BCM Monitor BCMMonitorAppl BCMMonitor Appl access privileges on page 103 Application Administrator IP Set Registration BCMMonitorApp CDRApp PPP AdminDownload Exclusive Access Admin DataAdmins Remote Access Voice Admins Backup Operators Software Upgrade Alarm Viewer SBA Installer Security CTE Appl Operational Logs Diagnostic Logs VoiceMail and Contact Center Network IPSec Modem dial out IP Set Registration access privileges on page 102 BCMMonitor Appl access privileges on page 103 CDR Appl access privileges on page 103 PPP Access access privileges on page 103 Admin Download access privileges on page 103 Exclusive Access access privileges on page 104 Admin access privileges on page 104 DATA Admins group access privileges on page 104 Remote Access access privileges on page 105 Voice Admins access privileges on page 105 Backup Operators access privileges on page 106 Software Upgrade access privileges on page 106 Alarm Viewer access privileges on page 107 SBA Installer group a
124. Element Manager Telephony Metrics headings The Telephony Metrics folder groups together a number of BCM50 system status tracking different aspects of Telephony services This overview describes the following general process information e Trunk Module Metrics on page 227 e CbC limit metrics on page 233 e Hunt Group Metrics on page 235 e PSTN Fallback Metrics on page 237 e Proactive Voice Quality Management on page 238 Trunk Module Metrics When you need to find out information about a trunk module you can determine the status of any of the settings under the trunk modules headings To correct a problem you may need to enable or disable a port a module or an entire bus This section provides the following procedures e To view Trunk Module status on page 227 e Disabling or enabling a B channel setting on page 229 e Provisioning a PRI B channel on page 229 e Trunk Module CSU statistics on page 230 To view Trunk Module status The Trunk Module Metrics panel allows you to view the status of digital trunk modules as well as identify any device or lines connected to the system This allows you to isolate any malfunctioning part of the system In addition you can use the Trunk Module selection to disable and enable modules and devices Use this procedure to display module type the number of sets connected to the module the number of busy sets and the module state 1 On the E
125. K button BCM50 Administration Guide 250 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities 7 Select the BCM Monitor tabs that you want to include in static snapshots in the Tabs Saved in Snapshot box For example if you want snaphots to include information about voice ports make sure that Voice Ports is included in the Tabs Saved in Snapshot box eno Settings Static snapshot settings Dynamic snapshot settings Path and filename Output filename static txt gt Output folder C Documents and Settings vipates a Tabs to save Tabs not saved in snapshot Tabs saved in snapshot BCM Info Media Card Voice Ports IP Devices RTP Sessions UIP Line Monitor Usage Indicators v Reset List Save all tabs Cancel 8 To remove tabs from the snapshots definition select a tab from the Tabs Saved in Snapshot box and use the arrow button to move the tab to the Tabs Not Saved in Snapshot box 9 Click the OK button To save a static snapshot Once you have configured static snapshot settings you can save static snapshot at any time 1 While you are observing data on a tab select Save Static Snapshots from the File menu or press CTRL S All the tabs included in the snapshot definition are saved to a text file located in the folder you specified when you configured the static snapshot settings Dynamic snapshots Dynamic snapshots record snapshots of system data that changes over time such as CPU utiliza
126. M Proactive Voice Quality Monitoring QoS Quality of Service RAI Remote Alarm Indication RTP Real time Transport Protocol SFTP Secure File Transfer Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SSH Secure Shell SSL Secure Socket Layer UAS Unavailable Seconds UPS Universal Power Supply USB Universal Serial Bus VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol VLAN Virtual Local Area Network VPN Virtual Private Network WAN Wide Area Network NN40020 600 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM50 19 Symbols and conventions used in this guide These symbols are used to highlight critical information for the BCMS50 system Caution Alerts you to conditions where you can damage the equipment A Danger Alerts you to conditions where you can get an electrical shock Warning Alerts you to conditions where you can cause the system to fail or work l f improperly Note A Note alerts you to important information Tip Alerts you to additional information that can help you perform a task Security note Indicates a point of system security where a default should be changed or where the administrator needs to make a decision about the level of security required for the system Warning Alerts you to ground yourself with an antistatic grounding EA strap before performing the maintenance procedure P Warning Alerts you to remove the BCM50 main unit and expansion ee unit power cords from t
127. MP to send traps Overview of BCM50 support for SNMP This chapter provides information about SNMP support provided by the BCMS0 main unit The BCM50 main unit supports the following versions of SNMP e SNMP v1 the first implementation of SNMP this version supports such protocols as IP e SNMP v2C provides improved efficiency and error handling e SNMP v3 provides improvements in security and privacy Using the Element Manager you can select which versions of SNMP you want the BCM50 agent to support For more information see Configuring SNMP settings Management Information Bases provide access to the managed objects of a system and specify the format of traps BCM50 supports the following MIBs e RFC 1213 MIB II e RFC 2863 Interface MIB e RFC 2737 Entity MIB e RFC 2790 Host MIB e RFC 2261 SNMP framework e SmallSiteEvent MIB for traps BCM5S0 units equipped with an integrated router BCM50e BCM50a BCM50be and BCMS50ba also support RFC 1231 MIB II and a private MIB For more information see the BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 For information about supported MIBs how to install MIBs and how to view SNMP traps see Management Information Bases on page 343 BCM50 Administration Guide 134 Chapter 6 Managing BCM50 with SNMP BCM50 supports read only SNMP requests even for SNMP variables that display as read write BCM50 does not support configuration ope
128. Management Environment 5 Enter the Read Write Community String if it is present The Read Write Community String is only present if SNMP is enabled SNMP is disabled by default The default SNMP Read Write Community String is public Contact your system administrator to find out the correct SNMP community string to use See Chapter 6 Managing BCMS0 with SNMP on page 133 for more information about SNMP community strings Click OK to exit the dialog box An icon representing the newly defined element with its associated IP address appears on the Network Elements tree Note If you want to change the IP address to a name or other type of identification triple click the IP address or right click once on the IP address Once the field becomes editable type in the new information Refer to Element Manager window attributes on page 42 for a detailed description of the common Element Manager window elements Next steps Proceed to Connecting to a BCM50 element on page 41 Finding Network Elements You can search for a group of BCM50s located on the same subnet by using Find Network Elements This function uses SNMP to search for all of the BCMS50s in the specified IP address range and add them to the Element Navigation tree Only BCM50s with SNMP enabled will be detected This tool saves time when trying to quickly populate Element Manager with previously deployed BCM50s for the first time Use the following procedure to
129. Manager download page oa fF Q Select the Open button on the File Download dialog box to download and install the BCM50 Element Manager on your computer 7 Put the Citrix server in install mode by selecting Add Remove Programs gt Add New Program gt CD or Floppy or by entering the change user install command from the DOS prompt 8 Follow the prompts to install the Element Manager and BCM Monitor on your computer NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 39 If an older version of Element Manager is already installed on your computer you can choose to update the existing installation or perform a new installation If you choose to perform a new installation you can copy the existing resources to the new installation including the device tree cartridges and user preferences BCM Monitor replaces any older versions of BCM Monitor already installed on your computer 9 Put the Citrix server in execute mode by closing the After Installation window or by entering the change user execute command from the DOS prompt 10 Publish the Element Manager application to make it available to the users using standard Citrix application publishing Accessing BCM50 using Element Manager The first time BCM Element Manager opens it displays two panels The Element Navigation Panel located on the left enables you to create a definition within Element Manager for each BCM50 to be managing using BCM Element Manager You can then
130. N Software Management Software Inventory Panel read only e Web Documentation User Documentation e Diagnostic Logs Diagnostic Log Transfer Diagnostic Only component logs e SSL Certificate Transfer Certificate Transfer SSL Certificate amp SSH Key upload download e Web User Applications CTE Appl access privileges e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User e Web Documentation User Documentation e BCM50 Applications Applications CTE DA Pro AE e Web User Applications IP Set Registration access privileges e SBA IP Set Registration e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User e Web Documentation User Documentation e Web User Applications NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 103 BCMMonitor Appl access privileges EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User EM ADMIN Utilities BCM Monitor Web Documentation User Documentation BCM50 Applications Applications BCM Monitor Web User Applications CDR Appl access privileges EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User Web Documentation User Documentation BCM50 Applications Applications Call Detail Recording Web User Applications PPP Access access privileges EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User Web Documentation User Documentation RAS Applications PPP Web User Applications Guest Download access privileges Web Documentation
131. N can access the BCM50 and Router SNMP directly by using the LAN addresses of the BCM50 and BCMS0 router An SNMP management station that is connected to the OAM LAN cannot access the router SNMP as there is no relay on the BCMS0 Configuring SNMP settings You can use the Element Manager to configure the BCM50 SNMP agent You can configure e general SNMP settings community strings e service access points e SNMP trap destinations You can save a record of SNMP settings using the programming record For more information see Saving programming records on page 58 Configuring general SNMP settings You can configure general SNMP settings including e enabling and disabling the SNMP agent e enabling and disabling versions of the SNMP agent e defining access permissions e adding and deleting SNMP management stations BCM50 Administration Guide 136 Chapter 6 Managing BCM50 with SNMP You can create a list of SNMP managers who are permitted to query the BCM50 system by specifying their IP addresses If you have specified SNMP managers the BCM50 SNMP agent will respond only to SNMP requests from those IP devices To configure the BCM50 SNMP agent A OO N a 7 Start the Element Manager In the Network Element navigation panel select a BCM element Log on to the BCM50 by clicking the Connect button When the Element Manager has connected to the device click the Configuration tab in the Task panel Open
132. NN40020 100 BCMS0 Installation Checklist and Quick Start Guide NN40020 308 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide NN40020 302 Keycode Installation Guide NN40010 301 BCMS0 Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 BCMS0 Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 BCMS0 Telset Administration Guide NN40020 604 BCM5S0 Telephony Device Installation Guide NN40020 309 NN40020 600 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM50 21 CallPilot Telephone Administration Guide NN40090 500 CallPilot Contact Center Telephone Administration Guide NN40040 600 BCMS50 LAN CTE Configuration Guide NN40020 602 BCMS0 Call Detail Recording System Administration Guide NN40020 605 Digital Mobility System Installation and Configuration Guide NN40020 306 How to get Help This section explains how to get help for Nortel products and services Getting Help from the Nortel Web site The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel Technical Support Web site http www nortel com support This site provides quick access to software documentation bulletins and tools to address issues with Nortel products More specifically the site enables you to e download software documentation and product bulletins e search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base for answers to technical issues e sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation for Nortel equipment e open a
133. NO 0 Terminal Violation Cleared Proxy Server K gt near DN lt gt source IP lt gt source port lt gt destination IP lt gt destination port lt gt ICT lt gt eT lt gt nLR k gt dR lt gt bD lt gt bL K gt gD lt gt gL lt gt leSD lt gt aNL lt l gt aSP lt gt rTT lt gt BCM50 Administration Guide 208 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 558 p0502 Warning Unistim Terminal Proxy Server Packet Loss Violation Warning lt gt near DN lt gt source IP lt gt source port lt gt destination IP lt gt destination port lt gt cT lt gt eT lt gt nLR k gt dR lt gt bD lt gt bL k gt gD lt gt gL lt gt leSD lt gt aNL KkIl gt aSP lt gt rTT lt gt No Action Required es es No minor Unistim Terminal Proxy Server Packet Loss Violation Unacceptable lt gt near DN lt gt source IP lt gt source port lt gt destination IP lt gt destination port lt gt CT lt gt eT k gt nLR lt gt dR K gt bD lt gt bL lt gt gD lt gt gL lt gt eSD k gt aNL lt I gt aSP K gt TT lt gt No Action Required Yes Yes No information Unistim Terminal Proxy Server Inter Arrival Jitter Violation Cleared lt gt near DN lt gt source IP lt gt source port lt gt destination IP lt gt destination port lt
134. ObjectID assignments Table 108 sysObjectID assignments Model Main Unit sysObjectID Integrated Router sysObjectID BCM50 and BCM50b 1 3 6 1 4 1 562 37 1 7 BCM50a and BCM50ba 1 3 6 1 4 1 562 37 1 7 1 3 6 1 4 1 562 37 1 5 BCM50e and BCM50be 1 3 6 1 4 1 562 37 1 7 1 3 6 1 4 1 562 37 1 6 NN40020 600 Appendix A Management Information Bases 347 Small Site Event MIB The Small Site Events MIB defines events SNMP traps that can be used by any Small Site product or component BCM50 traps can be captured and viewed using a standard SNMP fault monitoring framework or trap watcher SNMP traps are generated by the BCM50 if you have enabled SNMP for specific BCM50 alarms You configure SNMP settings using the Alarm Settings task in the Element Manager For information about how to configure SNMP traps see Chapter 6 Managing BCM50 with SNMP on page 133 Table 109 lists the BCM50 specific SNMP trap fields for Small Site Event MIBs Table 109 BCM50 specific SNMP trap fields for the Small Site Event MIB Trap Field Description Enterprise OID identifies the product iso org dod internet private enterprises nortel smallsite common events 1 3 6 1 4 1 562 37 3 1 Agent address IP address of one of the BCM50 interfaces Generic trap type 6 for Enterprise specific traps Specific trap type 1 eventinfo trap type 2 eventWarning trap type 3 eventError trap type Time
135. Om O AO P em O18 SE LAS Address https 192 168 249 25 Eco Links Google C search 9 Check Autolink Ea Options NORTEL Contact Home Welcome BCM50 User Applications User Documentation Administrator Applications Administrator Documentation Copyright Nortel Networks Inc 2005 All Rights Reserved A Click the Retrieve Log Files link The Get Logs panel appears 5 Click one of the three options for file transfer Transfer to My Computer Store on USB Memory or Sent to 6 Ifyou select the Send to radio button select a destination from the drop down list otherwise go to the next step 7 Click the Click Here to Download Logs link The File Download screen opens Click the Save button The Save As screen opens 9 Specify the location where you want to save the log file transfer and enter a name for the file in the File Name field 10 Click the Save button The file is saved BCM50 Administration Guide 314 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs To use the BCM50 Web Page to transfer log files to other destinations 1 In your web browser type the IP address of the BCM50 and click the Go button The login screen opens 2 Log in to the BCM50 using the same user name and password that you use to log into a BCM5S0 using the BCM50 Element Manager The BCMS0 Web page opens 3 Click the Administrators Applications link 3 Nortel BCM50 Admi
136. On the Alarms panel click the Reset LEDs button The Status LED on the front panel of the BCM is reset from red to normal operation green Using SNMP traps You can use an SNMP trap manager to remotely monitor BCM alarms via SNMP traps A trap is an indication from the BCM system to configured trap managers that an alarm has occurred in the BCM system Any BCM alarm can generate an SNMP trap If you want the BCM to send SNMP traps you must first configure the SNMP agent using the BCM Element Manager You must enable an SNMP agent and then configure how the system handles SNMP trap notifications For information about configuring SNMP settings see Configuring SNMP settings on page 135 The BCM system uses the Small Site Events Management Information Base MIB for alarms The trap format is specified in this MIB You capture and view traps using any standard SNMP fault monitoring framework or trap watcher For information about the Small Site Events MIB see Management Information Bases on page 343 By default the BCM sends SNMP traps for alarms with a severity of Major and Critical The only exception is PVQM alarms for these alarms the BCM send SNMP traps for all severity levels You can change the default alarms that are set for SNMP to limit the volume and type of SNMP information and to control essential information that is transferred on the network For information about how to change the default alarms see To enable or
137. Once you have downloaded a software update from the Nortel Technical Support Web page you can apply it to the BCM50 You can apply one software update at a time For multiple software updates repeat the following procedure until each update has been applied When you have several updates to apply any software updates that require the system to reboot should be applied last Information about each update is available when you click the Show Details button BCM50 Administration Guide 326 Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates Applying a software update is a two part process 1 You transfer a software update to the BCMS0 which validates the integrity of the software update and ensures that the BCMS0 meets prerequisites for applying the software update 2 You apply the software update to the BCM50 which then brings the update into service Caution Applying a software update to the BCM50 may be a service affecting operation Nortel recommends that you schedule updates for low traffic hours Refer to the detailed information provided with each update to understand its impact on the system Caution In the case of some software updates the BCM50 automatically restarts as soon as an update has been applied without prompting or confirmation These updates are identified as Reboot Req d in the Find Software Updates window Note Software update files may range in size from several hundred kilobytes to i
138. P v2 and SNMP v1 6 Click the OK button Adding an SNMP manager to the BCM50 SNMP manager list Note If you configure an SNMP manager with an IP address of 0 0 0 0 the SNMP agent will respond to SNMP queries from all stations Caution If you add more than five SNMP management stations the SNMP service may degrade system performance To add an SNMP manager to the BCM50 SNMP manager list Click the Configuration tab Open the Administrator Access folder and then click SNMP Click the General tab The General panel is displayed 4 Inthe SNMP Manager List area click the Add button The Add Manager dialog box opens BCM50 Administration Guide 138 Chapter 6 Managing BCM50 with SNMP 5 Configure the manager list attributes Table 40 SNMP Manager Attributes Attribute Action Manager IP Enter the IP address of the SNMP manager that you want to authorize to query the Address BCM50 system The IP address must correspond to the PC where the SNMP manager software is installed Do not use the dynamic IP address that the PC receives when the dial up link activates when the BCM50 initiates dialing Using the dynamic IP address causes the removal of the required static route The format for the IP address is X X X X P where P is the port Setting the IP address to 0 0 0 0 authorizes all SNMP managers to query the system 6 Click the OK button To delete an SNMP manager 1 Click the Config
139. QoS Indicator Displays a text description of the current MOS value The MOS values can be Poor Fair Good or Excellent G 711 Displays the current MOS value calculated when using a G 711 aLaw codec to transmit VoIP packets to this Remote Gateway The MOS can be a value from 0 00 to 5 00 where 0 00 is the worst score Poor and 5 00 is best score Excellent NN40020 600 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics 223 Table 55 Mean Opinion Score descriptions Continued Attribute Description Name Displays the name of the Remote Gateway G 723 5 3kbit s Displays the current MOS value calculated when using a G 723 5 3 kbit s codec to transmit VoIP packets to this Remote Gateway The MOS can be a value from 0 00 to 5 00 where 0 00 is the worst score Poor and 5 00 is best score Excellent G 723 6 3kbit s Displays the current MOS value calculated when using a G 723 6 3 kbit s codec to transmit VoIP packets to this Remote Gateway The MOS can be a value from 0 00 to 5 00 where 0 00 is the worst score Poor and 5 00 is best score Excellent G 729 Displays the current MOS value calculated when using a G 729 codec to transmit VoIP packets to this Remote Gateway The MOS can be a value from 0 00 to 5 00 where 0 00 is the worst score Poor and 5 00 is best score Excellent G 729A Displays the current MOS value calculated when using a G 729A codec to transmit VoIP packets to this remote Gat
140. SNMP trap criteria are forwarded to the SNMP trap reporting interface according to defined trap community strings SNMP trap notifications are displayed in your SNMP trap software SNMP traps are generated by the BCM50 if you have enabled SNMP for specific BCM50 alarms You configure SNMP settings using the Alarm Settings task in the Element Manager You can configure the following attributes associated with a trap destination e the name of the trap destination e the host address of the trap destination e the port e the SNMP version e the community string for SNMP v1 and v2C only e the user name for SNMP v3 only For information about administering SNMP trap destinations see Viewing and modifying SNMP trap destinations Note You can configure and administer SNMP trap destinations in both the Configuration tab and the Administration tab of the Element Manager This allows operators who manage BCMS0 faults to configure SNMP trap destinations without having to access the SNMP settings on the Configuration panel SNMP must be enabled on the SNMP General panel if you want to configure and use SNMP trap destinations from the SNMP Trap Destinations panel on Administration panel To add a trap destination 1 Click the Configuration tab 2 Open the Administrator Access folder and then click SNMP NN40020 600 Chapter 6 Managing BCM50 with SNMP 143 3 Click the SNMP Trap Destinations tab The SNMP Trap Destinations
141. Select Components to Restore panel opens Select the optional components that you want to include from the backup archive Click the OK button A warning window opens and displays information about components that will be affected by the restore operation Read the warning carefully before proceeding Click the Yes button to proceed A progress window opens When the operation is complete the Restore Complete window opens Click the OK button BCM50 Administration Guide 300 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data NN40020 600 301 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs This chapter contains information about viewing and managing log archives generated by the BCMS0 Overview of BCM50 logs A log archive is a collection of individual log events generated by the BCM50 An administrator can use log archives to monitor and analyze system behavior user sessions and events You manage logs by transferring selected BCM50 log archives from the BCMS0 to a specified location such as your personal computer You can then view individual log events using the Element Manager Log Browser or your usual text editor Note Depending on the privileges assigned to you you may or may not see all gt the log files or processes described in this chapter In addition to the log files generated by the BCM50 the Element Manager itself generates a log file This log is found under the File selection of the Element Manager tool
142. Server attributes Table 87 Configure Restore from FTP Server attributes Attribute Action FTP server Enter the hostname or IP address of the FTP server User Name Enter the user name associated with the FTP server Directory Enter the path to the subdirectory as applicable optional File Enter the name of the backup file A window opens and displays information about the backup file including a warning that the selected backup file will replace the backup file currently stored on the BCM Caution When you proceed to the next step the selected file will overwrite the backup file that is stored on the BCM Ensure that the correct backup file is selected before proceeding Click the Open button The Select Components to Restore window opens Select the optional components that you want to include in the backup file Click the OK button A warning window opens and displays information about components that will be affected by the restore operation Read the warning carefully before proceeding BCM50 Administration Guide 298 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 8 Click the Yes button to proceed A progress window opens When the operation is complete the Restore Complete window opens 9 Click the OK button Restoring data from an SFTP server Caution A restore operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever restoring data will caus
143. Service ToneSrvr has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager This will affect the ability to use IP music Reboot system and contact your local support group Yes Yes Yes Yes Warning Service Manager Service Manager Core Telephony has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped No Action Required Yes No No Warning Service Manager Service Manager CallPilot has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped No Action Required Yes No No NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 181 Warning Service Manager Service Manager IP Terminal Service UTPS has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due toa dependency on another service that has been stopped This will affect service on all IP terminals on the system No Action Required es INO No Warning Service Manager Service Manager Voice over IP Gateway feps has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been sto
144. Service Service Manager Check for Yes Yes Yes Yes Manager Quality of Service corresponding alarm Monitor qmond 10106 or 10306 If has stopped service doesn t unexpectedly restart then reboot Service Manager is system and contact attempting to restart your local support the service group BCM50 Administration Guide 172 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System m28 0007 critical Service Service Manager Check for es es es es Manager Call Detail corresponding alarm Recording Service 10107 or 10307 If CDRService has service doesn t stopped restart then reboot unexpectedly system and contact Service Manager is your local support attempting to restart group the service 129 T0008 critical Service Service Manager Check for Yes Yes Yes Yes Manager Voice Application corresponding alarm Interface Service 10108 or 10308 If ctiserver has service doesn t stopped restart then reboot unexpectedly This system and contact will affect CallPilot your local support System Set Based group Admin and the modem Service Manager is attempting to restart the service T31 T0009 critical Service Service Manager Check for Yes Yes es Yes Manager Modem Call Control corresponding alarm modemcc has 10109 or 10309 If stopped service doesn t unexpectedly This restart then reboot will affect Dial In system and contact land Dial Out using lyour local support ithe integrate
145. Specifies an alphanumeric key This key is part of the access information your service technician requires to remotely access your system Default trust no one If you change the default string retain a record of the new string so that Nortel Technical Support can access your system during a support service call This key must be at least one character long to allow Nortel support operation Hide Challenge Key check box When checked displays asterisks to hide the characters used in the challenge key Default not checked Local Authentication Policy tab Credential Complexity Credential Type Element Manager Alphanumeric Telset Numeric Specifies the variety of characters an alphanumeric password must have The required number of each type is defined by the complexity level Note User IDs are not case sensitive Telset interface passwords must be numerical Password complexity for these passwords defines how many unique digits are required Minimum User ID length Element Manager Alphanumeric 1 32 Telset Numeric 1 16 Specifies the minimum number of characters that the system requires for each type of credential Minimum password length Element Manager Alphanumeric 1 32 Telset Numeric 1 16 Specifies the minimum number of characters that must be entered for a new password Note Alphanumeric passwords are case sensitive Note This setting must be the same as or greater th
146. SrOUpiIMCIICS ces c rete ob ced ose ees eee eRe ee a E eees 235 PSTN FAACK MENOS iiss iain oad na 6 eink Road ace med ead Geko bdo 237 Proactive Voice Quality Management 0000 cece eee eee 238 Chapter 10 BCM50 CGS 6 ici e ade ae ed Re eLAEM ERATED RA AERA ARO 245 About BOCM MONIOF yeta cuei iagus ah eset alee tak a ohi oR aide dew Se UE Bee eR 245 Installing BCM Monnet tcrcvoeerradee ve eeeaee terete wee ieee a bene Ea 246 Connecting to a BCM50 system 0000 ee 246 Using BCM Monitor to analyze system status 0000 cee eee eee 248 SIAC SNOPSICIS syara nia seer ad tee peeeeseeeayeserneeyegede sees 249 Tai Sieh lt fare kak aha coed Sowa oe a ER EO Acide 250 BOM IMO TAN 2 o4scbeengeeoes dese ihen deseo oboe EA lee ERS 253 Meda Can TAY si cur Sede bee teddy ween eks eRe A Kehna ta edee hed 254 VOCO FONG tak at paceedoadegeeenewe Looe eeeeue weRrde rant peKnes ees 255 IP Devices taD conc ct cet contd tate iad Sener towns been ceded comer same 255 RIP SSeS 1a erorrek node coke heseheweidun shebwe haan s Lee ease 256 Wee Cl See eee E eee ee ee eee ee T 257 Gne MOWO laD 22 skanke cates jake ia neinir Seed se eee teehee Pea ered 260 Usage mdicalors aD ji ss et cae ae eas See Mae be aS ne 262 Using Statistical values lt lt cdcce nian seeks Ree MONS Mande aRs HaReES RS 263 PFN 07487 eGo rin dheaosee Rata eet Pees SERRE ee eaten en aare ees 265 Wes BOOS ar ar hc ou oes oe ee EG BE as ames am aoe ke RS 266 Ethernet AGIMIY
147. TP server Directory Enter the path to the subdirectory as applicable 5 Click the Backup button The Backup window opens 6 Inthe Optional Components table select or clear the check box to include or exclude these components from the backup operation 7 Click the OK button A warning window opens Read the warning carefully before proceeding 8 Click the Yes button to proceed A progress window opens When the backup preparation is complete the Backup Complete message displays 9 Click the OK button Viewing and performing scheduled backups You can create scheduled backups in order to perform backups at a date and time that you choose For example you can choose a date and time during which your business is closed This will avoid disrupting the normal work day routine and may allow your backup file to transfer more quickly You can create a schedule for a single backup operation or for backup operations that recur on a regular basis You can view existing scheduled backups as well as modify and delete them Caution A backup operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever the backup will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a backup that does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a backup at a time when the system is typically not in use Table 76 lists the information t
148. Time m Visible lines Show all lines including inactive BCM50 Administration Guide 262 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities Usage Indicators tab The Usage Indicators tab displays real time information about the BCM50 system The tab displays the following information e BCM50 system data including CPU and memory use e resources used on the Media Card including signaling channels media channels voice bus channels and DSP resources e active telephony devices such as IP trunks IP sets voice ports and media gateways The information is displayed as an absolute figure and as a percentage of the resource used You can capture a static snapshot of this information or log it dynamically For more information about snapshots see Using BCM Monitor to analyze system status on page 248 Usage values Usage values are accompanied by a colored bar Table 67 describes the usage value indicators and recommended actions Table 67 Usage indicators Indicator color Indicator meaning Recommended action Green Usage values are normal None Yellow Potential resource problem Further investigation is recommended if an indicator remains yellow for an extended period Red Critical resource problem Further investigation is recommended if an indicator remains red for more than a few seconds NN40020 600 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities 263 f BCM Monit
149. UAGE Uses Feature 983 the first time you initialize CallPilot See CallPilot documentation BCM50 Administration Guide 109 110 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges Telset group access privileges There are four set based group access privileges These are listed in order of greatest to least access privileges with SBA Installer being the group with the greatest privileges SBA Installer group access privileges SBA Feature 9 8 SBA Installer Rights IP Set Registration when IP set registration is configured and a global password setting is used EM CONFIG Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges Current User Web Documentation User Documentation BCMS0 Applications User Applications SBA System Coordinator group access privileges SBA Coordinator Plus Rights EM CONFIG Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges Current User Web Documentation User Documentation BCM50 Applications User Applications SBA System Coordinator group access privileges SBA Coordinator Rights EM CONFIG Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges Current User Web Documentation User Documentation BCM5S0 Applications User Applications SBA Basic group access privileges SBA Basic Rights EM CONFIG Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges Current User Web Documentation User Documentation BCM50 Applications User Applications
150. Up Interfaces panel In the Details for Interface panel click the IP Address Specification tab In the Remote IP Address Specification area select the Assign IP address to remote checkbox In the IP address field enter the IP address of the not sure Select Configuration gt SNMP gt SNMP Trap Destinations Click Add and add a destination IP address to which to deliver the alarms Click OK Auto SNMP dial out The auto SNMP dial out service allows you to use an analog modem or ISDN channel to deliver alarms to a specified destination NN40020 600 Chapter 6 Managing BCM50 with SNMP 145 To configure auto SNMP dialout Click the Configuration tab 2 Open the Resources folder and then click Network Interface Click the Dial out Parameters tab The Dial out Parameters panel is displayed In the Dial out Number field enter a phone number for the modem to use In the Dial out Routes area click the Add button and enter a route and subnet mask In the Static IP Address Pool area enter a static IP address Select the SNMP page and select the SNMP Trap Destination tab Click the Add button and enter a destination IP address for the alarms to be delivered to Click OK O ON OO Oo Ff Note If the line is busy or if the modem cannot connect for any reason the alarm Es will not be delivered to the destination If you are using SNMP v3 the modem will re attempt the connection three times For informatio
151. Using the BCM50 Element Manager Log Browser to view extracted log files gives you the ability to view information in a way that suits you for example you can filter and sort information according to priority time message and so on BCM50 Administration Guide 304 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs Transferring log files using the BCM50 Element Manager Using the BCM50 Element Manager you can transfer log files by using e animmediate log transfer e ascheduled log transfer You can create modify or delete a scheduled log transfer You can transfer log files to the following destinations e a USB storage device e your personal computer e a network folder e an FTP server e an SFTP server for secure file transfer Log archives transferred to the servers and the USB device are named with a Log_ prefix The system name of the BCM50 and the date time are appended to the prefix An example filename is Log_acme_20050708T101604 tar When you transfer log files to the computer on which your Element Manager is installed the default location for the Logs folder is BCM50ElementManager files logs You may wish to create a folder within this folder for each BCM you are managing so that log files from a particular BCM50 can always be transferred to the associated log file folder on your computer When you are transferring the log archive to your personal computer you may also wish to save the log archive file using the system name and
152. Windows XP e RAM minimum 256 MB recommended 512 MB e free space 150 MB To install Element Manager on your computer 1 Connect to the BCMS0 web page Ifthe BCMS0 is installed on the network use a browser and type in the BCM50 IP address as the URL in the following format http KxXx XXX XXX XXX Ifthe BCM50 is installed but not yet configured connect directly to the BCM50 through the OAM port and using a browser type the following http 10 10 11 1 2 Enter the user name and password to be authenticated on the BCM50 web page See Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges on page 75 for information on default user and passwords Select the Administrator Applications link Select the Business Element Manager link from the Administrator Applications web page Select the Download Element Manager link from Element Manager download page O a Aa Q Select the Open button on the File Download dialog box to download and install the BCM50 Element Manager on your computer 7 Follow the prompts to install the Element Manager and BCM Monitor on your computer If an older version of Element Manager is already installed on your computer you can choose to update the existing installation or perform a new installation If you choose to perform a new installation you can copy the existing resources to the new installation including the device tree cartridges and user preferences BCM Monitor repla
153. Yes No INO 0 Control MCC Modem DN changed in admin Warning Modem Call Modem Call Control Contact your local Yes No No Control MCC Failed to support group Open the Communication Path to RAS Disabling the Modem critical Service Service Manager Check for Yes Yes Yes Yes Manager Core Telephony has corresponding alarm stopped 10101 or 10301 If unexpectedly service doesn t Service Manager is restart then reboot attempting to restart system and contact the service your local support group critical Service Service Manager Check for Yes Yes Yes Yes Manager CallPilot has corresponding alarm stopped 10102 or 10302 If unexpectedly service doesn t Service Manager is restart then reboot attempting to restart system and contact the service your local support group critical Service Service Manager Check for Yes Yes Yes Yes Manager IP Terminal Service corresponding alarm UTPS has stopped 10103 or 10303 If unexpectedly This service doesn t will affect service on restart then reboot all IP terminals on system and contact the system Service your local support Manager is group attempting to restart the service critical Service Service Manager _ Check for Yes Yes es Yes Manager Voice over IP corresponding alarm Gateway feps has 10105 or 10305 If stopped service doesn t unexpectedly restart then reboot Service Manager is system and contact attempting to restart your local support the service roup critical
154. Yes Yes Yes Yes TOTT4 critical Service Manager Service Manager Media Path Server mps has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager This will affect all IP Telephony Reboot system and contact your local support group Yes Yes es es BCM50 Administration Guide 178 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System T7T pots critical Service Manager Service Manager Media Gateway Server mgs has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager This will affect all IP Telephony Reboot system and contact your local support group es es es es critical Service Manager Manager Service Manager Persistent Data Repository Pdrd has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager This will affect any management done to running services lor startup of non running services Keycode Service cfsserver has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager This will affect the ability to enter any new keycodes Reboot system and contact your local support group contact your local support group Yes Yes Yes Yes 73 T0117 critical Service Service Manager Reboot system and Yes Yes Yes Yes critical Service Manager Service Manager Time Service tmwservice has stopped unexpectedly and could n
155. a 239 To access PVYQM Metrics sic siedessaeeisccissneatcetiauniasedesaneniveasaina inca ona PAA an ERAEN ESSEN 242 BCM VINES oeicreisssadei ena NE 245 To install BCM Monitor separately from BCM50 Element Manager 0ccceeeee 246 Toromiore BOM Monko i siassiccxsasnatvecccsaniaseatanmniCexaduresieeranaaeesnmmioesiomeieenaaneniueas 246 To start BCM Monitor without the Element Managel c ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 247 NN40020 600 Task List 5 To start BCM Monitor from the Element Managet cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteaeeees 247 To connect toadiferant BOMS secs acceteccriacsiselcsaecesesoinrmcte iii eG 248 To configure static snapshot setings aiivsstecaxssavesseeizcansunas sanecGecdiadearscaxauastpndideacssnddiarssy 249 TO Save a Skalle Sop lenao N aeave eG Bee 250 To configure dynamic snapshot SQMINGS siccsscccsicessccceaicsesninacecoiaduedteadatatentess manaieeeiscaels 251 To disable monitoring of UIP Messages ssia 258 TODI OIF i ere ere a 259 TOv oN UF TOIRE aoa eggs dds eoi a ia Gee dnd aE 259 To comigure mecut sating sinsin 259 To apan a UIP MOSSAD O bnrrodraiiniie ai eae 260 TO clear UIP mescage dola Eesi 260 Te view Ses meian ea e EAEN AE ee 261 To view the date and time of minimum and maximum values 264 To reset the minimum and maximum values for a statistic e 264 Topo AUO E ala orees cpsaay cin Ges cages cosedaneenmeniat A 265 ee Peroni anoto NOMS ga bit a a eibi ee ameaae 266
156. a number that represents the number of times a user can try to login with an incorrect password NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 83 4 Inthe Lockout duration box enter the number of minutes the user is locked out after the Lockout counter threshold is reached 5 Inthe Lockout counter reset box enter the number of minutes to wait to reset the Lockout counter Setting password expiry policy Use this procedure to enable a password expiry policy To set password expiry policy 1 Select Configuration Administrator Access Security Policies gt Local Authentication Policy 2 Inthe Days before password expire box enter the number of days that a password can be used before it expires 3 Inthe Warning days before password expire box enter the number of days prior to password expiry that the user will receive a notification 4 Select the Enable checkbox to enable the password expiry policy Setting password history policy You can use the password history feature to prevent users from re using the same password Administrators can configure the number of previous passwords to store and check To set password history 1 Select Configuration Administrator Access Security Policies gt Local Authentication Policy In the Password history section select the Enable Password History box In the Password history length box enter the number of previous passwords to store and check
157. act the contents of the zipped file A message dialog box opens and displays a success or error message for each extracted file NN40020 600 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs 317 amp Message X Message from server Success extracted file coretel log 5 gz Success extracted file coretel log 6 gz Success extracted file coretel log 7 gz Success extracted file coretel log 8 gz Success extracted file coretel log 9 gz Success extracted file voicectilog Success extracted file voicecti log 2 gz Success extracted file voicectilog 3 gz Success extracted file coretel log 11 gz Success extracted file coretel log 12 gz lt w E 7 Click the OK button to acknowledge an individual message or click OK to All to acknowledge all messages once the extraction is complete Alternatively you can wait until the extraction is complete and then close the window Once the files are extracted the View Log File window opens M 8 Selecta log file folder for example operationalLogs tar Select systemlog from the Save as Type select field to show only log files that the Log Browser can display 9 Click the Open button The log file folder opens and the log files that it contains are displayed Gwe ax Look in a operationalLogs tar x 3 om if 4 E alarms systemlog E archiver systemlog My Recent R EA E configchange systemlog Ei E MonitGuard s
158. ailed information about the performance of the system and of system resources This chapter contains information about the utilities that are part of the Element Manager Several utilities are provided to allow partners and customers to monitor and analyze the system This chapter provides information about how to back up and restore data from the system This chapter contains information about viewing and managing log files generated by the BCM50 This chapter contains information about managing software updates This chapter describes the management of accounting records in the BCM50 Account management uses the Call Detail Recording CDR application to record call activity Each time a telephone call is made to or from a BCM detailed information about the call can be captured in a CDR file This appendix contains information about how to install and use Management Information Bases MIBs if you use SNMP to manage your system NN40020 600 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM50 17 Audience The BCM50 Administration Guide is directed to network administrators responsible for maintaining BCM networks that include BCM50 devices This guide is also useful for network operations center NOC personnel supporting a BCM50 managed services solution To use this guide you must e be an authorized BCMS0 administrator within your organization e know basic Nortel BCM50 terminology e be knowledgeable about telephony and IP ne
159. ails for an update click the Show Details button The Details for Update window opens and displays any details about the update Click the OK button to close the details window Click the Schedule button to create a schedule The Schedule Software Updates window opens Click the Retrieve field to select a date and time at which to retrieve the update A calendar window opens Select a retrieve date and time and then close the window Click the Apply field to select a date and time at which to apply the update A calendar window opens Select an apply date and time and then close the window Click the OK button The software update is added to the Scheduled Software Updates table The status of the update is Schedule BCM50 Administration Guide 336 Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates Modifying a scheduled software update Caution Applying a software update to the BCM50 is a service affecting operation Nortel recommends that you schedule updates for low traffic hours Caution If a software update has a checkmark applied against it in the Reboot Req d column of the New Updates Found window the BCM50 will automatically reboot as soon as the update has been applied You will not receive a reboot confirmation before the reboot occurs To modify a scheduled software update 1 Inthe task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Software Management folder and then click the Softwa
160. al Yes Yes es Yes Updates Software upgrade support group failed to apply 79 major Software Software Update Retry removal of Yes Yes Yes Yes Updates Failed to remove software update and software update f problem persists contact your local support group 80 major Software Software Update Retry software Yes Yes es Yes Updates Software update update and if invalid signature or problem persists corrupt file Retry file contact your local transfer support group Bt 600f critical Persistent Persistent Data Reboot system and Yes Yes es Yes Data Repository Could contact your local Repository inot start Persistent support group Data Repository No resources available This will cause many components to fail to start with the proper configuration 82 6002 Critical Persistent Persistent Data Restore a known Yes Yes Yes Yes Data Repository Could good backup into the Repository not open Persistent system If the Data Repository problem persists Reverting to last contact your local saved file Will mean support group configuration will not lbe current on the system 83 6003 Critical Persistent Persistent Data Restore a known Yes Yes Yes Yes Data Repository Could good backup into the Repository not open Persistent system If the Data Repository problem persists Reverting to default contact your local file Will mean support group configuration will be default on the system B4 6000 minor Date and Date and Time No A
161. al of updates for low traffic periods If a software update is applied to a BCM50 and then removed this information is displayed in the Software Update History table A removal operation is logged by the BCM50 but does not generate an alarm condition NN40020 600 Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates 339 You can remove a software update if the update has a checkmark in the Removeable column of the Software Update History table Removing a software update Caution Removing a software patch or upgrade from the BCMS0 is a service affecting operation All services running on the system will be stopped Consequently Nortel recommends that you schedule removal of updates during low traffic hours To remove a software update 1 Inthe task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Software Management folder and then click the Software Update History task The Software Update History panel opens 3 Select an update in the Software Update History table The update must have a checkmark against it in the Removeable column 4 Click the Remove Software Update button A confirmation window opens 5 Click Yes The Category column in the Software Update History table displays Patch Removed for the removed software update Viewing the inventory of BCM50 software BCM50 software is organized into software components that you can individually update as required The version of each software component is trac
162. alarm will display on the alarm set To test an alarm 1 2 Click the Administration tab Open the General folder and then click the Alarm Settings task The Alarm Settings panel opens In the Alarms table select an alarm Click the Test Alarm button In the Alarms table Test Event is displayed in the alarm Problem Description field List of BCM alarms Table 51 lists BCM alarms The table includes the default handling of each alarm with respect to the Alarms table the alarm set LEDs and SNMP traps You can customize whether each alarm appears in the Alarms table or is sent as an SNMP trap in accordance with your business requirements Table 51 List of alarms Alarm Component Problem Problem Alarm H ID Severity Name Description Resolution Alarm SNMP LED Set i T8 minor Core Core Telephony Reboot system and Yes No INO 0 Telephony Unable to process contact your local calls support group 2 critical Core Core Telephony Power down the Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony Media Bay Module system and check firmware download the DTM hardware failed land the expansion chassis connections If problem persists replace the DTM or xpansion chassis hardware 3 critical Core Core Telephony Contigure the DTM Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony BRI module is module as primary primary clock clock in your system instead of DTM BRI clock module specifications are not acceptable for DTM co
163. alog box Choose the group or groups with the appropriate access privileges for the user Note You cannot add user accounts to groups with read only privileges Delete Deletes the user account from the selected group View by Groups The View by Groups panel allows you to add or delete members from group profiles The Groups panel lists all the groups currently available in the system Table 30 describes each field on this panel Table 30 View by Groups fields Attribute Description Groups Lists all the defined groups Refer to Default groups on page 99 for a list of the default groups and the privileges associated with each Buttons Add Opens the Add Group dialog box Allows the creation of custom groups that provide combinations of privileges not covered by the default groups Delete Opens the Confirm Delete dialog box Allows for the deletion of any group with the exception of the Admin Group For more details about groups refer to the panels described in View by Groups General on page 118 View by Groups General For a selected entry in the Groups table View by Groups on page 118 you can use the General details panel to define which system privileges are assigned to this group and to users assigned with this group This panel also provides status information for the group Table 31 describes each field on this panel Table 31 View by Groups General panel field
164. alues Load capacity Battery charge Battery charge time left min Temperature C Line frequency Hz Output voltage Volts Input voltage Volts High transfer Line maximum Volts Low transfer Line minimum Volts Normal battery voltage volts Current battery voltage Volts 60 00 118 00 118 00 106 ie Normal Normal fi Jormal Normal i Jormal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal 2 To check the metrics of the UPS click the Metrics tab It displays the information on the panel NN40020 600 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics 225 Figure 30 UPS Status page Nortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager 5 Backup and Restore Logs Software Management NTP Metrics Using Network Time Protocol NTP you can configure the time on the BCMS0 indirectly from a single time server NTP is a network protocol designed to synchronize the clocks of computers over an IP network The NTP Metrics provide an overview of the integrity of the NTP time source Note If the BCM50 clock control has not been configured to use NTP Configuration gt System gt Date amp Time then the NTP Metrics panel displays no data This section provides the procedure To access the NTP Metrics BCM50 Administration Guide 226 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics To access the NTP Metrics 1 Open the Element Manager click the Administration tab click S
165. ample log2 tar BCM50 Administration Guide 316 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs 11 Click the Save button The file is saved Extracting log files Once you have transferred log files using the Element Manager or the BCM50 Web page you can extract the log files using the Element Manager Log Browser The log files must be extracted from the log archive before you can view them using the Element Manager Log Browser Before you extract log files create a folder in your directory for each archive and then follow the procedure below to extract the archive into the appropriate folder To extract log files using the Element Manager Left click a network element The network element may be connected or disconnected 2 Select File gt View Network Element Logs The View Log File window opens Select the directory or location that contains the transferred BCM50 log file tar archive Select Network Element log archives tar in the File of Type field Select the archive file and then click the Open button amp View log file Look in B My Documents x gl El l 4 SS Adobe My Recent D ES Pas nro A My Music 3 B My Pictures D My Received Files N D log2 BY D logs1 My Documents D Logs3 55 My Computer Desktop File narne Open wy ni Op My Network Files of type Rlefwork Element lag archives Clan x Nanan A confirmation dialog box opens 6 Click the Yes button to extr
166. an reset the password for the user by re entering the password in the user account Each user can access their own user information and change their password User accounts can be disabled either manually or through dated expiry On the telset administration menu F9 8 only the administrator SBAInstaller can enable or disable the telset user Ds and modify or delete telset user passwords NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 99 Default passwords The following table lists the available default passwords for the Element Manager interface the telset interface and the voice mail interface Table 21 Default passwords Default Default telset Available at User ID password Telset ID password Function startup nnadmin PlsChgMe 738662 266344 Read only installer system yes administrator nnguest nnguest Read only web only access yes 738266 266344 Set based installer level no 738727 727587 Set based administration no 738236 23646 Set based coordinator functions no 738227 22742 Set based basic access no voicemailadmin PlsChgMe 738862 266344 Voicemail admin no setup Router no This account is not created by default You must add a voicemail account using F9 8 New accounts are created from the startup profile with a default password of Time4Chg system function is verified Default groups Security note The default Administrat
167. an the complexity level setting Example If you have a complexity level of two two different types of characters or two unique numbers the password must be at least two characters long Password Complexity Level Element Manager arwWONM Oo Defines the number of character types required for an alphanumeric password Default 3 0 No complexity checks 1 only one character type is required 2 at least two character types are required 3 at least three character types are required 4 all four character types are required 5 prevent consecutive numbering Note A password complexity higher than 0 will ensure that the user name is not used as the password Check minimum length setting to ensure that it is equal to or greater than the complexity level Password complexity consists of the following types e upper case alphabet English e lower case alphabet English e westernized Arabic numbers e non alphanumeric characters period comma BCM50 Administration Guide 78 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges Table 17 Security Policies fields Continued Attribute Value Description Password 1 Specifies the number of unique digits that must be part of a Complexity Level 2 telset password telset interface 3 0 No complexity checks 4 1 one unique digit 5 2 two unique digits 3 three unique digits 4 four unique digits 5 prevent consecut
168. an update The update must have a status of Available Click the Apply button A confirmation window opens Click the Yes button The Software Update Complete confirmation window opens Click the OK button The Updates in Progress table lists the update as In Progress A software update that has the Reboot Required field checked will automatically reboot the BCMS0 once the update has been applied Creating and modifying scheduled software updates You can apply a software update to the BCM50 at a future date by creating a schedule A scheduled software update is displayed in the Scheduled Updates tab You can schedule only one update at a time You can view modify or delete a scheduled software update When you schedule a software update the device where the update is stored such as a USB device must be connected to the BCMS0 when you create the schedule Table 102 lists the information that is displayed about scheduled software updates in the Scheduled Software Updates table Table 102 Information about scheduled software updates Columns Description Name The name of the update Version The version of the update NN40020 600 Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates 333 Table 102 Information about scheduled software updates Columns Description Description A brief description of the update Size The size of the software update in kilobytes Reboot Req d Displays
169. anager log activities However the log files are available for troubleshooting should issues arise within the Element Manager operations When you select Application Log from the menu bar Help command the Element Manager Log Browser opens You can use the Log Browser to sort the events in the Application Log The BCM50 Element Manager Logs panel has three parts e Retrieval Criteria This panel allows you to specify logging criteria to clear the defined parameters of a selected criteria clear all retrieval criteria retrieve logs based on the specified criteria or stop logging e Retrieval Results This panel allows you to filter the results shown by retrieving logs based on selected severity level check boxes e Log Details shows the details of the logged message You can show or hide the retrieval criteria and log detail panels by clicking on the expansion arrow beside the panel heading See Figure 13 on page 63 for the Application log panel NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 63 Figure 13 Application log panel 47 155 152212 DA Temp Nortel Networks sensitivel ops tor coreteliog aini Level mce Logget Pro 1 Pndecito trerainde HEX rsarzag BASO PFO 1 HER St 14 FFF OONO 0 APPO pro 1 EE en Oscoprrr C maso wei 1 Fededto trangia HEK rs355 APPOQ pro 1 Padecito tranzita HEK rsazzag ASO Fsi 1 HEX St 291068 DMEF FFF Baso m Show F PE
170. and installing MIB files You access MIB files from the BCM50 Web Page You can also access BCM50 MIB files as a zipped file from the Nortel Customer Service Site Note You can use a MIB browser to load MIB information so that you can browse the structure of a MIB An example of a MIB browser is Microsoft Operations Manager MOM Each MIB browser has its own MIB compilation tool To access MIB files from the BCM50 Web Page A OO N 5 Go to the BCM50 Web Page Click the Administration Applications link Click BCM MIBs Click Download Device MIBs A File Download dialog box displays Click Save to download the file To access MIB files from the Nortel Customer Service Site 1 In your browser go to http www nortel com The Nortel Customer Service Site home page opens If you used the direct link the Technical Support page opens Go to step 5 Select the Support amp Training navigation menu and then select Technical Support Software Downloads The Technical Support page opens The Browse Product Support tab displays Product Finder fields In area 1 select Product Families from the selection field and then select BCM from the selection box In area 2 select Business Communications Manager BCM In area 3 select Software Click the Go link The Software tab opens In the by Title Number Keyword field enter mib and then press the Enter key A list of MIBs is displayed In the Title column cli
171. ansferring and extracting logfiles 0 00 0c eee eaee 303 Transferring log files using the BCM50 Element Manager 304 Performing immediate log archive transfers 0 000 e eee eee eee 304 Performing scheduled log transfers 0 000 tee eee 310 Transferring log files using the BCM50 Web page 000eeee 312 ExiacdiMng Do iOS 1 s5 evaeeeenrtepese cede e beeen egy PATER EEe ea EeEey 316 Viewing log files using the Log Browser 0000 eect eee eee 318 Retrieval Resuls arGa aces cece cae seed ere eden eee ee shad erriren 320 Log Pee tied c2583 oe i Btia dae coats Re be Rede eee wn ee ieee Res 320 Viewing log files using other applications 0 e ee eee 321 Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates 2 0 00 cece eee eee eee 323 Overview of BCM50 software updates 00 0c eee eee 323 Obtaining software updates 20 00 00 eee 323 Viewing software updates in progress 0 0 cee eee 324 Appiymg software Updates 2 ike dt Rede Shee eae EEEE EEREN ces 325 Creating and modifying scheduled software updates 000505 332 Viewing a history of software updates 2 0 eee 337 Removing software updates 000 c eee eee eee 338 Viewing the inventory of BCM50 software 00 0c eee eee eee 339 Chapter 14 Accounting Management 6 6 60s ccc ces eteenwavcsrenvecwe we 341 Overview of accounting management
172. area to display a summary view of your selected criteria This allows you to review selected criteria before you retrieve the logs amp 47 135 155 195 C Documents and Settings viyates My Doc uments operationalLogs tar Licey ow Retrieval Criteria Priory Log equas Clear All After you select an attribute you can click the Clear button to remove it from the summary list click the Clear All button to remove selected attributes or click the Retrieve button to initiate a retrieval of log files according to the criteria you defined in the Retrieval Criteria area To specify retrieval criteria 1 In the Retrieval Criteria table select an attribute The Criteria Definition area displays the corresponding details for the selected attribute Specify details for the selected attribute as appropriate Click the Retrieve button The results of the retrieval are displayed in the Retrieval Results list area BCM50 Administration Guide 320 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs Retrieval Results area The Retrieval Results area displays the list of log information that was retrieved according the criteria you selected in the Retrieval Criteria area The information is displayed in a table that you can sort by clicking column headings While the Log Browser is retrieving records you can monitor the progress of the retrieval by following the progress counter This counter also displays the elapsed time
173. arranges repetitive information such as lines programming device record DN record programming and system speed dials into tables of information You can manipulate these tables in terms of data display and filtering sorting and copying information between cells NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 53 Other information that only requires one or two fields is arranged on composite panels that may have more than one sub panel Each sub panel includes related information This section provides the following descriptions e Adding deleting and modifying table information on page 53 e Copying table information on page 53 e Rearranging table information on page 55 e Using your keyboard to move around a table on page 58 Adding deleting and modifying table information Some tables automatically list all available records such as the restriction filters These are tables where the number of entries is restricted by the BCM50 Other tables allow you to add or delete entries These tables have an Add and Delete button under the table When you click the Add button an add dialog box appears that allows you to enter basic information such as a name or DN When you click OK the new listing appears on the table with the default settings To modify table settings click on the fields that you want to change and use the list to choose a new setting or type in the setting If information in the table is used by more tha
174. assipeastavaipecitened tonstinnss aor Toremove a soihWware dJi E nn 339 Te view the BCM50 software InyentOry sieciami a e 340 Accounting Management aassnnussnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 341 Management Information Bases 00c eee e eee eee eee 343 To access MIB files from the BCM50 Web Page cccssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeteeeeeeaeees 345 To access MIB files from the Nortel Customer Service Site ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 345 NN40020 600 Contents Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM50 000 eee eee eee 15 ACUtth OUO lt 5 sod se e5 be 544 4G dis S5 60d SEe A SH e She SSRES AOR SRK 15 PUES EErEE TITTIE ehGue hee LR Ree ioe Mb dee 2h meee agian 15 OGRA 6 csc es ET E EEE koe eons dee reeen caeedenesdasied 15 PM TNE os Sick tse Sa alike dete A Som exe ab ag am Ee SS Daas andl Regard EA A 17 E E EA che T E EEATT rab beer eens sonra eeetareces sous 17 Symbols and conventions used in this guide 0000 e eee eee 19 Related pUDICANONS 2icnyetd pete eae tees Bek EE et eG eek eed 20 HOW to Get Holp cc cct acne rt eee eGR ed eee SR TEPER EERE ORE RES 21 Chapter 2 Overview of BCM50 Administration 000 eee eee eee 23 I kano cake a eee ee eh coke Pec Sede ae EE 23 BCM50 hardware cintc dered deeetedereeRee cane ReGen eee ee enee eae 23 BOMSO BOIS psprrdaireis ti pake ERAT R OE HERS ERES 25 Manage mem WUE e cL anekes reiaton ar eaaa waste raaa 25 BOMSO INISHaCES cugicrsriri bronie kn be
175. ation Service Manager Service Manager Quality of Service Monitor qmond has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No Information Service Manager Service Manager Call Detail Recording Service CDRService has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No Information Service Manager Service Manager Voice Application Interface Service ctiserver has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No Information Service Manager Service Manager Modem Call Control modemcc has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No Information Service Manager Service Manager System Set Based Admin Feature9 8 ssba has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No Information Service Manager Service Manager Computer Telephony Service Cte has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No Information Service Manager Service Manager Line Monitor Service Ims has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No BCM50 Administration Guide 188 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System TOSTS Information Service Manager Service Manager Media Services Manager Msm has been successfully restarted No Action Require
176. ation to close and all current sessions with BCM50 devices are terminated Do not click on the X box to disconnect Element Manager from its current session Closing the Element Manager To close the Element Manager select File gt Exit or click on the X box on the upper right corner of the window Close all active sessions before you close the Element Manager application Element Manager window attributes The initial Element Manager window has several attributes that appear regardless of whether the Element Manager is actively connected to a network element Although all of the network elements appear some of the menu options may not be available for the selected device depending on the device s state The following sections describe the menus and information available on the Element Manager panel e Initial panel details on page 42 e Information displayed for unconnected elements on page 46 e Information displayed for connected elements on page 47 e Configuration task navigation panel details on page 48 e Administration task navigation panel details on page 50 For information about navigating the panels and tables of the Element Manager see Element Manager data features on page 52 Initial panel details Figure 3 on page 43 shows the initial panel of a newly installed Element Manager At this point no network elements have been defined and the Element Manager is not connected to any elements NN40020 600 Chapter
177. ay adversely affect system operation To stop a service 1 2 Click the Administration tab Open the General folder and then click the Service Manager task The Service Manager page opens Services are displayed in the Services table In the Services table select a service Click the Stop button A confirmation dialog box opens Click Yes In the Services table Stopped is displayed in the Status column for the stopped service To restart a service Click the Administration tab Open the General folder and then click the Service Manager task The Service Manager page opens Services are displayed in the Services table In the Services table select a stopped service Click the Restart button A confirmation dialog box opens Click Yes In the Services table Running is displayed in the Status column for the restarted service NN40020 600 219 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics You can use the Element Manager to view detailed information about the performance of the BCM5S0 and about the performance of system resources This chapter provides information about the following e system status e telephony metrics About the system status Using the Element Manager you can monitor overall system performance and other performance related information You monitor system status using the following tools e QoS Monitor e UPS Status e NTP Metrics QoS Monitor QoS Monitor monitors t
178. ay want to use only 12 B channels If you do not have all of the PRI B channels disable all the B channels that you do not need Nortel recommends that the number of lines that are deprovisioned on a DTM configured as PRI be the same as the number of B channels that are disabled For example if the DTM is on Expansion 1 when B channels 13 23 are disabled you should deprovision lines 77 to 87 BCM50 Administration Guide 230 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics To provision a PRI B channel Choose Administration Telephony Metrics Trunk Module Metrics Choose an expansion module Choose B channels A list of the B channels on this module appears 4 Click a channel for example B 01 The display shows the status of the PRI channel 5 On the Configuration menu click Enable or Disable to change the setting for the channel Trunk Module CSU statistics Each trunk module has an internal channel service unit CSU When enabled the internal CSU monitors the quality of the received T1 signal and provides performance statistics alarm statistics and diagnostic information Trunk modules must be individually programmed to establish parameters for collecting and measuring transmission performance statistics by the CSU For more information refer to e Statistics collected by the system on page 230 e Enabling the internal CSU on page 231 e To check the performance statistics on page 231 e To chec
179. bar This log contains diagnostic information The BCM50 manages log archives and maintains generations of information depending upon size or other criteria Generations of log files have a numbered extension such as 3 gz A generation of the alarms systemlog file is created each time the BCM50 is rebooted or when the log file reaches the 1 MB limit Log types The BCM50 logs are grouped in three categories e Operational logs e Diagnostic logs e Sensitive logs Each log category contains one or more log files A log transfer groups all selected categories into a common archive The embedded categories have easily identified names and are accessible to utilities such as WinZip MS Windows and tar UNIX When you transfer log archives a set of additional log files is included in the log archive These files are system information reports which contain information about the system at the time of the log transfer BCM50 Administration Guide 302 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs Administrators have access to all log categories Users who need only operational information have access to Operational and System Information logs Operational logs Operational logs contain information about the BCMS50 system and its use such as alarm information configuration changes and security information Administrators and authorized users can access Operational logs and view them using the Log Browser Table 89 lists the log files that belon
180. button DN is same as telephone to which is being copied NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 55 Table 7 Paste Data Continued Check box title Settings copied Settings not copied Capabilities Sets e Call Forward No Answer DN delay setting e Call Forward Busy DN setting e DND on busy e Handsfree setting e Handsfree answerback e Pickup group e Paging zone e Paging e Direct dial which set is reached by the D Dial digit e Priority calling e Hotline e Auxiliary ringer e Allow redirect e Redirect ring e ATA settings except Use ringback setting e Setname e Use ringback setting under ATA settings e SM Supervisor User Preferences Sets e Language choice e Ring type e Calls log options Auto logging e Display contrast e Dialing options automatic pre dial standard e External autodial button assignments e Internal autodial button assignments e Programmable button assignments Ring volume e User speed dial e CAP KIM module memory button Rearranging table information There are two ways of changing table information layout e Rearranging columns on page 56 e Rearranging lines on page 56 BCM50 Administration Guide 56 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment Rearranging columns You can move columns in a table if you want to temporarily display information in a different way Chang
181. ccess privileges on page 110 Security access privileges on page 102 CTE Appl access privileges on page 102 Operational Logs access privileges on page 107 Diagnostic Logs access privileges on page 107 Voice Mail amp Contact Center access privileges on page 101 Network IPSec access privileges on page 107 Modem dial out access privileges on page 107 ISDN dial in access privileges on page 107 ISDN dial in ISDN dial out access privileges on page 108 ISDN dial out WAN dial in access privileges on page 108 WAN dial in WAN dial out access privileges on page 108 WAN dial out PPPoE dial in access privileges on page 108 PPOE dial in PPPoE dial out access privileges on page 108 PPOE dial out Data Admin DATAAdmins DATA Admins group access privileges on page 104 Remote Access PPP PPP Access access privileges on page 103 RemoteAccess Remote Access access privileges on page 105 Guest Guests Guests access privileges on page 105 Voice Admin IP Set Registration IP Set Registration access privileges on page 102 VoiceAdmins Alarm Viewer Voice Admins access privileges on page 105 Alarm Viewer access privileges on page 107 Power Users IP Set Registration DATAAdmins VoiceAdmins Alarm Viewer VoiceMail and Contact Center IP Set Registration access privileges on page 102 DATA Admins group access privileges on page 104 Voice Admins access privileges on page 105 Alarm Viewer access privileges on page 107 Voice Mail amp Conta
182. ces _ Network intertaces lelephony bata Services UserID nnadmin Applications Password xxeexaneeaaanenetaee Telset user ID Telset password srxaaaannanananeaee Last successful login 2006 06 12 13 23 51 v Account Management ocal Authenticatior Exclusive access Enable Exclusive Access Disable Exclusive Access 4 w Exclusive access time remaining sec 0 ast M0 po 3 L_ws Vv Include ACKed alarms Table 24 describes each field on the Current Account context panel Table 24 Current Account fields Telset user ID read only Attribute Value Description Account Notifications read only This field displays account notifications such as notifications of password expiries User ID read only A read only field that can only be changed on the user accounts panel by a user with administrator privileges Password alphanumeric Requires a password entry that contains all the security requirements Refer to Complexity Level Element Manager on page 82 Note Changes to the password take effect at the next login A read only field and can only be changed on the user accounts panel by a user with administrator privileges Telset password numeric Requires a numeric password entry that is unique for each user These strings must satisfy the security requirements Refer to Complexity Level Telset on page 82 Note This password takes effect at the next login Last Successful log
183. ces any older versions of BCM Monitor already installed on your computer 8 Once the BCM50 Element Manager is installed find the BCMEM exe icon where you installed it Nortel recommends that you use the default location The default installation location is C Program Files Nortel BCMS50 BCMElementManager bin Double click on the BCMEM exe icon to launch the Element Manager 9 When the initial Element Manager window appears take some time to orient yourself with the various parts of the basic display Refer to Element Manager window attributes on page 42 10 Next steps e If the BCMS50 you want to connect to is installed and has been booted up both LEDs should be solid green connect your computer to either the craftsperson OAM port on the BCM50 or to the IP network that connects to the BCM50 BCM50 Administration Guide 38 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment e Set up the BCM50 as a device in the Network Elements tree See Adding a BCMS0 to the Network Element tree on page 39 for information Installing Element Manager in a Citrix environment You can run Element Manager in a Citrix environment using the following software e Windows 2000 Server SP4 fully patched e Citrix Metaframe XP Feature Release 3 e Citrix Program Neighborhood Version 7 0 When you run Element Manager in a Citrix environment the Element Manager is installed on a Citrix server Users then run Citrix Program Neighborhood to connect to t
184. ces that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a backup at a time when the system is typically not in use Caution The backup operation takes longer on a system with many saved voice messages As a result the backup archive can be quite large and can take 30 minutes or more to reach a remote server depending on your network speed The BCM50 can accommodate a backup archive that is greater than 500 MB To minimize the size of the backup archive exclude the optional components from the backup operation The BCM50 will compress sections of the backup archive when it is effective to do so Note To manage your Voicemail options you must use the CallPilot Manager and not the Element Manager BCM50 backup file When you perform a backup operation the BCMS0 creates a backup archive and stores it in a location that you specify The archive file includes embedded archives each of which represent a different part of the BCM50 system e archive sig ensures the integrity of all the data in the archive e various archive files various archive files that contain the configuration settings and operating data In addition to the configuration and application information every backup operation includes the following files e Software Inventory provides a snapshot of the software component release level e Software History provides a snapshot of the software history These fi
185. cheduled Software Update table Viewing a history of software updates Using the Software Update History panel you can view the history of all software updates including software upgrades that have been applied to the BCM50 since the it was shipped You can view the current software release level of the BCM50 view a history of all software updates including upgrades applied to the BCM50 view release notes that apply to a particular software update remove certain software updates from the BCM50 Table 104 lists the information displayed in the Software Update History table Table 104 Information displayed in the Software Update History table Columns Description Date The date and time that the software update was applied Category The software update category Scheduled Removed Modified Applied Name The name of the software update Version The version of the software update Description A brief description of the software update Removeable Indicates whether the software update can be removed from the BCM50 If it can be removed the check box is checked To view the software update history 1 In the task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Software Management folder and then click the Software Update History task The Software Update History panel opens BCM50 Administration Guide 338 Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates 3 View the updates in the So
186. ck the BCM50 MIB link The Software Detail Information page opens Right click the BCM50 MIB link and select Save Target As The File Download dialog box opens BCM50 Administration Guide 346 Appendix A Management Information Bases 10 In the Save As dialog box select the file or folder in which you want to save the MIB zip file and then click the Save button The MIB zip file is saved to your personal computer Compiling and installing Nortel MIB files Note Small Site MIBs have definitions for the binding values of the BCM50 SNMP traps For more information see Table 110 in this section Complete the compilation procedure in the following order a SmallSite mib b SmallSiteEvents mib Compiling and installing standard MIB files Complete the compilation procedure in the following order a rfc1213 mib rfc2261 mib rfc2737 mib rfc2790 mib rfc2863 mib oa oa dt Note BCM50 files are created and released in a MicroSoft Windows environment so that when these files are copied and transferred to a UNIX environment the last carriage return can be deleted In this case you can get an END is not found error message during the compilation Open the MIB file with a UNIX text editor and add a carriage return at the end of the word END Small Site MIB The device sysObjectIDs are defined in the BCM Small Site MIB The sysObjectIDs are defined for the BCM50 main unit Table 108 summarizes the sys
187. ckup archives to an SFTP server This method encrypts the login credentials and the data in transit You must set up the remote SFTP server to allow the BCM50 to communicate with the SFTP server The BCM50 system can generate an SSH pubiic key which you must install on the remote SFTP server For information about SSH keys see the chapter BCM50 Security NN40020 600 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 275 For more information about how to access and use the storage locations see BCM50 common file input output processes on page 69 Before you back up BCM50 data make sure that the BCMS0 has appropriate access to the shared resource on which you will store the data You must set full access permissions on the shared resource Performing immediate backups You can perform immediate backups to the following storage locations BCMS50 client PC network folder USB storage device FTP server SFTP sever Performing an immediate backup to the BCM50 S Caution A backup operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever the backup will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a backup that does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a backup at a time when the system is typically not in use To perform an immediate backup to the BCM50 In the task panel click the
188. crease the amount of system access you can delete groups and reassign groups with lower access privileges to the user account The administrator performing maintenance tasks can lock the system during the duration of the maintenance Any user already logged in remains logged in but would not be able to log in again until the Exclusive Access timer runs out Accounts and Privileges panel This section describes the tabs and fields available on the Accounts and priveleges panel Current Account The Current Account context panel provides a summary of user information about the person currently signed into the Element Manager BCM50 Administration Guide 112 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges Figure 21 Accounts and Privileges Current Account panel Nortel BEM 4 0 Element Manager E xj File View Network Session Tools Help wo Exit Disconnect r Refresh g Auto refresh Element Navigation Panel Task Navigation Panel Accounts and Privileges s vori ements 7 7 Configuration Administration ey New Folder Current Account view by Accounts View by Groups Sy New Folder i renamed tolder system Cs 12 Be 2a 24 Current Account re 192 166 249 2 Account Notifications JARNING Your telset password must be changed ARNING The following account passwords must be Resources Application Resources changed p eMedia tomer umeric ID 738662 _ Fort Ranges _ elephony Resour
189. csesresuntri kidi KARESE AE NARED LARRE eepeeeRs 157 Chapter 8 Using the BCM50 Service Management System 000 5 215 Overview of the BCM50 service management system 0000eeaee 215 PONDO SONICES cu cctaunrenceceataunoeehacueeadouuseRbedes ENARE SEAE 215 Starting stopping and restarting services 0 00 cece eee 218 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics 0 20 cece eee eee 219 About ihe system StAtUs dics ccacsnnaeeesh eee ses denen grderent sennke rod 219 Ops MONI 23422 c0rseedentaassoeutorebenadec idee a 219 I AN onire piei amp Rese Khaled ose Neon ae nva tafe e sees cape bandon oo 223 NE MeUIES tune ciGece eee Heated AE E EE TEAT ETT 225 Telephony WEES 2h5s dene Sebi tee eERS SL edb eee SRT ENHRS ERR SERRE 227 NN40020 600 Contents 11 Ti ROWNO WRUICE ccos cc eci eee tee Ge es ened oehee fuses eee gee 227 Viewing Performance History information 0000 c ee eee eee 229 Viewing D Channel information 00 cece eee 229 Disabling or enabling a B channel setting 0 00 eee eee eee 229 Provisioning a PRI B channel sscsceeis teres eer ee eeneteeienaae dees 229 Trunk Module CSU Stanette oi cs 2eddauceoeeene ies boners e a bere ses 230 Enabling the intemal CSU 2045 sceeks woe ted ee der oeaedeeuanecedes ee ee 231 Checking trunk module alarms 00 000 ccc eae 232 GOG MN MICS seriositet rinia wanes EEEE CASE Oa AES eae hs eRe ees 233 Hunt
190. ct Center access privileges on page 101 NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 101 Table 22 Default user account groups Continued Group Name Privileges Notes Backup Operators Security Security access privileges on page 102 BackupOperators Backup Operators access privileges on page 106 Security Security Security access privileges on page 102 AdminDownload Admin Download access privileges on page 103 Alarm Viewer Alarm Viewer access privileges on page 107 Diagnostic Logs Diagnostic Logs access privileges on page 107 Operational Logs Operational Logs access privileges on page 107 Admin Download AdminDownload Admin Download access privileges on page 103 Guest Download GuestDownload Can access the BCM web page for application downloads and user documentation Guest Download access privileges on page 103 Remote Monitoring Remote Monitor Remote Monitoring access privileges on page 106 Alarm Viewer Alarm Viewer access privileges on page 107 Operational Logs Operational Logs access privileges on page 107 Default access privileges excluding set based privileges The group privileges further refine access availability to groups and users You can assign more than one privilege to a group and more than one group to a user account The group with the most privileges defines what the user can access For instance the Admin group has all privileges therefore if this group is assig
191. ction Required Yes No No T0214 Warning Service Manager Service Manager Media Path Server mps has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped This will affect all IP Telephony No Action Required Yes No No Warning Service Manager Service Manager Media Gateway Server mgs has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped This will affect all IP Telephony No Action Required Yes No No BCM50 Administration Guide 184 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 207 T0216 Warning Service Manager Service Manager Persistent Data Repository Pdrd has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped This will affect any management done to running services No Action Required es INO No Warning Service Manager Service Manager Keycode Service cfsserver has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped This will affect the lability to enter any
192. ction Required Yes INO INO 0 Time Time has been updated by CoreTel 85 6004 critical Date and Date and Time Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Time Time service support group initialization failed 86 6007 minor Date and Date and Time Confrim the date Yes No INO Time Time adjustment time is correct on the detected which is system larger than provisioned 87 6008 minor Date and Date and Time Confirm the NTP Yes No No 0 Time NTP client unable to server is available contact server ion the network NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 169 88 POTO critical Date and Date and Time Don t reboot the es es es es Time Real time clock on system and contact system not working lyour local support properly group B9 B00T critical Modem Call Modem Call Control Reboot system and Yes Yes Yes Yes Control MCC stopped contact your local unexpectedly support group 90 critical Modem Call Modem Call Control Reboot system and Yes Yes es Yes Control MCC Failed to contact your local Register with Voice support group CTI 9T B003 Warning Modem Call Modem Call Control Contact your local Yes No No o Control MCC cannot load support group modem to DSP error 92 critical Modem Call Modem Call Control Reboot system and Yes Yes es Yes Control MCC modem contact your local emulator failed to support group start 93 B0
193. d es INO No TOST4 Information Service Manager Service Manager Media Path Server mps has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No Information Service Manager Service Manager Media Gateway Server mgs has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No Information Service Manager Service Manager Persistent Data Repository Pdrd has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No Information Service Manager Service Manager Keycode Service cfsserver has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No Information Service Manager Service Manager Time Service tmwservice has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No Information Service Manager Service Manager Platform Status Monitor psm has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No Information Service Manager Manager Service Manager Web Server httpd has been successfully restarted On Box Management Framework owcimomd has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No 245 T0321 Information Service Service Manager No Action Required Yes VO INO INO Information Service Manager Service Manager Service Manager monit has been successfully restarted No Action Re
194. d the Transfer Complete window opens Click the OK button The log file is saved as a tar file in the location you specified BCM50 Administration Guide 310 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs Performing scheduled log transfers You can schedule a log transfer for a future date or for a single transfer or for recurring future transfers You can create multiple schedule entries For example you can transfer Operational logs and System Information logs on a daily basis and transfer Diagnostic and Sensitive Information logs on a weekly basis You can also modify or delete a scheduled log transfer Table 93 lists the information that is displayed in the Scheduled Log Transfer table Table 93 Information displayed in the Scheduled Log Transfer table Column Description Memo Displays the description of the scheduled log transfer Destination Displays the storage location for the log transfer Schedule Displays the date and time at which the log transfer will be transferred to the specified storage location For information about how to configure transfer to attributes see the procedures in Performing immediate log archive transfers on page 304 Note You cannot schedule a log transfer to your personal computer Use a network folder a USB storage device an FTP server or an SFTP server instead To perform a scheduled log transfer to a storage location 1 Click the Administration tab and
195. d check box When checked specifies that the account will expire at a expiry specified time Days before up to 256 Enter the number of days the a password can remain valid password expire before it must be changed Warning days before Enter the number of days prior to password expiry that a user password expire will receive notification Password History Enable password checkbox When checked the BCM stores a list of previously used passwords and prevents users from re using them Password history length numeric value Enter the number of previously used passwords to be stored and checked for this account to prevent password re use Authentication Service Policy tab NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 79 Table 17 Security Policies fields Continued Attribute Value Description Account drop down menu Specifies the method used for authenticating users when they management log in Options are Local Authentication and RADIUS If RADIUS is selected you must also select the Enabled check box Server priority Primary Secondary Specifies which RADIUS server will be used as the primary server for authentication and which server will be used as a secondary server to authenticate users when the primary server is unavailable Server name alphanumeric Name of the RADIUS server Server IP address lt IP address gt IP address of th
196. d group modem Service Manager is attempting to restart the service T32 TOOT Critical Service Service Manager Check for es Yes es Yes Manager System Set Based corresponding alarm Admin Feature9 8 10110 or 10310 If ssba has stopped service doesn t unexpectedly restart then reboot Service Manager is system and contact attempting to restart your local support the service roup T33 TOOTT critical Service Service Manager Check for Yes Yes es Yes Manager Computer corresponding alarm Telephony Service 10111 or 10311 If Cte has stopped service doesn t unexpectedly This restart then reboot will affect LAN CTE System and contact land the Line Monitor your local support in BCM Monitor group Service Manager is attempting to restart the service NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 173 M34 T00T2 Critical Service Service Manager Check for es es es es Manager Line Monitor Service corresponding alarm Ims has stopped 10112 or 10312 If unexpectedly This service doesn t mill affect the Line irestart then reboot Service Manager system and contact Monitor in BCM your local support Monitor Service group Manager is attempting to restart the service T35 TOOTS critical Service Service Manager Check for es Yes es Yes Manager Media Services corresponding alarm Manager Msm has 10113 or 10313 If stopped service doesn t unexpectedly This r
197. d maximum values Click the value on the BCM Monitor panel for which you want to view the minimum or maximum value The current Cur minimum Min and maximum Max values appear on the Status bar at the bottom of the panel BCM50 Administration Guide 264 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities The three values remain on the Status bar until you select another value These values also continue to change as the value for the selected statistic changes This is useful if you want to monitor a single statistic on one panel while you are viewing the information on another panel Viewing the date and time of minimum and maximum values When BCM Monitor stores the minimum and maximum value it also stores the date and time when the minimum or maximum occur To view the date and time of minimum and maximum values 1 Select the value for which you want to view the minimum or maximum value 2 From the Statistics menu select Show Min Max Times A dialog box appears with the date and time when the minimum and maximum values occurred Min Max Occurrence Times i Signaling channels Minimum Yalue Occurrence Date Occurrence Time Maximum Yalue 22 Fri Nov 19 2004 03 11 57 PM 22 Occurrence Date Occurrence Time Fri Nov 19 2004 03 11 57 PM 3 Click the OK button to close the dialog box Resetting minimum and maximum values When you reset the minimum and maximum values the current minimum
198. date as part of the file name This will simplify the task of locating the tar file later For example you may wish to save the tar file as Log_acme20050315 tar Performing immediate log archive transfers The time required to transfer log files varies with the amount of log data being collected and the speed of your devices and network Performing an immediate log transfer to a USB storage device Before you transfer a log from a USB storage device make sure that e the USB storage device is formatted as a FAT32 device attach the USB storage device to a computer with a recent MS Windows operating system installed right click the USB storage device icon and format the device to File System of FAT32 e the USB storage device is connected to the BCM50 e the capacity of the storage device is sufficient for the log archive Note The log archive is saved in the top level directory You cannot navigate a folder hierarchy on the USB device NN40020 600 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs 305 Note Log archives written to external devices except My Computer have a unique name based on the timestamp This prevents earlier log archives from being overwritten A device will eventually reach its capacity if log archives are not manually detected To perform an immediate log transfer to a USB storage device Click the Administration tab and then open the Logs folder 2 Click the Log Management task The Log Mana
199. dem Call Control Contact your local Yes No No 0 Control MCC Cannot support group Unload the Modem DSP Task CTI Return Code ld Mos BOT7 Warning Modem Cal Modem Call Control Contact your local Yes No No No Control MCC Failed to support group Answer Incoming Call CTI Return Code ld BCM50 Administration Guide 170 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 1048018 information Modem Call Modem Call Control No Action Required Yes INO INO Control MCC Incoming Call on Busy Modem s 105 B019 information Modem Call Modem Call Control No Action Required Yes No No Control MCC Attempt to Connect to a Disabled Modem s T06 B020 Warning Modem Call Modem Call Control Contact your local Yes No No Control MCC Failed to support group Register for CLID ANI Service CTI Return Code ld T07 B021 information Modem Call Modem Call Control No Action Required Yes No No Control MCC Modem Connected s T08 B022 information Modem Call Modem Call Control No Action Required Yes No No Control MCC Modem is Disconnected T09 B023 information Modem Call Modem Call Control No Action Required Yes No No Control MCC Modem Enabled TTO information Modem Call Modem Call Control No Action Required Yes INO INO Control MCC Modem Disabled TTT Warning Modem Call Modem Call Control Contact your locat Yes No No Control MCC Failed to Get support group Swi
200. destinations Service Manager Start stop or restart Services only use this feature when directed by Nortel Networks support as improper use can affect system operation Hardware Inventory Manage general information for attached BCM50 systems and devices System Status QoS Monitor Manage Quality of Service monitor modes logging and mean opinion scores UPS Status Manage uninterrupted power supply status events and metrics NTP Metrics Manage network time protocol metrics synchronization details Telephony Metrics NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 51 Table 6 Administration task navigation panel headings Continued Trunk Module Metrics Run loopback test on trunk modules CbC Limit Metrics View Call by Call logs of denied calls Hunt Group Metrics Reset metrics by hunt group PSTN Fallback Metrics Reset PSTN fallback metrics PVQM View voice quality metrics Utilities BCM Monitor Launch BCM Monitor Ping Send an ICMP packet to the selected switch to see if it is reachable on the network Trace Route Perform a trace route to specified IP address Ethernet Activity View Ethernet activity on ports Reset Perform a reboot of BCM50 or either a warm or cold reset of telephony services or router Diagnostic Settings Set release reasons for ISDN or VoIP calls Backup and Restore Backup Perform immediate or scheduled bac
201. disable SNMP traps for alarms on page 156 Configuring alarm settings Although the BCM system provides a default mapping of alarms that are displayed in the Alarms table and that are sent as an SNMP trap you may want to monitor additional alarms using either of these means or you may want to reduce the number of alarms that are displayed in the Alarms table or sent via SNMP traps You can specify how each alarm is handled according to your business requirements You can specify the following settings for alarms BCM50 Administration Guide 156 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System the maximum number of alarms to display in the Alarms Panel from 50 to 400 whether to enable or disable SNMP traps for selected alarms by default all Critical and Major alarms are sent as SNMP traps if you have specified one or more trap destinations whether to display selected alarms in the Alarms table by default all Critical Major Minor and Warning alarms are displayed in the Alarms table whether to display selected alarms on the alarm set by default only core telephony Critical and Major alarms are sent to this set You can also test a selected alarm This allows you to test whether the LED or SNMP traps are functioning as expected Testing an alarm generates an alarm in the system Alarms generated using the Test Alarm feature are identified in the Alarms table by the words Test Event in the alarm Problem Description fi
202. dress or any e Destination address Router s WAN IP Address e Service Type SNMP TCP UDP 163 e Action forward The second rule allow WAN to LAN communication e Source address Management station s IP Address or any e Destination address BCM50 LAN IP Address This is the IP Address listed in Element Manager under System IP Subsystem General Settings e Service Type SNMP TCP UDP 161 e Action forward Adding NAT rules In the NAT section of the router configuration create a rule with the following settings e Start port 161 e End port 161 NN40020 600 Chapter 6 Managing BCM50 with SNMP 135 e Server IP address The BCM50 LAN IP address This rule means that all TCP IP traffic to port 161 which is the BCM50 s SNMP agent port will be forwarded to the BCM50 for processing Configuring the SNMP router port By default both the BCM50 and the BCM50 router attempt to use port 161 for SNMP This causes a conflict In the router configuration access the Remote Management section and the SNMP tab to change this Change the communities to public and set the SNMP Service Port to163 If the trap needs to be enabled set it to the SNMP management station IP address Otherwise set it to public The SNMP management station can now connect to the BCM50 LAN through port 161 and to the router through port 163 Connecting through the LAN An SNMP management station that is configured on the LA
203. e select or clear the check box for each component to include or exclude these components from the backup operation Click the OK button A warning window opens Read the warning carefully before proceeding Click the Yes button to proceed A progress window opens When the backup preparation is complete the Backup Complete message displays Click the OK button Performing an immediate backup to an SFTP server Caution A backup operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever the backup will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a backup that does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a backup at a time when the system is typically not in use To perform an immediate backup to an SFTP server In the task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Backup The Backup panel opens and displays the Immediate Backup tab In the Backup To selection field select SETP Server Configure the SFTP Server attributes Table 75 Configure SFTP Server attributes Attribute Action SFTP Server Enter the hostname or IP address of the SFTP server NN40020 600 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 281 Table 75 Configure SFTP Server attributes Attribute Action User Name Enter the user name associated with the SF
204. e Alarm from any DTM Indication long term modules to the alarm threshold has external network and been exceeded on Irun loopback tests the DTM ion the circuit to check for network issues Get your network provider to check the circuit during problem conditions Ts 50 critical Core Core Telephony A Power down the Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony digital station system and check all module has been connections to the disconnected expansion chassis containing the digital station module If the problem persists replace the module M9 61 Critical Core Core Telephony A Powerdownthe Yes Nes Yes Yes Telephony trunk media bay system and check all module has been connections to the disconnected expansion chassis containing the digital lor analog trunk module If the problem persists replace the module 20 52 critical Core Core Telephony A Power down the Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony __ trunk media bay system and check all module has been connections to the disconnected expansion chassis containing the digital lor analog trunk module If the problem persists replace the module 21 4 warning Core Core Telephony No Action Required Yes No No Telephony Media Bay Module firmware download started 22 55 warning Core Core Telephony No Action Required Yes No No Telephony Media Bay Module firmware download complete 23 6T critical Core Core Telephony A Check that the Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony trunk media bay correc
205. e BCM Monitor page opens Click the Download BCM Monitor link Enter the System Administrator user name and password and then click the OK button Select a folder where you want to store the BCM Monitor install file and then click the Save button or click the Run button to run the install file directly from the web page If you selected Save in step 5 go to the folder where you saved the BCM Monitor install file and then double click the BCMMonitor exe icon Follow the instructions on the installation wizard To remove BCM Monitor a fF OO N In Windows click the Start button Select Control Panel Double click the Add or Remove Programs icon Select BCM Monitor and then click the Change Remove button Follow the on panel removal instructions Connecting to a BCM50 system For security reasons the user on the computer on which the BCM Monitor runs must be authenticated by the BCM50 system NN40020 600 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities 247 To start BCM Monitor without the Element Manager 1 Double click the BCM Monitor shortcut on your desktop or find BCM Monitor in your Start Programs menu The Enter Logon Information window opens 2 Inthe System Name or IP Address field enter the system name of the BCMS50 you want to monitor In the Connect As field enter your BCM50 user name In the Password field enter the password associated with your BCMS0 user name Click the Connect button The BCM Monitor panel
206. e Ea En EEE e OF r e EE 28 LAN oien tees a a e Sed eho PR Dead eee eae se 28 WAM ceuanieieeddeetageteunserudes toons ease sGReederh Pekpemeene 29 POS 5 na aka op aes Heese EOE EGRESS ORES SOLER E ASE Se ERS lt 29 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 6 00 cee eee eee eee eee 31 BONDO WED PAGE cxtauseeycacea nukia r Rakne EO de aGHeoer knee enganes 31 BCM50 Management Environment and Applications 0 00000 33 Managing BCM50 with Element Manager 0020 cece e arenes 33 Managing BCM50 with Telset administration 0000 eee eaee 34 Managing BCM50 Voicemail and ContactCenter CallPilot Manager 34 Managing Digital NOON 126 emiasdatdaeeee haeeedeud seat HaRERd Mame 34 Programming telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio 34 Performing initialization Startup Profile 000 cee eee aee 35 Monitoring BCMS0 BOM MONG csieccetovcetareaateene tea ee eeeaaed es 35 Managing BCM50 remotely with SNMP 0000 cece eee eee 35 Elomon MAGNO xeon ites aed chee aes eee RA eet eee A 36 Element Manager setup 00 eee eee eee 36 Element Manager window attributes 0 0 00 c eee eee 42 Element Manager DANES cicicrewddiwebselGser es heiaedeiwsnteens geen d 51 Effective use of Element Manager 2 0 0 eee eee ee 52 BCM50 Administration Guide 8 Contents Element Manager data features snc c ceed enaees ee de dae Ee SRE GR e
207. e RADIUS server Server Port numeric Port number of the RADIUS server Enabled checkbox When selected specifies that RADIUS authentication will be used You must also select this check box before the BCM will use RADIUS authentication Configuration Server shared secret alphanumeric Key required for the BCM to communicate with the RADIUS server Nortel recommends that the key be at least 64 characters in length Server message numeric Length of time to wait for the server to respond to a request for timeout authentication before timing out Nortel recommends a setting of 2 Server retries numeric Number of times to retry connecting with the primary server before using an alternate means of authenticating the user Nortel recommends a setting of 2 Statistics Last used read only The date and time of the last attempted connection with the RADIUS server Access accept read only The number of Access Accept messages exchanged between the RADIUS server and the BCM50 Access reject read only The number of Access Reject messages exchanged between the RADIUS server and the BCM50 No response read only The number of No Response messages exchanged between the RADIUS server and the BCM50 Session Management Policy tab Session time out minutes Specifies the number of minutes a logged in user account can min be inactive before the system ends the session and logs out the accoun
208. e System data traffic e Add features with keycodes Configuration amp administration Manageable Systems amp Endpoints User access Threshold settings Keycodes BCM50 enterprise network model on page 28 shows an example BCMS0 enterprise network illustrating the various communications between the BCM50 end devices and management applications managing end devices The diagram also shows that the physical enterprise network conceptually is segmented into domains The Network Operations Center NOC domain represents the tools equipment and activities used to analyze and maintain the operation of a network of BCM50 devices Element Manager and Network Configuration Manager are the management applications which allow the network administrators working in the NOC domain to perform the administrative functions The management application workstations can be physically distributed across different enterprise sites if they are networked via an IP network as represented by the cloud in the middle of the figure The BCM network domain represents one or more BCM50s located a different sites in the network connected through an enterprise LAN to one or more management application workstations The WAN represents an adjacent network external to the LAN The VoIP and Wireless VoIP domains represent terminating IP devices BCM50 Administration Guide 28 Chapter 2 Overview of BCM50 Administration Figure 2 BCM50 en
209. e a service interruption If you want to perform a restore operation that does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a restore operation at a time when the system is typically not in use To restore data from an SFTP server 1 Inthe task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Restore The Restore panel opens 3 Inthe Restore From selection field select SFTP Server Configure the Restore from SFTP Server attributes Table 88 Configure Restore from SFTP Server attributes Attribute Action SFTP server Enter the hostname or IP address of the SFTP server User Name Enter the user name associated with the SFTP server Password Enter the password associated with the SFTP server Directory Enter the path to the subdirectory as applicable File Enter the name of the backup file A window opens and displays information about the backup file including a warning that the selected backup file will replace the backup file currently stored on the BCM Caution When you proceed to the next step the selected file will overwrite the backup file that is stored on the BCM50 Ensure that the correct backup file is selected before proceeding 5 Click the Open button The Select Components to Restore window opens 6 Select the optional components that you want to
210. e details about the manufacturer and the manufacture date e hardware version details serial number details You require this information only when a field issue requires the identification of certain systems NN40020 600 Chapter 5 Using the BCM50 Hardware Inventory 131 Table 37 lists the fields displayed in the Additional Information tab Items marked as read only are detected by the BCM For items that are not auto detected the Element Manager provides checkboxes pull down menus and fields that the administrator can populate to indicated that these resources are present Note Asterisk items can also be remotely queried by SNMP using the Entity MIB Table 37 Additional BCM50 main unit Information fields Field Name Read Write Manufacturer Read Manufacture date Read Manufacturing information Read Hardware version Read Serial number 1 Read Serial number 2 Read Serial number 3 Read Serial number 4 Read BCM50 Administration Guide 132 Chapter 5 Using the BCM50 Hardware Inventory Figure 25 Hardware Inventory Additional Information tab z H BCM Element Manager 192 168 249 130 Oj x File Edit View Wetwork Session Tools Help P Exit Element Havigation Panel 4 Task Navigation Panel Y 3 Paste x Cut Copy eB a Web Page Vv Validate Device Seen amp Refresh g Auto retresti Hardware Inventory Configuration Administrati
211. e for each active session IP Endpoint A IP Trunk X lt stream info gt IP Trunk Y IP Endpoint B Codec FPP Details NN40020 600 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities 257 The IP Endpoint tokens contain information about each IP endpoint type DN IP address RTP port number The IP Trunk tokens contain information about the IP Trunk used by each endpoint if no trunk is used the token is omitted The stream info token shows which RTP streams are enabled between the two endpoints The Codec token describes the codec type used for the RTP session The FPP shows the negotiated value of frames per packet The Details token shows additional information about the RTP session BCM Monitor can display real time RTP session statistics for sessions that involve at least one media gateway These statistics include information about duration of the session the number of bytes and packets sent or received per second and per session These statistics are useful for troubleshooting packet loss or routing problems For information about statistics see Using statistical values on page 263 f BCM Monitor BCM40027 E 10 x File Statistics Help BCM Info Media Card Voice Ports IP Devices L uIP Line Monitor Usage Indicators m Local IP Endpoints RTP Session Details IP to IP Laity TDM to IP Swe TDM toTDM 0 Est bandwidth 0 bps m Local to Remote IP Endpoint IP to IP Se I TDMP Oo Est bandwidth
212. e in the Network Element tree to which there is currently no active Element Manager connection a panel is shown with a number of fields relevant to the selected device Some of this information does not appear until you have successfully connected to the element with Element Manager Figure 4 on page 47 shows the right hand panel in Element Manager when an unconnected network element is selected The fields on this panel are described in Table 4 NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 47 Figure 4 Information display for unconnected network element i x File View Network Session Tools Help p Exit gome j Mew Folder Sr Delete Element Navigation Panel IP Address 192 168 249 27 UserID nnacmin Password exxxxxxxae Inventory Information System Name BcmM40 System Description BcmM400 System Software Version 1 00 0 29 Table 4 Unconnected network element information Field Description IP Address The IP address of the selected device Read Write Community String The current community string for the selected device shown if SNMP is enabled User Name Name of an authorized BCM50 user account Password A valid password associated to the User Name Information displayed for connected elements BCM Element Manager displays two panels to the right of the Network Elements navigation panel once a BCMSO element has been connected e Task Navigation panel e Informat
213. e to determine which data repository solution matches your priorities For example if security is a primary concern for you consider setting up an SFTP or HTTPS server If you are looking for a data repository solution that is easy to implement the BCM50 a personal computer and a USB drive are all relatively easy to set up Table 12 Comparison of data repository solutions Task Data Repository Ease of Use Speed Security BCM50 H H M Personal computer H L M H M Network folder M L M H M USB H H L FTP M M L SFTP L L H HTTP HTTPS L M L H The following sections contain information to help you choose the best data repository solution for your environment and provide tips for implementation NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 71 The BCM50 Transferring information on the BCM50 is quick and easy but does not protect your data in the event of damage to the BCMS0 It makes an ideal solution in small environments where the BCM50 is the only computer on site and where no network resources are available Personal computer Storing information on a personal computer is a safe option either for short term storage or for environments where only one computer is used to access Element Manager The speed of transferring information to or from a personal computer is based on the speed of the network Similarly the security of the transfer is based on the security of the network While
214. ead only ADMIN System Status Qos Monitor ADMIN System Status UPS Metrics as read only M ADMIN System Status NTP Metrics as read only DMIN Telephone Metrics all M ADMIN Utilities BCM Monitor Z lt gt E E E E E E E E E Web Documentation User Documentation Web User Applications Software Upgrade access privileges EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User EM ADMIN Utilities Reboot EM ADMIN Software Management all Web Documentation User Documentation Web User Applications NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 107 Alarm Viewer access privileges e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User e EM ADMIN General Alarm e EM ADMIN General Alarm Setting e EM ADMIN General Inventory e Web Documentation User Documentation e Web User Applications Operational Logs access privileges e Web Documentation User Documentation e EM ADMIN Log Management Operational Logs e Web User Applications Diagnostic Logs access privileges e Web Documentation User Documentation e EM ADMIN Log Management Diagnostic Logs e Web User Applications Network IPSec access privileges e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User e RAS Application IPSec Modem dial out access privileges e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User e Web Documentation User Docum
215. ecording System Administration Guide NN40020 605 The Call Detail Recording System Administration Guide covers the following topics e setting up the system so that the information you want to collect is written to the Call Detail Record e configuring CDR data file management and transfer e installing and using the CDR Client for real time monitoring of CDR records You can configure the BCM50 to create a new CDR file on a daily weekly or monthly basis or when the file reaches a specified size You can retrieve CDR files by configuring the BCM50 to send push the files to a remote system or by using a toolkit application to retrieve pull the files from a remote system Note Two CallPilot reports are included in the data transfer when CDR data files are pulled or pushed from the BCM50 system These are the Call Pilot Mailbox activity report and the All Mailbox Activity Report CDR Toolkit A CDR Toolkit is provided with the BCM50 to enable third party developers to retrieve BCM50 Call Detail Record data files and integrate them into their applications NN40020 600 343 Appendix A Management Information Bases This appendix describes the Management Information Bases MIBs supported by the BCM50 A MIB is a virtual information store that contains a collection of objects that are managed using Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The MIB is software that defines the data reported b
216. ee OH S 52 Element Manager application logging 00 e ee eee eee eee 62 BCM50 integrated launch of related applications 000000 63 BCMSO feature IIGGNSING 220 c8cas seer ceeeb cabo ated daerecevebbneeeaees 65 BPCO MOP SVSIEM sersa eaa E ees teee eee eee beeeteebeneas ae es 66 eit Vet Ell jedicteeetae Hil eked pase baer esate aeaeerh meena aes 66 Figld level Help css accndeeei sbdey teeter anes eens dbev iced wegen waged 68 Cont xt sensitive Help 0 need Sie ened od ee wine eed kee de eee 68 BCM50 common file input output processes 00 c ec es 69 Comparison Gf data repositories ii4 kote a cee ee eee eee een eae Re io 70 Connecting to Element Manager through a router 0 00 c eee ee eee 73 Configuring firewall settings 0 0 00 c eee eee 73 Padna NAT TOSS 353 65 oooh Kb Ses WERE TS SR EERE SS SEES Re HERES 73 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 75 Security Policies panel 6500s aeeer eevee ardeat weg eee eee eG aT eee kau eees 75 Configuring system security policies n a anaana 80 Stag na ATE onda na EE TETT FTS TTET ETT 80 Local Authentication Polley tab 6 0ss cee ereeevenasyeeneneeteeese seeds 80 Authentication Service Policy tab 0 00 0 cece tee 80 Session Management Policy tab 0 000 e eee 81 Bol AM oor POUCY IA rras es bene eee dd ode badeaga dee sony baeeka sda 81 Setting system access control policies
217. ee heading tab heading or field heading of a connected BCMS0 device and pressing the F1 function key This help opens an HTML page containing overview information or panel descriptions specific to the selected heading Once the HTML help module opens it also provide links to tasks and other features related to the panel function Figure 19 on page 69 shows the HTML page opened when context sensitive help is selected NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 69 Figure 19 Context sensitive HTML page e Using the BCM Hardware Inventory Microsoft Internet Explorer Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Qm O A A A p er OO a JAB Address je C Program Files Nortel BCM 4 0 BCM40ElementManager Docs Help BCM40 wwhelp wwhimplijava html wwhelp htm z Go Links Google Search Web Pa Options MINUS Index Search Product Fundamentals Administration Administration a scm Management Environment g Using the BCM Service Management S Monitoring BCM Status and Metrics BCM Utilities Backing Up and Restoring BCM Data amp Managing BCM Logs Managing BCM Software Updates BCM Security Policies and Accounts and Managing BCM with SNMP Telset E Call_Detail_Recording Using the BCM Hardware Inventory This chapter describes how to use the BCM Hardware Inventory The Hardware Inventory task in the BCM Element Manager displays information about the BCM50 system includin
218. eeiteaqvianaaseaasaawecdeetsaxesbea 82 WBE AS I SING UY enari aaa thea vida vada doles ed eee 83 WU ae O otis saat cs eintnieaescanicaae iesees Aigdas sean asa dicisiuncannads ab Maleeeiieadouantees 83 To sotihe authentication MOTO 0 cicnssesescnnsieni tua mnnieys neat anita a 84 To configure an authentication server in Element Manager cceeesseeeeeeneeeeeeeeaes 84 TO Sotho Hle session WINS CAN cise eins eer avietiviudtairer edt neti ead ewienteiad mand 88 To Upload a Web Server Certificate sccisssssiacsoesssacniiaassenancasseneatienbecnasurei ncaa ciinnstadntieiine 88 Tetraneter an SSH Key Pai isteach cise iront eSEE nate 89 Toadda now Usor AIT nran 90 TO modiy a uo OCON a a aes 91 Ve add Rallback Ora diahip USET srini 92 To add Tolsotactoss Ora USOT auroro i 92 TO deke aus UI acc sc ecececeaencnn geen oensace steae deat gamba ica een seen pean danet ansnanaceatiaceee 93 To change a users Pass WON ecesna My eein edi ites Ree 93 TO Change the current Users PASS WONT a oucsdscccsipsdscanestsiadieaiaesadnduednada toast naenin 93 Too ALS Se GWE nN 94 eames ess gels meee te reer errerr eer meer eter etre a 94 TR modiy group Par TT as cet ss esas pts sag za ceeds BaeG kage EEN aca ede as ea 95 Toaddatsoraccount to a CNOU ccs tesasiccacisassiicabarasiegs iiiatnincs aa 95 To delete a user account fom A OUP vires masteansinssnermaacias iaateoa esi meeniiaiA 95 Torelease a locked OUl USO osisiinni adi 96 To enable or disable an account immediately
219. ejected call setup jare setup properly in attempt from DN the system If lt DN gt to DN lt DN gt problem persists use Kreason gt BCM monitor to trace an unsuccesful call and contact your local support group 675 61101 major VoIP VoIP Gateway The call has Yes Yes Yes Yes Gateway dropped connected dropped possibly call from DN lt DN gt due to incompatible to DN lt DN gt codecs network Kreason gt errors or protocol problems If problem persists contact your local support group 678 T1901 critical VoIP VoIP Gateway Contact your local _ Yes Yes es Yes Gateway serious system support group error 580 61903 Critical VoIP VoIP Gateway Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Gateway exception error support group 681 61904 critical VoIP VoIP Gateway Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Gateway exception error support group 582 62000 critical Media Path IMPS unable to Reboot system and Yes Yes es Yes Server allocate memory if problem persists MPS service contact your local aborted support group 583 52001 Critical Media Path IMPS unable to Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Server initialize MPSMI support group MPS service aborted 684 62002 critical Media Path IMPS unable to Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Server connect to MSM support group MPS service aborted NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 211
220. el opens 4 Click the Add button The Add Scheduled Backup window opens 5 Inthe Backup To selection field select FTP Server NN40020 600 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 287 6 Configure the FTP Server attributes Table 81 Configure FTP Server attributes Attribute Action FTP Server Enter the hostname or IP address of the FTP server User Name Enter the user name associated with the FTP server Directory Enter the path to the subdirectory optional 7 Click the OK button The Add Scheduled Backup window opens 8 Inthe Optional Components table select or clear the check box to include or exclude these components from the backup operation 9 Configure the schedule attributes Table 82 Configure schedule attributes Attribute Action Memo Enter a note for the scheduled backup as applicable Recurrence Select how often the scheduled backup is to occur Options are Once Daily Weekly Monthly Depending on the option you choose the window displays selections for the month and day of month If you select Weekly days of the week are displayed Select the check box for Daily to select the day Month Select the month in which the scheduled backup is to occur Day of Month Select the day of the month on which the scheduled backup is to occur Time Select the time at which the scheduled backup is to occur 10 Click the OK button The scheduled back
221. eld For information about using SNMP to monitor the BCM system see Chapter 6 Managing BCM5S0 with SNMP on page 135 To enable or disable SNMP traps for alarms 1 2 Click the Administration tab Open the General folder and then click the Alarm Settings task The Alarm Settings panel opens In the Alarms table select an alarm In the Enable SNMP Trap column select or clear the check box to enable or disable SNMP traps for the selected alarm If you select the check box for a selected alarm an SNMP trap will be generated if that particular alarm condition occurs To enable or disable viewing of selected alarms in the Alarms table 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Open the General folder and then click the Alarm Settings task The Alarm Settings panel opens 3 Inthe Alarms table select an alarm In the Enable GUI View column select or clear the check box to enable or disable a view of the selected alarm in the Alarms Panel If you clear the check box for a selected alarm the alarm will not be displayed in the Alarms table if that particular alarm condition occurs in the system To view settings for the alarm set Click the Administration tab Open the General folder and then click the Alarm Settings task The Alarm Settings panel opens In the Alarms table select an alarm NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 157 4 The Enable Alarm Set column indicates whether the
222. em No Action Required Yes No No Warning Service Manager Service Manager System Set Based Admin Feature9 8 ssba has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped No Action Required Yes No No Warning Service Manager Service Manager Computer Telephony Service Cte has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped This will affect LAN CTE and the Line Monitor in BCM Monitor No Action Required Yes No No NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 183 Warning Service Manager Service Manager Line Monitor Service Ims has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due toa dependency on another service that has been stopped This will affect the Line Monitor in BCM Monitor No Action Required es INO No Warning Service Manager Service Manager Media Services Manager Msm has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped This will affect all telephony operations on the system No A
223. em identifies the user You also define what privileges the user has by assigning the user to groups You can add delete or modify user account information from this panel When you add or modify a user you can enter a password for both the Element Manager interface and the telset interface Figure 22 Accounts and Privileges View by Accounts context panel 6 Nortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager lol x Fie view Network Session Tools Help A eat MA Disconnect Ay Refresh GP Auto retresh Element Navigation Panel 4 Task Navigation Panel Network Elements Hy Al Campbell 10 10 1141 20 20 20 68 47 565 237 35 47 135 163 150 192 122 24 17 192 122 24 22 192 122 24 23 192 122 24 24 192 122 24 25 Administration Configuration E Administrator Acct ants and Security Policie SNMP Resources Telephony Data Services Applications Accounts and Privileges Current Account View by Accounts View by Groups UserID TelsetUser ID Locked Out Locked Out Telset Disabled E E BTRemotelsdn nnadmin nnguest Details for Account General Remote Access History Group Membership r Callback Modem Callback Number Modem Callback Passcode BTRemotesan ISDN Callback Number O ISDN Callback Passcode ETRemoteisdn MIP Address BCMIP Address 19 197 225 193 NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Acc
224. em tab is divided into three areas e Main unit e BCMS50 system expansion e Other Information You can save inventory information to a file using the Programming Record See Saving programming records on page 58 Viewing and updating information about the BCM50 main unit You can view information about the BCM50 main unit such as the Nortel part number the System ID and other information See Table 33 Note Fields marked with an asterisk can also be remotely queried by SNMP using the Entity MIB Table 33 BCM50 main unit fields Field Name Field Description Field Value Read Write System An arbitrary string that uniquely Nortel BCM50 Communications Read identifies the Physical Element and Server serves as the Element s key Type The type of the physical entity Chassis Read Serial number The serial number to the BCM50 Nortel System Serial Number Read unit Nortel part number The Nortel part number used to NT lt XXXXXX gt Read order the system Model A textual description of the object example BCM50 Telephony Only Read System ID A unique string that identifies this System ID which is Mac 1 Read specific instance of the element System name A user friendly name for the object System name of the BCM50 Read Customer asset ID Customer defined tracking number Initially zero Write You can add or update the customer asset ID associated with the BCM5
225. emoving 338 Starting BCM Monitor 247 Static snapshot settings Configuring 249 Static snapshot Saving 250 Static snapshots About 249 Static snapshots configuring 249 Statistical values using 263 Symbols 19 System status analyzing 248 system timeout 79 T telset current user ID 112 current user password 112 disable login 76 minimum password length 77 minimum user ID length 77 password complexity 77 user ID 115 120 Timeout settings configuring 259 Timeout enabling or disabling 259 timeout user session 79 Trace Route 266 Trace Route performing 266 trademarks 2 Trap destinations adding 142 Trap destinations configuring 142 Trap destinations deleting 144 Trap destinations modifying 143 Trunk Modules Metrics See Metrics U IP Message details clearing 260 IP messages disabling monitoring 258 IP messages enabling monitoring 258 IP messages expanding 260 IP tab 257 IP logging data 259 i i a i u y UIP viewing log files 259 Unified Manager security considerations 122 UPS Metrics See Metrics Usage Indicators tab 262 user lockout duration 78 user account telset user ID 115 120 user ID 115 120 user accounts callback number 116 user ID current user 112 current user telset 112 last successful log in 112 user account 115 120 users account created 117 account modified 117 disable account 115 disable telset interface 76 enabled account expiry 116 failed login 117
226. eneral tab To remove privileges click on the Group Privileges tab select one or more group privileges to delete from the existing group and click Delete A confirmation dialog box appears click Yes to delete the selected items To add privileges click on the Group Privileges tab select one or more group privileges to add to the existing group and click the Add button See Default groups on page 99 and Default access privileges excluding set based privileges on page 101 for more information Click Yes on the confirmation box to remove the groups from the list Adding a user account to a group As an administrator you can add user accounts to one or more groups to satisfy access requirements To add a user account to a group 1 a A O N Select Configuration Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges and click the View by Accounts tab Select a user account and then click the Group Membership tab Click the Add button In the Add Account to Group dialog box select one or more groups Click OK Deleting a user account from a group As an administrator you can remove user accounts from a group to limit a user s access To delete a user account from a group 1 a A O N Select Configuration Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges and click the View by Accounts tab Select a user account and then click the Group Membership tab Select one or more groups on the Accounts in the Member of
227. ens In the Alarms Panel table select an alarm The Alarm Details panel displays below the Alarms table To change the order of columns in the Alarm table select a column and drag it left or right to the desired location and release it To view a column by ascending or descending order click the column heading To sort columns right click a column heading The Sort dialog box opens Sort columns as required and then click the OK button The columns in the Alarm table are sorted according to your specifications To acknowledge an alarm Click the Administration tab Open the General folder and then click the Alarms task The Alarms panel opens In the Alarms table select the alarm you want to acknowledge The Alarm Details panel is displayed below the Alarms table On the Alarms Details panel click the Acknowledge Alarm button A check box appears in the Alarm ACKed column in the Alarms table for this alarm Acknowledging the alarm does not clear the alarm it indicates only that the alarm has been noted Clearing the alarm log e Caution Clearing the alarm log clears the alarms in the Alarms Panel as well as from BCM memory Therefore alarms will no longer be available for viewing by any other BCM Element Manager clients connected to the BCM To view alarms access the Alarm log To clear the alarm log 1 2 Click the Administration tab Open the General folder and then click the Alarms task The
228. ens Read the warning carefully before proceeding 7 Click the Yes button to proceed A progress window opens When the backup is complete the Backup Complete message displays 8 Click the OK button Performing an immediate backup to an FTP server Caution A backup operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever the backup will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a backup that does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a backup at a time when the system is typically not in use To perform an immediate backup to an FTP server 1 Inthe task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Backup The Backup panel opens and displays the Immediate Backup tab 3 Inthe Backup To selection field select FTP Server BCM50 Administration Guide 280 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 4 Configure the FTP Server attributes Table 74 Configure FTP Server attributes Attribute Action FTP Server Enter the hostname or IP address of the FTP server User Name Enter the user name associated with the FTP server Password Enter the password associated with the FTP server Directory Enter the path to the subdirectory optional Click the Backup button The Backup window opens In the Optional Components tabl
229. entation e Web User Applications e PPP dial out via analog modem ISDN dial in access privileges e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User e Web Documentation User Documentation e Web User Applications e PPP dial in via ISDN BCM50 Administration Guide 108 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges ISDN dial out access privileges e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User e Web Documentation User Documentation e Web User Applications e PPP dial out via ISDN WAN dial in access privileges e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User e Web Documentation User Documentation e Web User Applications e PPP dial in via analog WAN WAN dial out access privileges e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User e Web Documentation User Documentation e Web User Applications e PPP dial out via WAN PPPoE dial in access privileges e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User e Web Documentation User Documentation e Web User Applications e PPP dial in via PPPoE PPPoE dial out access privileges e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User e Web Documentation User Documentation e Web User Applications e PPP dial out via PPPoE e EM configure basic parameters NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges Telset access security You can use the Telset administration interface FEATURE 9 8
230. entication In Group Created 424 information System System No Action Required Yes No No fo Authenticatio Authentication In Group member added 425 information System System No Action Required Yes No No O Authenticatio Authentication In Group member removed 426 information System System No Action Required Yes No No Authenticatio Authentication In Group Deleted 427 information System System No Action Required Yes No No Authenticatio Authentication In Group permissions modified BCM50 Administration Guide 200 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System find key code find component for feature ior enter keycodes is running properly land if problem persists contact your local support group 430 31006 Critical Keycodes Keycodes invalid Restore licensing fite Yes es es es license file lor enter keycodes lagain 431 critical Keycodes Keycodes Restore licensing file Yes Yes Yes Yes unknown license file or enter keycodes status again 432 warning Keycodes Keycodes failed to Ensure component Yes No No find component is running properly lt component land if problem handle gt perists contact your local support group 433 critical Keycodes Keycodes failed to Restore licensing file Yes Yes Yes Yes open file lor enter keycodes lagain 434 critical Keycodes Keycodes failed to Restore licensing file Yes Yes
231. ently selected line lt Shift gt lt Enter gt Moves forward through the list lt Carriage Return gt Selected field brings up the drop down box icon or the rotary list icon Check box selects or clears the check box Saving programming records You can create a programming file that contains the current settings of all or part of your Element Manager data These files can be saved in either HTML or Excel spreadsheet format You can access the programming record in the same way you access any other HTML file or by using Excel version 2002 or later for the spreadsheet format A programming record that contains the factory default settings is available in Excel format from the BCM web page NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 59 Figure 9 shows an example of a programming record saved in HTML format and Figure 10 on page 60 shows an example of a programming record saved in Excel spreadsheet format Figure 9 Programming record in HTML format Nortel Business Element Manager Report Type Report For Administration node for Device 192 168 249 130 Created on Thu Sep 14 14 10 07 EDT 2006 Administration e General e Alarms e Alarm Settings e SHMP Trap Destinations Service Manager Hardware Inventory e System Metrics e QoS Monitor UPS Metrics HTP Metrics Telephony Metrics Trunk Module Metrics CbC Limit Metrics Hunt Group Metrics PSTH Fallback Met
232. equired Yes No No fe Status Monitor Local Recovery alarm for Monitor Temperature corresponding recovered alarms 11209 and 11405 272 11012 Information Platform Platform Status No Action Required Yes No No fe Status Monitor Remote Recovery alarm for Monitor Temperature corresponding recovered alarms 11210 and 11406 273 11014 Information Platform Platform Status No Action Required Yes No No Status Monitor Fan Recovery alarm for Monitor recovered corresponding alarms 11212 and 11408 274 11015 Information Platform Platform Status No Action Required Yes INO INO 0 Status Monitor Router Recovery alarm for Monitor recovered corresponding alarm 11409 275 11016 Information Platform Platform Status No Action Required Yes No No Status Monitor OAM Port Recovery alarm for Monitor Link Up corresponding alarm 11214 276 11017 Information Platform Platform Status No Action Required Yes INO INO 0 Status Monitor Customer Recovery alarm for Monitor LAN Port 1 Link Up corresponding alarm 11215 2 77 11018 Information Platform Platform Status No Action Required Yes No No fe Status Monitor Customer Recovery alarm for Monitor LAN Port 2 Link Up corresponding alarm 11216 278 11019 Information Platform Platform Status No Action Required Yes INO INO 0 Status Monitor Customer Recovery alarm for Monitor LAN Port 3 Link Up corresponding alarm 11217 279 11200 minor Platform Platform Status Reboot system and
233. er is to occur Time Select the time at which the scheduled transfer is to occur Click the field to display a Time box where you can specify the hour minute second and whether the time occurs in morning or afternoon Close the box when you have finished specify the time 10 Click the OK button The scheduled log transfer is displayed in the Scheduled Log Transfer table Nortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager 192 168 249 27 File View Metwork Session Tools Help E Exit Element Navigation Panel 4 Task Navigation Panel oo g Refresh g 4uto refresh Log Management Configuration Administration Immediate Log Transfer Scheduled Log Transfer p eneral bs system status EH lelephony Metrics mHE Unies Destination Schedule jy BackUp and Restore Add Delete Scheduled Log Transfer To modify a scheduled log transfer 1 Click the Administration tab and then open the Logs folder 2 Click the Log Management task The Log Management panel opens BCM50 Administration Guide 312 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs Click the Scheduled Log Transfer tab In the Scheduled Log Transfer table select a scheduled log file transfer Click the Modify button The Modify Scheduled Transfer window opens In the Destination field modify the destination as appropriate In the Memo field modify the memo for the scheduled log transfer as appropriate In the Optional Components area modify the log fi
234. er the user name associated with the FTP server NN40020 600 Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates 331 Table 100 Configure FTP Server attributes Attribute Action Password Enter the user name associated with the FTP server Directory Enter the path to the location of the update The path is relative to the root of the FTP server you are logging into For example if the root of the FTP server you have logged into is public and your patches are located under public patches you would enter patches as the directory 10 Click the OK button The Find Software Updates window opens and displays a list of updates found in the specified location Select an update The update must have a status of Available Click the Apply button A confirmation window opens Click the Yes button The Software Update Complete confirmation window opens Click the OK button The Updates in Progress table lists the update as In Progress A software update that has the Reboot Required field checked will automatically reboot the BCM50 once the update has been applied Applying an update from an HTTP server Caution Applying a software update to the BCM50 is a service affecting operation Nortel recommends that you schedule updates for low traffic hours e Caution If a software update has a checkmark applied against it in the Reboot Required column of the Find Software Updates window
235. er with SNMP 0 134 Configuring SNMP settings 42 c4iecigiG dakearebeaeeeseeee r eieko taiora 135 Configuring general SNMP settings anaana 135 Configuring SNMP community strings 0 000 cee eee 138 Configuring service access points 0 00 0 c eee 140 Configuring SNMP trap destinations cc bs nice sdetadeedeaes be ienee aes 142 Viewing and modifying SNMP trap destinations 000 ceca eae 143 Ato SNMP dial o t ci nck wed cee een eee eee oe Re ee eee ma 144 Alarm severity levels pices et cee niece eee e eee eOene tE k EEEE aamnecads 145 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 000eee eee 147 Overview of BCM fault management 0 000 e eee 147 About BOM AlGUNS o ccccecdedtodgev Sider iene seeds ir Eha aE hrob bee 148 Alame and DOTOS 30 054 d0seeenevis 45484 5S 8 OFS SESE SSE NE OTS TAD SaEE 149 Aisi e dose pi cdneer AE ATT LELENE EETA bones any 149 Adminsierng alarms pion kpieceecee eee s diktee eae er eee REEE ewes 150 Using th Alarms Pa al oveconcus ees sd cate eee seh eeeewertoiwns exes 150 Using the Alarm Banner vscces ued eed es eerie akan euee tasiri saoedawad 152 Usmgthealam SE lt 5 cece cs doe ker Pe Eb ebR4 oS OR TE SOLER ESS RES OEE 153 AMS AM LEDS pate oe ee Sane a edhe Loe ees AAE 154 Using SNMP apg cccccerea eke aeke Seat ee dee taegee whe ed Faden eee ewes 155 Comiguing SAM SeRiNgS cori cccsiigiebaeder cas Erike edni EA 155 Heto BCM AaS sipui
236. erAgent Cimom Provider BCM_LicenseProviderAgent Cimom Provider BCM_LogProviderAgent Cimom Provider BCM_MIB2ProviderAgent Cimom Provider BCM_SNMPProviderAgent Cimom Provider BCM_SRGProviderAgent Cimom Provider BCM_SecurityProvider Agent BCM_TimeServiceProviderAgent Cimom Provider Cimom Provider BCM_TimeZoneSettingProviderAgent Cimom Provider BackupRestoreProviderAgent BriSW Cimom Provider BRI software CDRProviderAgent Cimom Provider CDRService Call Detail Recording Service CallPilotProviderAgent Cimom Provider Core Tel Core Telephony CoreTelProviderAgent Cimom Provider Cte Computer Telephony Engine DHCPProviderAgent Cimom Provider DiaLogger System Logging Mechanism Echo Server echo service HGMetrics Reporter Hunt Group Metrics IpTelProviderAgent Cimom Provider LanCteProviderAgent Cimom Provider LANProviderAgent Cimom Provider Msm Media Services Manager MsmProviderAgent Cimom Provider NnuScheduler System Scheduler Pdrd Persistence Data Repository Service SoftwareUpdateProviderAgent Cimom Provider SyslogListener Syslog Receiver UftpServer UFTP Server WAN FailoverProvider Agent Cimom Provider WANServiceMgr WAN Service btraceserver Plug in for Authentication and Routing Management for BT NN40020 600 Chapter 8 Using the BCM
237. erage signal level dBm Measured received signal level during talk spurts ITT local round trip time 1 65536 of a second Average round trip time on the call average For a list of the alarms generated by PVQM threshold violations refer to About BCM alarms on page 148 and List of BCM alarms on page 157 To access PVQM metrics 1 Inthe Element Manager select the Administration tab then click the Telephony Metrics and PVQM gt Metrics in the navigation tree The PVQM metrics panel displays NN40020 600 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics 243 Figure 38 PVQM Metrics panel o x File View Metwork Session Tools Help Exit Disconnect Refresh g Auto g Element Navigation Panel 4 Task Navigation Panel Configuration Administration eneral system status L_ lelephony Metrics e Irunk Module Metrics _ CC Limit metrics e Hunt Group Metrics _ PSIN Fallback Metrics i utiities l Backup and Restore Logs L09 Management Software Management j refresh Proactive Voice Quality Monitoring Threshold Settings Metrics Number of connections 0 Last reset Warning Threshold Yoilations Reset Metrics Inter Ar Packet Loss Round Trip Delay ms Most Recent Date and Time Most Recent DN Count desktop MTBY desktop 05 09 14 13 28 53 0 0 N A Listening R Factor 0 100 2005 09 14 13 28 53 0 0 N A Unacceptable Threshold Yoilations
238. eric Displays the accounts by User ID Telset User ID numeric Displays the accounts by Telset User ID Buttons Add Opens the Add Account to Group dialog box Allows the user account to be added to the selected group Delete Deletes the selected user account from the selected group BCM50 security fundamentals This section provides an overview of the following BCMS0 security policies e secure network protocols and encryption e security audits e system security considerations e firewalls e security certificate e site authentication This section also lists the other panels in the Element Manager that provide topic specific security Security on other Configuration panels SNMP e NTP Modem e PPP e Certificates e Telephony scheduled services e Telephony call security e Hospitality e Call Detail Recording NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 121 DHCP server Router Voice messaging LAN CTE Security on Administration panels Alarms Alarm settings SNMP trap destinations Service manager Backup and Restore Logs Software Management Security on Applications panels Desktop Assistant DA Pro i2050 software phone Personal Call Manager LAN CTE Client CDR BCM Monitor NCM Secure network protocols and encryption The BCM uses the following network protocols for Operation Administration and Maintenance OAM in a
239. es BCM Component Alarm ID Range Service Manager Core Telephony 0 999 Operating System 1000 1999 Software Updates 2000 2999 Persistent Data Repository 5000 5999 Date and Time 6000 6999 Modem Call Control 8000 8999 10000 10999 Platform Status Monitor 11000 11999 Backup and Restore 12000 12999 UPS 13000 13999 Configuration Change 16000 16999 System Set Based Admin 17000 17999 Startup Profile 19000 19999 System Authentication 30000 30999 Keycodes 31000 31999 Media Services Manager 40000 40999 CTE 41000 41999 Call Detail Recording 42000 42999 Voice CTI 43000 43999 Unistim Terminal Proxy Server 50000 50999 PVQM 50501 50999 VoIP Gateway 51000 51999 Media Path Server 52000 52999 Media Gateway Server 53000 53999 IP Telephony Provider 56000 56999 Survivable Remote Gateway 57000 57999 LAN Driver 60000 60999 NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 149 Alarms and log files All alarms that appear in the BCM Element Manager Alarms Panel are logged in the alarms systemlog file This file is capped at 1 MB in size when the file reaches this size a new alarms systemlog file is started The BCM keeps the current file as well as three previous files The file is also capped a
240. es Telephony General software contact your local error support group warning Core Core Telephony No Action Required Yes No No 0 Telephony Emergency transfer relay activated indicating a power issue or Core Telephony down condition critical Core Core Telephony Disconnect all Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony TEI request on station side ISDN ISDN device on devices If problem system persists contact your local support group critical Core Core Telephony Check your cabling Yes Yes es Yes Telephony Digital trunking from any DTM clock in free run modules to the external network Get your network provider to check the circuit critical Core Core Telephony Perform a restore Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony Persistent Data with a known good Repository backup If problem corruption persists contact your local support group BCM50 Administration Guide 162 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System BS critical Core Core Telephony Power down the es es es es Telephony ASM firmware system and check download error the ASM hardware and the expansion chassis connections If problem persists replace the ASM or expansion chassis hardware 34 critical Core Core Telephony Restart system and Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony Low Level contact your local Operating error support group 35 critical Core Core Telephony Attempt another Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony Error
241. es task tree items The check boxes within these dialog boxes change depending on the data selected to copy Table 7 shows the possible check boxes that can appear and what type of data will be copied when they are selected Check the check boxes for the types of data that you would like to copy to the selected rows Select OK to paste the information The rows are updated with copied data Table 7 Paste Data Check box title Settings copied Settings not copied Control set Lines Sets e Control set from the copied source into the selected row Restrictions Lines Sets e Set restrictions e Direct dial set designation e Set lock which set is the D Dial set e Allow Last Number Redial CAP TAP assignment e Allow Saved Number e ExtraDial set designation Redial e Service mode ringing set e Allow Link designation Line set restrictions e Prime set designation for a line e Hunt group appearance Trunk Data Lines Sets e Data in common between e Data can be copied the copied and pasted between two different trunk trunks cartridge types Telco data Lines Sets e Call Log set Logging set Log password e 1stDisplay e Log space Buttons Sets e All programmable set buttons from the copied set into the selected row s programmable buttons Line access Sets e Line assignment e Private line appearances e Line pool access e Prime line designation e Number of intercom keys e Answer DNs unless Answer
242. es to the table layouts are not saved If you leave the panel the columns return to the default order To move a column click and hold the column heading and drag and drop it to another location on the table Figure 7 shows a step by step example of how to move a column within a table Figure 7 Changing the order of columns in a table Click and hold on the column you want to move All Lines Drag the column to a new position Control Set Control Set Trunk Type ROstr01 ROstr02 Column is in new position ROstr03 Rearranging lines If you want to sort table data to make it easier to find information use the right click function on table column headings to open a Sort dialog box The Sort dialog box allows you to choose how a table sorts lines of data Figure 8 on page 57 shows the Sort dialog box Table 8 lists and describes the fields and buttons in the Sort dialog box NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 57 Figure 8 Sort dialog box Telephony Resources Unknown ROstrO1 Then By v ma v Then By i y ma v 7I Apply Cancel Help Table 8 Sort dialog box fields Attribute Value Description Sort By lt column name gt Choose the column to uses for Ascending descending sorting table data This is the first column the data set is sorted by Then By None lt column name gt Choose t
243. ess that has generated the alarm in a 3 part DN format The component ID always identifies the system as a BCM includes the name of the system that generated the alarm and identifies the component that generated the alarm In this way remote monitoring stations can easily identify what type of system generated an SNMP trap and which system generated the trap e Alarm Acked indicates whether the alarm has been acknowledged in the BCM Element Manager When you select an alarm in the table a Details panel is displayed for the selected alarm The Details panel displays the following information e Time the date and time of the alarm e Problem Description a description of the alarm condition e Problem Resolution the course of action for the alarm You can acknowledge an alarm to indicate that the alarm has been taken care of You can specify whether to include acknowledged alarms in the Alarm Banner so that the alarm count remains concise For more information about the Alarm Banner see Using the Alarm Banner on page 132 NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 151 To view an alarm When you view an alarm on the alarms panel you can change the order of the columns in the table and you can sort alarms For example you may want to sort alarms by Component ID and Alarm ID 1 2 Click the Administration tab Open the General folder and then click the Alarms task The Alarms page op
244. essage from opening after login Leave this box unchecked if you want the Warning delivered Enter a new warning in the Post login message box or leave the default warning in the box Click in the Disable telset login box to prevent users from having administrating the system through any telset interface Use the default Nortel Challenge Key or enter a new one If you enter a new Nortel Challenge Key make a record of the challenge key you use Check the Show Hide box if you want to display asterisks rather than the characters used in the Challenge Key Setting credential complexity Setting credential complexity allows the administrator to define the rules for password length and password complexity To set credential complexity 1 Select Configuration gt Administrator Access gt Security Policies gt Local Authentication Policy In the Credential Complexity section under the Credential Type column select the credential type Under the Minimum User ID Length column enter the required number of characters or digits for a user s ID Under the Minimum Password Length column enter the required number of characters or digits for the user s password BCM50 Administration Guide 82 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 5 Under the Password Complexity Level column enter a number from 1 to 5 that represents the password complexity level requirement or enter 0 if no complexity check is requi
245. essaging PIMAMIS Load File Modify Feature Licences Table Keycode Retrieval Connect to Nortel Keycode Retrieval System fa la C16 Ww dus a9 Vv Include ACKed alarms BCM50 Help system The following types of help information are available to you in Element Manager to help you understand how to program your BCMS0 e Menu bar Help on page 66 e Field level Help on page 68 e Context sensitive Help on page 68 Menu bar Help The menu bar help provides access to the entire Help system which includes online help and user manuals in PDF Table 10 shows the help elements available from menu bar Help Figure 17 on page 67 shows the pull down menu from the Help on the menu bar NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 67 Table 10 Element Manager help elements Help menu option Description BCM Web Page and Link to PDF documents located on the BCM50 web page PDF Documents Contents Opens a browser window that shows the help information by contents or index and allows a search Customer Support Opens a browser to a Nortel Networks customer support web site About Provides information about the Element Manager software such as the build number Figure 17 BCM50 Element Manager menu bar help BCM Element Manager 192 168 249 130 File Edit View Network Session Tools Help yet Xx Cut 3 Copy GA Paste Help Contents gt Fa
246. estart then reboot will affect all system and contact telephony your local support operations on the group system Service Manager is attempting to restart the service M36 T00T4 critical Service Service Manager Checkfor Nes Nes Yes Yes Manager Media Path Server corresponding alarm mps has stopped 10114 or 10314 If unexpectedly This service doesn t will affect all IP restart then reboot Telephony Service system and contact Manager is your local support attempting to restart group the service T37 T00T5 critical Service Service Manager Check for Yes Yes Yes Yes Manager Media Gateway corresponding alarm Server mgs has 110115 or 10315 If stopped service doesn t unexpectedly This restart then reboot will affect all IP system and contact Telephony Service jour local support Manager is group attempting to restart the service T38 TOOTS critical Service Service Manager Check for Yes Yes es Yes Manager Persistent Data corresponding alarm Repository Pdrd 10116 or 10316 If has stopped service doesn t unexpectedly This restart then reboot will affect any system and contact management done your local support to running services group lor startup of non running services Service Manager is attempting to restart the service BCM50 Administration Guide 174 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System T39 T00T7 critical Service Service Manager Check for es es es es Manager K
247. etrics 221 Figure 27 QoS Monitoring mode jnortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager 18 x Fie View Network Session Tools Help Exit M Disconnect o Refresh g Auto refresh Element Navigation Panel 4 Task Navigation Panel QoS Monitor work Elements ay New Folder 5 i Configuration Hea alah Monitoring mode Enabled in Link Monitor mode Logging Hey ystem rics e pen E res L g NIP Metrics fa lelephony Metrics 1 fa Ututies THA Enable logging Vv Maximum log file size KBytes 10 Backup and Kestore Logging frequency minutes 1 a Logs jy Software Management HEHEHE FH Mean Opinion Scores IP Address QoS Indicator G 723 5 3kbit s G 723 6 3kbit s 4 rl fe C0 M0 me wo Vv Include ACKed alarms To configure logging attributes 1 On the Navigation tree click the Administration tab System Metrics and QoS Monitor 2 Configure logging attributes Table 54 Logging attributes Attribute Action Enable Logging Enable the check box if you want to enable the logging of MOS scores Maximum log file size Enter a value for the maximum size of the log file from 1 to 10240 kilobytes KB The default is 10 KB Logging Frequency Enter the time interval between each MOS log 1 to 1440 minutes The default is 1 minutes 3 Press the Tab key to save the settings BCM50 Administration Guide 222 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics F
248. eway The MOS can be a value from 0 00 to 5 00 where 0 00 is the worst score Poor and 5 00 is best score Excellent To refresh the QoS monitor data To update the MOS table with the most current values select View gt Refresh press F5 or select the Refresh icon from the toolbar UPS Status The BCM50 can support an Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS device to ensure continuous operation during power interruption and failure conditions The UPS feature provides power source monitoring and battery backup so that critical system functionality required to maintain and provide warning time to either correct the problem or to activate a contingency plan for impacted services is possible UPS is described in the BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide NN40020 302 and the BCM50 Installation Checklist and Quick Start Guide NN40020 308 The UPS connects and communicates with the BCM50 through USB Enabling the UPS feature requires plugging the UPS USB cable into the BCM50 USB connector before powering up the BCMS0 The UPS must be present during the boot up process for the BCM50 to function This section provides the procedure that describes how To access UPS Status To access UPS Status 1 To access the UPS Status open the Element Manager click the Administration tab click System Status in the directory tree and then click UPS Status The UPS Status then displays BCM50 Administration Guide 224 Chapter
249. eycode Service corresponding alarm cfsserver has 10117 or 10317 If stopped service doesn t unexpectedly This restart then reboot will affect the ability system and contact to enter any new __ your local support keycodes Service group Manager is attempting to restart the service T40 TO0TS Critical Service Service Manager Check for Yes Yes es Yes Manager Time Service corresponding alarm tmwservice has 10118 or 10318 If stopped service doesn t unexpectedly This restart then reboot will affect the system and contact synchronization of lyour local support time in the system group Service Manager is attempting to restart the service T4T TOOTS critical Service Service Manager Check for Yes Yes es Yes Manager Platform Status corresponding alarm Monitor psm has 10119 or 10319 If stopped service doesn t unexpectedly This restart then reboot will affect the system and contact monitoring of your local support system hardware group land drivers Service Manager is attempting to restart ithe service T42 T0020 Critical Service Service Manager Check for Yes Yes es Yes Manager Web Server httpd corresponding alarm has stopped 10120 or 10320 If unexpectedly This jservice doesn t will affect the onbox restart then reboot web pages system and contact downloads and your local support documentation group Service Manager is attempting to restart the service T43 0021 Critical Service Service Manager Check for
250. f problem Service ctiserver persists contact your service could not be local support group restarted after a restore Information Backup and Backup and Restore No Action Required Yes No No Restore Onbox Backup Log collection has completed Information Backup and Backup and Restore No Action Required Yes No No Restore Backup Log files have been successfully transferred off box Information Backup and Backup and Restore No Action Required Yes No No Restore Restore has started Information Backup and Backup and Restore No Action Required Yes No No Restore Restore has completed successfully Information Backup and Backup and Restore No Action Required Yes No No Restore Restore has rebooted the system to complete its operation Information UPS UPS Power failure Check local power Yes INO INO connected to the ystem Information UPS UPS Running on Check tocat power Yes No No UPS batteries connected to the ystem warning UPS UPS Battery power Check local power Yes No No exhausted connected to the system warning UPS UPS Reached run Check local power Yes No No time limit on connected to the batteries system warning UPS UPS Battery Check batteries in Yes No No charge below low UPS and replace if limit needed BCM50 Administration Guide 196 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System B67 3007 war
251. file configuration information such as DS30 configuration dialup WAN media channels 64 kbps B channels signaling channels D channels processor expansion cards and the total number of logical DSP resource units the available DSP tasks and DSP tasks in service File Statisti BCM Info Voice Ports IP Devices RIP Sessions UIP Line Monitor Usage Indicators Voice Bus channels N A m Media Card Firmware Core load Market profile 30DuB20 K 8 North America m Media Card Configuration DSP resource units DS30 configuration N A Dial up WAN N A Media channels 224 Signaling channels 107 Processor expansion cards N A m Media Card Hardware DSP Resources Type csc Main DSP 28 Revision 769 NN40020 600 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities 255 Voice Ports tab The Voice Ports tab displays real time information about configured voice ports A configured voice port is a logical device used for Voice Mail and Contact Center Values associated with voice ports change with the usage of the switch and are therefore well suited for dynamic logging to view trends relating to system activity You can use the Voice Ports tab to view the following information e information about voice ports used by the Voice CTI services such as the resource limit and how many voice CTI ports are enabled and assigned e how many Voice CTI ports
252. find network elements 1 2 N Oo oO fF W Right click the Network Elements icon in the Element Navigation Panel Select Find Network Elements gt Business Communications Manager The Network Device Search dialog box appears Enter the Start of IP Address range and press the tab key Enter the End of IP Address range and press the tab key Enter your user name in the User ID field and press the Tab key Enter your password in the Password field Click on the OK button The Element Manager searches for the IP addresses specified in the range e Ifthe search is successful the BCMS50s found within the IP address range are added to Network Elements tree in the Element Navigation Panel e If the search is unsuccessful a Network Elements dialog box appears stating No network elements found NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 41 Connecting to a BCM50 element Use the following steps to connect to your BCM50 once it is defined in the Element Manager 1 On the Network Elements tree select the element to which you wish to connect by selecting the IP address or element name as it appears in the Network Element tree Login fields appear in the Information panel Enter your log in credentials for the BCM50 to which you are trying to connect Perform one of the following tasks to connect to the BCM50 e Click the Connect icon on the Icon toolbar e Right click on the IP address or element name and select Connec
253. for diagnostic purposes only Detailed No setting A detailed explanation of the Cause code is provided Cause check box This check box appears when you select Simple in the Release Reason Code Text drop down menu When you select the check box only the cause code accompanies a dropped call notification NN40020 600 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 271 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data This chapter provides information about how to back up and restore data from the BCMS0 system Overview of backing up and restoring data Before you make administrative changes or as your BCM50 system accumulates information you can create a backup archive on the BCM itself on a USB drive or on another location on the network At a later time you can restore the data to the BCMS50 Note Nortel recommends that you back up BCMS0 data on a regular basis In particular you should perform a backup of the BCM50 and router data before you undertake major configuration changes and before you apply a software update or upgrade You can restore data to the same system or to a different system at the same software release level The BCM50 checks the software release level of the destination system and will provide a warning if an incompatibility prevents the backup from being restored onto the selected system Backup and restore operations are performed by only one operator at a time to avoid conflicts
254. for an account Setting the authentication method By default users are authenticated on the local BCM50 system In a network with mutliple BCM50 systems you can choose to authenticate users on a centralized server using RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service The BCM RADIUS client is compliant with the RADIUS protocol described in RFC 2865 and supports the following authentication and authorization functions e ACCESS REQUEST messages e ACCESS ACCEPT messages Other functions such as challenge key and accounting messages are not supported BCM50 Administration Guide 84 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges If you use RADIUS for authenticating and authorizing users and the RADIUS servers are not in service or are out of contact the BCM will revert to using local authentication When you select RADIUS as the authentication method user IDs and passwords will be authenticated on the RADIUS server for the following tasks administration of the BCM using Element Manager access to the BCM website access to the BCM Monitor dial in access to the BCM using modem or ISDN Contact Centre administration BCM Amp configuration CTE DA ProAE telset administration IP set registration voicemail and web based administration Call Detail Recording functionality To set the authentication method 1 Select Configuration Administrator Access Security Policies gt Authentication Service P
255. for the following optional components e NAT and filters QoS queueing e Data Services Network Interfaces e Keycodes e Doorphone e QoS Monitor e Security SNMP e Date and Time e Call Data Recording e IP Telephony e Scheduling e LAN CTE e Survivable Remote Gateway e IP Music e CallPilot Messages e CallPilot Configuration e Media Services Manager e Core Telephony BCM50 Administration Guide 292 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data Effects on the system A restore operation is a service affecting operation A number of services running on the BCM50 system are stopped and then restarted after the data has been restored A reboot warning is displayed if any of the components selected for restoration require a system restart Table 85 lists the effects of restoring optional components Table 85 Effects of a restore operation on the system Component Effect Core Telephony Service interruption IP Telephony Service interruption Keycodes Reboots the device Data Services Network Network interruption interfaces NAT and filters QoS Queueing Temporarily disables NAT IP Policy and VoIP Security Reboots the device CallPilot Messages Service interruption Existing voice messages will be lost CallPilot Configuration Service interruption Existing voice messages will be lost Media Services Manager Service interruption Restore operations and logs
256. fore the reboot occurs Caution Do not remove the USB storage device until the update is applied Removing the device before the update has been applied may seriously harm the integrity of your system To apply a software update from a USB storage device 1 Inthe task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Software Management folder and then click the Software Update task The Software Update panel opens The Updates in Progress tab is open 3 Click the Get New Updates button The Get New Updates window opens Select USB Storage Device from the Retrieve From selection field Enter the path to the location of the update in the Directory field You must enter the complete path NN40020 600 Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates 329 10 Click the OK button The Find Software Updates window opens and displays a list of updates found in the specified location Select an update The update must have a status of Available Click the Apply button A confirmation window opens Click the Yes button The Software Update Complete confirmation window opens Click the OK button The Updates in Progress table lists the update as In Progress A software update that has the Reboot Required field checked will automatically reboot the BCM50 once the update has been applied Applying an update from a shared folder e Caution Applying a software update to the BCM50 is a service affecting
257. ftware Update History table If software updates have not been applied to your BCM50 the table is empty 2jnortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager 192 168 249 27 E lol x File View Network Session Tools Help g Beets E Refresh g Auto refresh Software Update History Current Release ee system Status lelephony Metrics Software Update History Uuimes Backup and Restore Date Category Name Version Description Removeable Logs 7 Remove Software Update tware Update Ea C8 L M 11 Laa E Wa 12 Vv Include ACKed alarms 4 To view release notes about a particular software update select the update in the table Release notes containing details about the software update are displayed in the Release Notes panel below the table Removing software updates You may find that you need to remove a software update that has been applied to the BCM50 Not all software updates can be removed whether a software update can be removed depends on the the particular software update Removing a software update does not remove the software itself from the BCMS0 it only returns the software components of the software update to a previous software version You must have administrator privileges to remove a software update from the BCM50 Removing a software patch or upgrade from the BCM50 is a service affecting operation All services running on the system will be stopped Consequently Nortel recommends that you schedule remov
258. g connected expansion units populated Media Bay Modules MBMs attached telephone devices You can view the information in the Hardware Inventory remotely using Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP management systems and the Entity Management Information Base MIB RFC2737 NO060598 LLL nee BCM50 common file input output processes Many BCM50 tasks require task data to be transferred to or retrieved from different destinations or sources BCM50 can use the following data repositories when transferring or retrieving task data e BCM50 e personal computer e network folder e FTP server e SFTP server e USB storage device e HTTP HTTPS server BCM50 Administration Guide 70 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment Table 11 shows the data repositories that can be used for transferring task data to or from your BCMS0 device during a task that requires data input or output Table 11 Task data source and destination repositories Task Data Backup and Software Repository Restore Logs Updates Keycodes BCM50 Y N N Personal computer Y Ye Y Y Network folder Y Y Y Y FTP Y Y Y N SFTP Y Y N N USB storage device Y Y Y N HTTP HTTPS N N Y N Server Available only for On Demand request of a task not available for tasks to be run at a later time Comparison of data repositories Each data repository has its advantages and disadvantages Use this tabl
259. g to the Operational logs category Table 89 Operational logs Log type BCM log name Description Alarm log alarms systemlog Records alarms that were written to the Element Manager alarm panel Other possible alarms if they cannot be viewed using the BCM50 Element Manager are logged in the alarms diagnostic log Configuration configchange systemlog Records Element Manager configuration data changes by user change and time Security log security systemlog Records users logging in and out as well as locked out users psmtest systemlog Records Ethernet interface activity and hard drive partitions psmOMS log Records platform status such as operational measurements Archive log archiver systemlog Records backup restore and log management activity Activity log MonitGuard systemlog Records MonitGuard activity an application that monitors main BCM services and applications psmtest systemlog Records Ethernet interface activity and hard drive partitions Diagnostic logs Diagnostic logs contain the log files generated by the BCM50 software components These log files are required only if additional system information is required by Nortel Technical Support to help diagnose a BCM50 issue Only an administrator can access Diagnostic logs Sensitive logs Sensitive logs may contain sensitive customer information such as personal identification numbers or bank account and credit card numbers Users ma
260. gation tree Connected items Disconnect or view logs Unconnected items Connect delete or view logs You can rename a folder or a network element by triple clicking it or by right clicking the network element and updating the name when the name field opens for editing BCM50 Administration Guide 46 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment Table 3 Initial Element Manager window attributes Continued Information panel The information in the Information panel changes depending on what is selected in the Network Elements tree e If anetwork element is selected that is not connected The information panel shows the network element connection login information Refer to Information displayed for unconnected elements on page 46 e f a network element is selected to which there is an Element Manager connection The task panel opens and shows Configuration and Administration tabs Refer tolnformation displayed for connected elements on page 47 for an example of the presentation of the information by Element Manager Status bar The bottom bar of the Element Manager window displays the current status of the selected item Expansion Arrows Clicking on these arrows will either expand or collapse the panels within the Element Manager window These arrows appear on all panels that have sub panels that can be expanded or collapsed Information displayed for unconnected elements When you select a devic
261. gement panel opens 3 Click the Immediate Log Transfer tab 4 Inthe Transfer To selection field select USB Storage Device jnortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager 192 168 249 27 File view Network Session Tools Help pet g Refresh g Auto tefresH Element Navigation Panel Task Navigation Panel Log Management Eag eee Configuration Administration Eai Immediate Log Transfer Scheduled Log Transfer E ny Cenera fag YSstem Status Transterto fy Computer 09 lelephony Metrics Utilities Hig Backup and Restore mTransfer to My Computer peen Transfer Hag Software Management 5 Click the Transfer button The Transfer To window opens BCM50 Administration Guide 306 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs 6 Select the log file categories that you want to include in the log file transfer All the log files associated with the selected categories will be transferred xi Vv r Log vd Vv OK Cancel 7 Click the OK button A transfer window opens and displays applicable warnings Click the Yes button to initiate the transfer The Progress Update window opens When the log files are transferred the Transfer Complete window opens Click the OK button The log archive is saved in the location you specified Performing an immediate log transfer to your personal computer gt Note The time required to transfer log files varies with the a
262. ger Service Manager IP Terminal Service UTPS has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager This will affect service on all IP terminals on the system Voice over IP Gateway feps has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager Reboot system and contact your local support group contact your local support group Yes Yes Yes Yes 160 TOTUS Critical Service Service Manager Reboot system and Yes Yes Yes Yes 161 T0106 critical Service Manager Service Manager Quality of Service Monitor qmond has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager Reboot system and contact your local support group Yes Yes es es T62 0107 critical Service Manager Service Manager Call Detail Recording Service CDRService has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager Reboot system and contact your local support group Yes Yes es es T63 TOTO critical Service Manager Service Manager Voice Application Interface Service ctiserver has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager This will affect CallPilot System Set Based Admin and the modem Reboot system and contact your local support group Yes Yes es es NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management Syste
263. good Repository backup If problem corruption in the persists contact your market profile area local support group TO 0 critical Core Core Telephony Check your cabling Yes Yes es Yes Telephony Unavailable from any DTM Seconds Error long modules to the term alarm external network and threshold has been run loopback tests exceeded on the _ on the circuit to DTM check for network issues Get your network provider to check the circuit during problem conditions TT A critical Core Core Telephony Check your cabling Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony Loss of Signal long from any DTM term alarm modules to the threshold has been external network and exceeded on the Irun loopback tests DTM ion the circuit to check for network issues Get your network provider to check the circuit during problem conditions NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 159 T2 critical Core Core Telephony Check your cabling Yes es es es Telephony _ Loss of Frame from any DTM long term alarm modules to the threshold has been external network and exceeded onthe Irun loopback tests DTM ion the circuit to check for network issues Get your network provider to check the circuit during problem conditions T3 critical Core Core Telephony Check your cabling Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony Alarm Indication from any DTM Signal long term modules to the alarm threshold has external network and been exceeded
264. h to view For example LOS Loss Of Signal Click the drop down menu to select a time period The display shows the Start time of the period To check bipolar violations 1 Choose Administration Telephony Metrics Trunk Module Metrics Choose an expansion module Click the CSU Alarms tab The display shows the number of bipolar violations that occurred in the last minute NN40020 600 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics 233 To check short term alarms Choose Administration Telephony Metrics Trunk Module Metrics Choose an expansion module Click the CSU Alarms tab The display shows the short term alarms and the number of milliseconds not necessarily contiguous that were active in the last minute To check defects 1 Choose Administration gt Telephony Metrics gt Trunk Module Metrics Choose a an expansion module Click the CSU Alarms tab The display shows the first type of defect and the number of milliseconds not necessarily contiguous the hardware reported in the last minute To view CSU Alarm History 1 Choose Administration Trunk Modules Choose an expansion module Click the CSU Alarm History tab The display shows all the alarms 4 To view a specific alarm click the Alarm Name The display shows all the occurrences of that Alarm CbC limit metrics Call by call service CbC on public PRI protocol NI 2 allows a PBX to use channels more effectively by expanding or contracting t
265. hapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 35 e Desktop Assistant Pro e Desktop Assistant Pro AE For more information about Desktop Assistant tools see the BCM50 Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Note You require a LAN CTE keycode to operate Desktop Assistant Pro and gt Desktop Assistant Pro AE See the LAN CTE Configuration Guide NN40020 602 for more information about installing and using LAN CTE Performing initialization Startup Profile The Startup Profile is a template that can be edited using Microsoft Excel It is used to accelerate the initial installation programming of system level parameters It helps bring the BCM50 element to a basic operational and ready to customize state without using either BCM Element Manager or Telset administration The administrator must fill out the Startup Profile template save it onto a USB storage device and insert the storage device into the USB port of the BCM50 before the initial start up On start up the BCM50 reads the information and starts up with the correct system parameters and feature licensing already in place Some of the parameters included in the Startup Profile are e system name e system profile such as country telephony template and key voicemail attributes e system IP parameters e system level telephony attributes that automatically create default system DNs e feature licensing through automated application of the keycode file e user accounts e mode
266. hat does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a backup at a time when the system is typically not in use TO Modify a scheduled backup In the task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Backup The Backup panel opens and displays the Immediate Backup tab Click the Scheduled Backups tab The Scheduled Backups panel opens Select a scheduled backup in the Scheduled Backups table Click the Modify button The Modify Scheduled Backup window opens Modify the attributes of the scheduled backup as required For information about how to configure the attributes see the procedures in Viewing and performing scheduled backups on page 281 BCM50 Administration Guide 290 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 7 Click the OK button The modified backup is displayed in the Scheduled Backups table To delete a backup schedule 1 In the task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Backup The Backup panel opens and displays the Immediate Backup tab 3 Click the Scheduled Backups tab The Scheduled Backups panel opens Select a scheduled backup in the Scheduled Backups table Click the Delete button A confirmation window opens 6 Click the Yes button The scheduled backup is removed from the Scheduled Backups table
267. hat is displayed in the Scheduled Backups table Table 76 Information displayed in the Scheduled Backups table Column Description Memo Displays the memo for the scheduled backup Destination Displays the storage location for the backup file For example the FTP server Schedule Displays the date and time at which the backup will be performed BCM50 Administration Guide 282 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data You can change the order of the information in the table by clicking a column heading and dragging it to a new location in the table You can list the information in a column in ascending or descending order by clicking a column heading To view scheduled backups In the task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Backup The Backup panel opens and displays the Immediate Backup tab 3 Click the Scheduled Backups tab The Scheduled Backups panel opens Any existing scheduled backups are displayed in the Scheduled Backups table Nortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager 192 168 249 27 File View Wetwork Session Tools Help p oo amp Refresh g Aute retresh Element Navigation Panel4 Task Navigation Panel Backup Immediate Backup Scheduled Backups eneral system status lelephony Metrics g Mites e BCM Montor _ bing o lrace koute Ethernet Activity keset Diagnostic Settings _ Data Debug
268. he ac outlet before performing any maintenance procedure BCM50 Administration Guide 20 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM50 These conventions and symbols are used to represent the Business Series Terminal display and dialpad Convention Example Used for Word in a special font shown in Psu Command line prompts on display telephones the top line of the display Underlined word in capital letters FLAY Display option Available on two line display shown in the bottom line of a two telephones Press the button directly below the line display telephone option on the display to proceed Dialpad buttons Buttons you press on the dialpad to select a particular option These text conventions are used in this guide to indicate the information described Convention Description bold Courier Indicates command names and options and text that you need to enter text Example Use the info command Example Enter show ip alerts routes italic text Indicates book titles plain Courier Indicates command syntax and system output for example prompts text and system messages Example Set Trap Monitor Filters FEATURE Indicates that you press the button with the coordinating icon on HOLD whichever set you are using RELEASE Related publications Related publications are listed below To locate specific information you can refer to the Master Index of BCM50 Library
269. he column to uses for Ascending descending sorting table data This is the second column the data set is sorted by Then By None lt column name gt Choose the column to uses for Ascending descending sorting table data This is the third column the data set is sorted by Table 9 Sort dialog box buttons Actions Description OK Changes are accepted and the dialog box closes Apply The table rearranges based on the selections but the dialog box does not close Cancel No changes are made to the sort order Help Help link to this page BCM50 Administration Guide 58 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment Using your keyboard to move around a table Use the lt Tab gt key or the directional arrow keys on your keyboard to move around a table lt Tab gt Each press moves the cursor to the field to the right At the end of a line the next line is highlighted and the cursor continues moving to the right lt Shift gt lt Tab gt Each press moves the cursor to the field to the left At the beginning of a line the previous line is highlighted and the cursor continues moving to the left from the far right field lt Up gt lt Down gt Navigation tree Moves cursor up down one heading Non table panels Moves cursor up down one heading Selected table moves up down one line lt Left gt lt Right gt Moves cursor to the left right of the cell Note that this only works on the curr
270. he navigation tree click Administration Telephony Metrics Trunk Module Metrics 2 Click the Performance History tab to view metrics information Viewing D Channel information This tab displays trunk module metrics for the D channel D channel metrics display when a BRI trunk module is configured on the system 1 On the navigation tree click Administration Telephony Metrics Trunk Module Metrics 2 Click the D channel tab to view metrics information Disabling or enabling a B channel setting If you need to isolate a problem you may need to turn off individual port channels rather than the entire module To disable or enable a B channel setting 1 On the navigation tree click Administration gt Telephony Metrics gt Trunk Module Metrics The window displays Expansion 1 or Expansion 2 Click heading of the bus you want to view For example click Expansion 1 Click the tab in the lower menu marked B Channels Click the B channel you want to enable or disable B1 or B2 a A OW N Then select Enable or Disable If you are disabling the channel you are prompted by a dialog box to confirm your action The State field indicates the mode of operation for the port If the port is enabled this field is blank unless a device is physically connected Provisioning a PRI B channel When you purchase PRI from your service provider you can request the number of B channels that are allocated for you to use For example you m
271. he number of channels available to different call types such as INWATS OUTWATS Foreign Exchange FX and tie lines The call by call service is a method of offering and receiving services to Customer Premises Equipment CPE on ISDN PRI without the use of dedicated circuits i e interface or B channels The Call By Call service conveys signaling information over an ISDN Primary Rate Interface PRI that indicates on a per call basis the specific service type required to complete the call Once the feature is configured use the CbC Limit metrics panel to monitor denied call activity for each service on each line pool PRI lines that support call by call services have maximum and minimum call limits for each service Use this panel to view reports for the services These limits are set as part of the numbering plan programming This section provides the To access the CbC limit metrics procedure BCM50 Administration Guide 234 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics To access the CbC limit metrics 1 To access the CbC metrics in the Element Manager click the Administration tab click the Telephony Metrics and then CbC Limit Metrics in the navigation tree 2 To assess the capacity of the PRI call services on your system on the Call by Call Metrics table select the line pool for which you want to view CbC traffic See Figure 33 Figure 33 Call By Call limit metrics jnortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager 192 168 249
272. he quality of service QoS of IP trunk services The tool periodically monitors the delay and packet loss of IP networks between two peer gateways The main objective of the QoS Monitor is to allow new IP telephony calls to fall back to the PSTN if the voice quality of the IP network falls below the specified transmit threshold For information about setting the transmit threshold see the BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 You can set the threshold in the Element Manager in the Telephony Resources panel Configuring the QoS Monitor You configure the QoS Monitor using the QoS Monitor panel on the Administration tab You can configure the following e the monitoring mode e logging parameters BCM50 Administration Guide 220 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics To configure monitoring mode 1 On the Navigation tree click the Administration tab System Metrics and QoS Monitor 2 Configure the monitoring mode attributes Table 53 Monitoring Mode attributes Attribute Action Disabled Link Monitor Mode Continuously test the connection between the BCM50 and remote endpoints QoS Monitor Mode Select this option if you want to calculate MOS values for each endpoint determine whether the connection has fallen below a specific threshold send MOS scores to FCAPS applications and create a log history of the MOS scores NN40020 600 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and M
273. he server and launch the Element Manager Element Manager is designed for single user environments A single installation of Element Manager will extend the same user preferences to any Citrix user including the device list and any saved passwords Citrix administrators can ensure a secure environment by using one of the following approaches e install a copy of Element Manager for each user or group of users in different folders with Windows permissions set for the folder to control access e in cases where a shared device tree is permitted ensure that users do not save passwords but instead enter a password each time they connect To install Element Manager on a Citrix server 1 From the Citrix server connect to the BCMSO web page Ifthe BCM50 is installed on the network use a browser and type in the BCM50 IP address as the URL in the following format http KxXx XXX XXX XXX Ifthe BCM50 is installed but not yet configured connect directly to the BCM50 through the OAM port and using a browser type the following http 10 10 11 1 2 Enter the user name and password to be authenticated on the BCM50 web page See Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges on page 75 for information on default user and passwords Select the Administrator Applications link Select the BCM50 Element Manager link from the Administrator Applications web page Select the Download Element Manager link from Element
274. ices Click the Administration tab 2 Open the Utilities folder and then click Reset The Reset panel opens 3 Click the Warm Reset Telephony Services button A confirmation dialog box opens 4 Click the OK button All telephony services are restarted including LAN CTE Voicemail and IP telephony NN40020 600 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities 269 Performing a cold reset of BCM50 telephony services Caution Performing a cold reset of telephony services erases all telephony programming as well as all Voice Message mailboxes and messages Telephony services will restart with all telephony programming at default values for the specified region template and start DN for the current software release level To perform a cold reset of BCM50 telephony services 4 Click the Administration tab Open the Utilities folder and then click Reset The Reset panel opens Click the Cold Reset Telephony Services button The Cold Reset Telephony dialog box displays Configure the Cold Reset Telephony attributes Table 69 Configure Hard Reset Telephony attributes Attribute Action Region Specify the startup region Template Specify the startup template Options are PBX or DID Start DN Specify the startup DN The default value is 221 5 Click the OK button All telephony services are reset including LAN CTE Voicemail and IP telephony Diagnostic settings Diagnostic settings is a utilit
275. ies 261 e duration displays the duration of the call e direction Outgoing indicates that the call originated from the BCMS0 Incoming indicates that the call originated from outside and is directed at the BCM50 e start time displays the time and date on which the call started e user displays the DN and name of the BCMS0 user e state displays Idle if there is no active call on the line displays Dialing if the BCMS50 user is in the process of dialing digits to place a call dispalys Alerting if a call has been received on the line and a BCM50 user s phone is ringing displays Connected if the line has a connected call displays Held if the line has a call on hold In the line monitor area colours are used to indicate the state of each line e gray represents lines that are idle e blue represents lines that are active e red represents lines that are alerting e dark red represents lines that are on hold To view all lines Click the Line Monitor tab 2 Click the Show All Lines Including Inactive check box The Line Monitor area displays all lines on the BCMS0 system For lines displayed in light gray previous calls are shown until a new call is placed or received on that line J BCM Monitor BCM40027 5 x File Statistics Help BCM Info Media Card Voice Ports IP Devices ATP Sessions UIP Usage Indicators Statistics m Line Monitor Active Lines 0 Direction Start
276. igure 28 QoS Logging attributes Zjnortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager 192 168 249 27 7 15 x File View Metwork Session Tools Help it i 4 gag UtOrefrest pet Pees g Refresh g Auto refresh Element Navigation Panel 4 Task Navigation Panel QoS Monitor Configuration n ny oeneral Monitoring mode Enabled in Link Monitor mode h 23 system Status e LED Status Disabled e ppe Enabled in Link Monitor mode _ NIP Metrics _ Mtertace Metrics _ Disk Mirroring L QoS Metrics 0 lelephony Metrics ep Unies Ha Backup and Restore Mean Opinion Scores Enable logging Maximum log file size KBytes Enabled in QoS Monitor mode Logging frequency minutes r Logs _ Log Management Name E Address E Indicator G 711 G 723 5 3kbit s G 723 6 3kbit s G 729 ES ma Sottware Management rA 2 a1 3 hayi S 2 Vv Include ACKed alarms To view the QoS monitoring information The Mean Opinion Scores table displays the current network quality described as a Mean Opinion Score MOS for each IP destination You can view the MOS mapping Unlike the BCM 3 x where both transmit and receive values were reported the QoS Monitor collects only the transmit values Table 55 lists the fields displayed in the Mean Opinion Score table Table 55 Mean Opinion Score descriptions Attribute Description Name Displays the name of the Remote Gateway IP Address Displays the IP address of the Remote Gateway
277. igure schedule attributes Attribute Action Memo Enter a note for the scheduled backup as applicable Recurrence Select how often the scheduled backup is to occur Options are Once Daily Weekly Monthly Depending on the option you choose the window displays selections for the month and day of month If you select Weekly days of the week are displayed Select the check box for Daily to select the day Month Select the month in which the scheduled backup is to occur Day of Month Select the day of the month on which the scheduled backup is to occur Time Select the time at which the scheduled backup is to occur 9 Click the OK button The scheduled backup is displayed in the Scheduled Backups table Performing a scheduled backup to an FTP server Caution A backup operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever the backup will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a backup that does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a backup at a time when the system is typically not in use To perform a scheduled backup to an FTP server In the task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Backup The Backup panel opens and displays the Immediate Backup tab 3 Click the Scheduled Backups tab The Scheduled Backups pan
278. ill have access to the MIB or in the case of SNMP v3 MIB queries 6 Click the OK button The service access point is added to the Service Access Point table NN40020 600 Chapter 6 Managing BCM50 with SNMP 141 To configure pass phrases for a service access point Click the Configuration tab Open the Administrator Access folder and then click SNMP Click the Service Access Points tab The Service Access Points panel is displayed 4 Click Add The Add Service Access Point dialog box appears 5 Complete the fields in the dialog box Table 43 Configuring Pass Phrases and SNMP Attributes Attribute Action User Name Enter the user name of the user associated with this access point Authentication Protocol Choose an authentication protocol MD5 SHA or None from the drop down list Type of Access Choose an access type Read only from the drop down list Encryption Protocol Choose an encryption protocol DEX 3DES AES or None from the drop down list Engine ID Enter the engine ID which is required for SNMP in forms Leave this field blank if this service access point is used for MIB walk Authentication Pass Phrase Enter the Authentication pass phrase for the service access point Press the Tab key when you have entered the phrase Privilege Pass Phrase Enter the Privilege pass phrase for the service access point Press the Tab key when y
279. in read only A read only field that indicates the last date and time the user account was used to log on to the system NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 113 Table 24 Current Account fields Continued Attribute Value Description Account Management read only Displays the method used to authenticate the user session local authentication or centralized authentication through a RADIUS server Exclusive access time numeric Specifies the amount of time left before other users are remaining minutes allowed to log on to the system Visible only to users with administrator level privileges Buttons Enable Exclusive Access This button is visible only to users with exclusive access privileges Opens the Enable Exclusive Access dialog box from which you enter the amount of time that you want to have exclusive access to the system Exclusive Access does not disable the access of users who are currently logged in Disable Exclusive Access Stops the exclusive access timer and allow other users back onto the system This button is visible only to users with exclusive access privileges BCM50 Administration Guide 114 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges View by Accounts The View by Accounts context panel contains the table that defines individual user accounts On these panels you define how the syst
280. include from the backup file NN40020 600 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 299 7 9 Click the OK button A warning window opens and displays information about components that will be affected by the restore operation Read the warning carefully before proceeding Click the Yes button to proceed A progress window opens When the operation is complete the Restore Complete window opens Click the OK button Restoring the factory configuration Caution A restore operation is a service affecting operation A number of services running on the BCM50 system will be stopped and then restarted using the restored configuration or application data A reboot is required if you choose Keycodes as a restore option It will take several minutes before Voicemail is working again To restore the factory configuration Your BCM50 is delivered with a backup file that was created at the factory This file can be a helpful starting point if you decide to completely re configure your BCM50 and would like to erase the settings programmed on your device Although you can select individual components to restore Nortel recommends that you restore all components when using this option 1 2 In the task panel click the Administration tab Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Restore The Restore panel opens In the Restore From selection field select Factory Default Click the Restore button The
281. information on how to install and use BCM Element Manager e Element Manager setup on page 36 e Element Manager window attributes on page 42 e Element Manager panels on page 51 e Effective use of Element Manager on page 52 e Element Manager data features on page 52 e Element Manager application logging on page 62 e BCM50 integrated launch of related applications on page 63 Element Manager setup You must perform a series of tasks before you can begin using BCM Element Manager This section contains the following procedures for preparing BCM Element Manager for use e Installing Element Manager on a Windows operating system e Installing Element Manager in a Citrix environment e Accessing BCM50 using Element Manager on page 39 e Adding a BCMSO to the Network Element tree on page 39 e Finding Network Elements on page 40 e Disconnecting from an element on page 41 e Closing the Element Manager on page 42 Installing Element Manager on a Windows operating system You can download the BCM Element Manager application from the BCM50 web page and install it on your computer at any time However you cannot connect to a BCM50 with BCM Element Manager until the BCMS50 main unit is installed and running NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 37 The BCM Element Manager has the following system requirements e Windows Windows 2000
282. ing S511 60050 Critical Unistim The UTPS Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal experienced an support group Proxy Server internal error preventing it from lproperly handling incoming connection requests from IP sets aborting 612 60060 critical Unistim An exception was Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal caught trying to support group Proxy Server initialize the EPF layer aborting 513 60061 critical Unistim UTPS failed to Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal initialize the EPF support group Proxy Server layer Aborting with error lt lt errorCode ritica nistim n unidentified fatal Contact your loca es es es es Terminal error occurred support group Proxy Server jinside EPF layer terminating 615 60064 critical Unistim The Media Path Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal Management sub support group Proxy Server system unexpectedly became offline terminating 516 60065 critical Unistim UTPS failed to Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal initialize the EPF Support group Proxy Server layer terminating with MPSMI return code of lt lt lerrorCode 617 bOTOT major Unistim UTPS is unable to Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal initialize the NNU support group Proxy Server security interface lt lt errorCode 518 60102 major Unistim Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal Application Run support group Proxy Server returned lt lt
283. ion B17 12018 major Backup and Backup and Restore Attempt another Yes Yes es Yes Restore Internal error backup and if Database could not problem perists be backed up ontact your local support group B18 T2019 warning Backup and Backup and Restore No Action Required Yes No No Restore Backup file partially incompatible B19 12020 warning Backup and Backup and Restore No Action Required Yes No No Restore Backup file partially incompatible B20 12021 major Backup and Backup and Restore Attempt another Yes Yes es Yes Restore Internal error backup and if Could not shadow _ problem perists data ontact your local Support group BCM50 Administration Guide 194 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System B21 12022 major Backup and Backup and Restore Use a different es es es es Restore File is not backup file and if recognizable The problem persists signature is the contact your local mrong length support group B322 12023 major Backup and Backup and Restore Use a different Yes Yes es Yes Restore Backup file backup file and if integrity error problem persists contact your local support group B23 12024 major Backup and Backup and Restore Attempt another Yes Yes es Yes Restore Internal error backup and if Compression problem perists incorrectly specified contact your local in configuration file support group B24 112025 major Backup and Backup and Rest
284. ion Required Yes No No Remote Gateway DN XXX Gateway Local Mode Set Firmware Upgrade in Progress 616 67005 warning Survivable Survivable Remote No Action Required Yes No No fe Remote Gateway DN XXX Gateway Normal Mode Set Redirected to Main Office 617 57006 warning Survivable Survivable Remote No Action Required Yes No No Remote Gateway DN XXX Gateway Local Mode Redirection Pending Set on call 618 6 7007 warning Survivable _ Survivable Remote No Action Required Yes No No Remote Gateway DN XXX Gateway Local Mode Firmware Upgrade Pending Set on call NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 213 warning Survivable Survivable Remote Check your local es No No Remote Gateway DN XXX configuration in the Gateway Local Mode Main system Office Parameters Not Provisioned minor Survivable Survivable Remote Check your Yes No INO 0 Remote Gateway DN XXX configuration in the Gateway Invalid ID 1 No main office endpoint in Gatekeeper database minor Survivable __ Survivable Remote Check your Yes INO INO 0 Remote Gateway DN XXxX configuration in the Gateway Invalid ID 2 ID main office unknown within the Call Server minor Survivable __ Survivable Remote Check your Yes INO INO 0 Remote Gateway DN XXX configuration in the Gateway Invalid ID
285. ion or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped This will affect the ability to use IP music No Action Required Yes No No Warning Service Manager Service Manager IP Music Service ToneSrvr has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped This will affect the ability to use IP music No Action Required Yes No No NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 187 Information Service Manager Service Manager Core Telephony has been successfully restarted No Action Required es INO No Information Service Manager Service Manager CallPilot has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No Information Service Manager Service Manager IP Terminal Service UTPS has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No Information Service Manager Manager Service Manager Hot Desking for IP Terminals HotDesking has been successfully restarted Voice over IP Gateway feps has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No 229 T0305 Information Service Service Manager No Action Required Yes VO INO INO Inform
286. ion or configuration details available for a selected item in the table an associated details panel for the selected row appears below the table BCM50 Administration Guide 52 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment In some cases further panels can appear beside the main table This is the case for restriction filters for example where there are three side by side panels that are programmed in a progressive order from left to right Tabs that do not apply to a selected item appear greyed out and behind the active tabs You can select fields that are not read only and enter new data either from your keyboard or by using the drop down box that appears when a field is selected Data entered in these fields take immediate effect unless otherwise noted on the panel or in pop up confirmation dialog boxes Refer to Element Manager data features on page 52 for details about navigating and changing information Effective use of Element Manager This section describes how Element Manager interacts with data to help the BCM50 administrator better understand how to interact with the Element Manager The view users see depends on the group to which they belong They may not be able to see all Element Manager trees or panels Users assigned to the nnadmin group will have administrator privileges and can view all panels and trees available through Element Manager See the Chapter 4 BCM5S0 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges
287. ion panel Figure 5 shows the panels displayed in the Element Manager when it is connected to a BCM50 The Task Navigation panel contains the Configuration tab and the Administration tab See Configuration task navigation panel details on page 48 for information contained in the Configuration navigation tree See Administration task navigation panel details on page 50 for information contained in the Administration navigation tree BCM50 Administration Guide 48 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment Figure 5 Element Manager window when connected to a BCM50 jnortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager 192 168 249 27 File View Metwork Session Tools Help p oS amp Refresh Element Navigation Panel 4 Task Navigation Panel Configuration ee elcome a System e Administrator Access ag Resources Hag telephony Data services g Applications Task Navigation panel Information panel Configuration task navigation panel details The Configuration task navigation panel contains the Configuration task tree that allows you to set up and configure your BCM50 and the attached devices Table 5 lists the tasks in the Configuration task tree and describes the task functions available within the information panel when the task is selected Table 5 Configuration task navigation panel headings Navigation tree heading Description Weclome View information about the current user session such as
288. ions Remote Access Packages Add or delete line pool access Class of Service Manage passwords for class of service as well as restrictions Hospitality Manage general administration wake up call settings call restrictions and room settings Hunt Groups Manage group members and line assignment Call Detail Recording Manage report options and data file transfer settings Data Services DHCP Server Manage general DHCP server settings IP ranges and lease info Router Applications Configure router settings Voice Messaging Contact Record remote voice mail system access numbers or connect to local Center CallPilot applications Launch CallPilot Manager LAN CTE Manage clients add or delete privileges Music Manage music settings Administration task navigation panel details The Administration task navigation panel contains the Administration task tree that provides access to the BCMS0 that allows you to monitor and maintain your BCM50 Table 6 lists the tasks in the Administration task tree and describes the task functions available within the information panel when the task is selected Table 6 Administration task navigation panel headings Navigation tree heading Description General Alarms View alarm details clear alarm log or reset LEDs Alarm Settings View alarm details and test alarms SNMP Trap Destinations Add delete or modify trap
289. itical Operating Operating System Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes System Critical operating support group system error Kernel panic information Software Software Update No Action Required Yes No No fe Updates Software update applied successfully information Software Software Update No Action Required Yes No No Updates Software upgrade applied successfully information Software Software Update No Action Required Yes No No Updates Software update started information Software Software Update No Action Required Yes No No Updates Software upgrade started information Software Software Update No Action Required Yes No No fe Updates Software update scheduled information Software Software Update No Action Required Yes No No Updates Scheduled software update completed information Software Software Update No Action Required Yes No No Updates Software update removed BCM50 Administration Guide 168 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 76 2300 critical Software Software Update Contact your local es es es es Updates Software update support group failed to apply 77 major Software Software Update Retry software Yes Yes Yes Yes Updates Software update update and if failed to transfer problem persists files contact your local support group 78 critical Software Software Update Contact your loc
290. ive numbering Note A password complexity higher than 0 will ensure that the user name is not used as the password Check the minimum length setting to ensure that it is equal to or greater than the complexity level Lockout on Failed Logon history Enable lockout check box When checked specifies that enable lockout rules apply to users Lockout counter digits Specifies the number of times the user can attempt to enter an invalid password before the user is locked out Default 25 for increased security set this number to 5 Refer to View by Accounts on page 114 Locked Out box and View by Accounts General on page 116 Login History Lockout duration minutes Specifies the amount of time after the user is locked out before min they are allowed to login again Reset the lockout counter to zero Default 30 Lockout counter minutes Specifies the number of minutes after a lockout before the reset lockout counter is automatically reset to zero Default 30 Example If the lockout counter reset is set at 30 minutes and a user enters invalid passwords but does not reach the lockout counter threshold then waits 30 minutes before trying again the lockout counter resets and begins counting from 1 again If the user enters invalid passwords until the lockout counter threshold is reached the Lockout duration determines when the user can sign back onto the system Password Expiry Enable passwor
291. k Passcode field Click OK Adding Telset access for a user As an administrator you can provide an existing user with access to the system through a set based connection To add Telset access for a user 1 O a Ff ODN Select Configuration Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges View by Account tab Select an existing user on the Accounts table and click the Modify button In the Telset User ID field enter the user s identifier In the Telset Password field enter the user s telset password Re enter the telset password in the Confirm Password dialog box Click OK Deleting a user account As an administrator you can delete user accounts when they are not needed NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 93 To delete a user account 1 Select Configuration Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges and click the View by Account tab Select a user on the Accounts table Click the Delete button In the confirmation box click Yes to remove the user account from the system Changing a user s password As an administrator you can change a user s forgotten password or reset the user password for each user to enforce regular password change policy You can also force a password change when the user logs in includes changing default passwords after the system is installed To further increase access security minimize the number of user accounts especia
292. k in the Account will be disabled field and choose the date and time the account is to be disabled On the General panel ensure that Enable account expiry is selected NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 97 Enabling and disabling exclusive access As the administrator you can enable or disable exclusive access for special activities or maintenance The administrator performing maintenance tasks can lock the system during the maintenance period When you enable exclusive access this capability prevents new logins but does not affect existing logins This functionality is available to administrators only To enable disable exclusive access 1 Select Configuration Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges Current Account tab Click Enable Exclusive Access In the Enable Exclusive Access dialog box select a duration in minutes from the drop down box that represents the amount of time you want to have exclusive access to the system The timer begins to count down When it reaches zero exclusive access ends If you no longer need exclusive access click Disable Exclusive Access to stop the timer and end exclusive access User account and user group management fundamentals This section contains information on the following topics User accounts on page 97 Default passwords on page 99 Default groups on page 99 Default access privileges excluding set based privileges on page 1
293. k the CSU alarms on page 232 e To check carrier failure alarms on page 232 e To check bipolar violations on page 232 e To check short term alarms on page 233 e To check defects on page 233 e CbC limit metrics on page 233 Statistics collected by the system The system accumulates three performance parameters e errored seconds ES e severely errored seconds SES e unavailable seconds UAS These parameters are defined according to TIA 547A Errored seconds are enhanced to include control slip CS events Only near end performance data is recorded The internal CSU continuously monitors the received signal and detects four types of transmission defects e any active carrier failure alarms CFA such as loss of signal LOS out of frame OOF alarm indication signal AIS and remote alarm indication RAI NN40020 600 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics 231 the number of bipolar violations that occurred in the last minute any defects that occurred in the last minute such as loss of signal LOS out of frame OOF and alarm indication signal AIS the number of milliseconds of short term alarms in the last minute such as loss of signal LOS out of frame OOF alarm indication signal AIS and remote alarm indication RAI A short term alarm is declared when the detected defects persist for tens of milliseconds A carrier failure alarm CFA is a duration of carrier
294. ke ieee ee tee ee eked oe 118 View by Groups Members ccscecedcs ba eke es ee enue ee sacs keene sanat 120 BCM50 security fundamentals 00 cee ete 120 Secure network protocols and encryption 0 0000 e eee eee 121 SECUN GUNS cock cadet sotuneeheYeeiadbessuedeadessdqeds EAEE 122 System security considerations 0 0 0000 c cee 122 FINS tatcaucne luna yediendewedd este cae ade Eau ae he ee ees 123 Secunty COMMCALE rsi cee enstoarde eves ene ee senate eno eeerewneeee ds 124 Ste UO MNCONOMN rarene Gawd and on wee Sanae aiea bn Sank Lim si 124 Chapter 5 Using the BCM50 Hardware Inventory 0 00 cece eee eee 125 About the BCM50 Hardware Inventory 0000 e eee eee 125 Viewing and updating information about the BCM50 system 126 Viewing and updating information about the BCM50 main unit 126 Viewing and updating BCM50 system expansion information 127 Viewing and updating other information about the BCM50 system 128 Viewing information about devices 0000 c eee ee eee 129 Viewing additional information about the BCM50 hardware inventory 130 BCM50 Administration Guide 10 Contents eee ee COE eee ee LAE ee ee er eee eC ee eee ee eee 132 Chapter 6 Managing BCM50 with SNMP 0 0 0 0c cece eee eee eee 133 Overview of BCM50 support for SNMP 000000 e eee eee 133 Configuring routers to use Element Manag
295. ked so that you can determine the exact software release level of a BCM50 to the component level You can view the complete inventory of software installed on the BCM50 The Software Inventory table displays all the software components installed on the system the functional group and the software version of each component Table 105 lists the information displayed in the Software Component Version Information table Table 105 Information displayed in the Software Component Version Information table Column Description Component The name of the software component installed on the BCM50 For example backup recovery Group The functional group to which the software component belongs For example Operating System Version The version of the software component BCM50 Administration Guide 340 Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates You can change the order of the information displayed in the table by clicking a column heading and dragging it to a new place in the table You can also sort the information in a column by descending or ascending order by clicking the column heading To view the BCM50 software inventory In the task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Software Management folder and then click the Software Inventory task The Software Inventory panel opens 3 View the details in the Software Component Version Information table Nortel BCM 4 0 E
296. kup is to occur Day of Month Select the day of the month on which the scheduled backup is to occur Time Select the time at which the scheduled backup is to occur 10 Click the OK button The scheduled backup is displayed in the Scheduled Backups table Performing a scheduled backup to a USB storage device Caution A backup operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever the backup will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a backup that does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a backup at a time when the system is typically not in use To perform a scheduled backup to a USB storage device 1 Inthe task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Backup The Backup panel opens and displays the Immediate Backup tab 3 Click the Scheduled Backups tab The Scheduled Backups panel opens 4 Click the Add button The Add Scheduled Backup window opens In the Backup To selection field select USB Storage Device Click the OK button The Add Scheduled Backup window opens 7 Inthe Optional Components table select or clear the check box to include or exclude these components from the backup operation BCM50 Administration Guide 286 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 8 Configure the schedule attributes Table 80 Conf
297. kups Restore Restore Administration or Configuration settings Logs Log Management Perform immediate or scheduled log transfers Types of logs are configuration change security alarm system and component diagnostic Software Management Software Updates Scheduled updates cancel updates in progress or retrieve new updates Software Update History View details of software updates and remove updates Software Inventory View software details Element Manager panels The BCMS50 Element Manager Configuration and Administration trees group the various tasks and functions required to configure the BCM50 or perform administrative tasks When either the Configuration tab or the Administration tab is selected the associated task tree provides access to the information required to complete the tasks For example all tasks in the Configuration tab are configuration tasks organized by workflow Various types of administrative tasks are presented in the Administration tab such as monitoring alarms or performing backups Some tasks have multiple tabs within the Information panel Information on the panels may be grouped by related information or tasks Repetitive information such as line programming DN programming and system speed dial is displayed in table format in the Element Manager These tables allow you to change the data display apply filtering sort data or copy information between cells If there is additional informat
298. lable Power LED solid green Status LED flashing green No Action Required Yes No No Information Startup Sequence System Startup Startup complete Service Manager and Scheduling Services available Power LED solid green Status LED solid green No Action Required Yes No No Information Platform Status Monitor Platform Status Monitor Power recovered No Action Required Recovery alarm for corresponding alarms 11200 and 11400 Yes No No 267 T1003 Information Platform Status Monitor Platform Status Monitor Hard drive space recovered No Action Required Recovery alarm for corresponding Yes No No larms 11201 BCM50 Administration Guide 190 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 268 11004 Information Platform Platform Status No Action Required Yes INO INO 0 Status Monitor Memory Recovery alarm for Monitor recovered corresponding alarm 11202 269 11005 Information Platform Platform Status No Action Required Yes No No Status Monitor CPU load Recovery alarm for Monitor recovered corresponding alarm 11203 270 11006 Information Platform Platform Status No Action Required Yes INO INO 0 Status Monitor LAN Recovery alarm for Monitor recovered corresponding alarm 11204 271 1011 Information Platform Platform Status No Action R
299. lder 9 Click the Save button When the backup is complete the Backup Complete message appears 10 Click the OK button BCM50 Administration Guide 278 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data Performing an immediate backup to a network folder Caution A backup operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever the backup will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a backup that does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a backup at a time when the system is typically not in use To perform an immediate backup to a network folder 1 In the task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Backup The Backup panel opens and displays the Immediate Backup tab In the Backup To selection field select Network Folder Configure the Network Folder attributes Table 73 Configure Network Folder attributes Attribute Action Network Folder Enter the hostname or IP address of the network folder and the resource name For example enter lt server gt lt resource gt User Name Enter the user name associated with the network folder Password Enter the password associated with the network folder Directory Enter the path to the subdirectory optional Click the Backup button The Backup window opens
300. le categories you want to include or exclude from the transfer as appropriate 9 Click the OK button The modified scheduled log transfer is displayed in the Scheduled Log Transfer table To delete a scheduled log transfer 1 Click the Administration tab and then open the Logs folder 2 Click the Log Management task The Log Management panel opens 3 Click the Scheduled Log Transfer tab In the Scheduled Log Transfer table select a schedule Click the Delete button A confirmation window opens 6 Click the Yes button The scheduled log transfer is deleted from the Scheduled Log Transfer table Transferring log files using the BCM50 Web page You can transfer log files using the BCM50 Web page if you cannot access the BCM50 Element Manager When you use the BCM50 Web page to transfer log files you cannot choose the log file categories that you will transfer all the log files in all the categories will be transferred Using the BCM50 Web Page to transfer log files to your personal computer 1 In your web browser type the IP address of the BCM50 and click the Go button The login screen opens 2 Log in to the BCM50 using the same username and password that you use to log into a BCM5S0 using the Element Manager The BCM50 Web page opens NN40020 600 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs 313 3 Click the Administrators Applications link 0 oso erne plore O x File Edit view Favorites Tools Help ay
301. lement Manager 192 168 249 27 15 x File View Network Session Tools Help g o ri Refresh g Auto refresh Element Navigation Panel Task Navigation Panel Software Inventory Software Component Version Information q system Status lelephony Metrics Utities backup and Restore Logs ea Sotware Management Software Updates 40 0 0 13 10 Software Update History ory IBCM_ISDNProvider 41 10 90 105 10 IBCM_MONITOR 41 0 0 01 2 41 10 130 106 10 IBCM_NetLinkMigrProvider 41 20 130 66 10 IBCM_NetworkinterfacesPravider Operating System 40 0 0 10 10 IBCM_NetworkStatisticsProvider Operating System 41 10 40 109 10 IBCM_PPPoEProvider System 41 10 130 107 10 m E L ca 4 M15 Laa 16 WaT jv Include ACKed alarms NN40020 600 341 Chapter 14 Accounting Management This chapter describes how to manage accounts in a BCMS0 system Overview of accounting management BCM50 Call Detail Recording CDR is an application that records call activity Each time a telephone call is made to or from a BCM detailed information about the call can be captured in a Call Detail Recording file You can use this information to e create billing records using third party software e monitor call activity and therefore infer information about system utilization and other indicators of system and services activity Note CDR monitors only incoming and outgoing calls It does not monitor calls gt within the BCM50 system About Call Detail Rec
302. lement Manager navigation tree select Administration gt Telephony Metrics gt Trunk Module Metrics The window displays the expansion locations for the modules connected to the system 2 Select the module that you want to view For example Expansion 1 See Figure 32 BCM50 Administration Guide 228 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics Figure 32 Viewing Trunk Module metrics Nortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager 192 168 249 27 Network gt z System status Sa BRI ST4 N A Not equipped Lg Log Management f Sotware Management 3 Click Start Loopback Test button to start the network test without having to remove the BCM50 4 Select a loopback type The options are e payload e kline e card edge e continuity 5 Click Stop Loopback Test when done the test of the network When you click on a module in the process above a new menu appears Details for Module lt number gt with the following tabs e CSU Alarms e CSU Alarm History e Performance e Performance History e D Channel e B Channels NN40020 600 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics 229 Viewing Performance History information The Performance History tab displays the performance information over 15 minute intervals collected in the past 24 hours The performance information collected includes the number of errored seconds severely errored seconds and unavailable seconds over each 15 minute interval 1 On t
303. les document the system software level from which the backup was taken They are located in the archive softwarelevel tar gz Backup archives transferred to servers or to attached USB storage devices are named according to the system name of the BCM50 the date and the time of the backup Archives are prefixed with Bak_ For example an archive created on July 8 2005 at 1 52 55 pm is named Bak_acme melbourne_20050708T135255 tar BCM50 Administration Guide 274 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data For USB storage devices an additional copy of the backup archive is stored in the file backup tar the BCM will reference this file during a USB restore operation Only the most recent backup to the USB storage device is available for a restore operation To access historical backup archives attach the USB storage device to a personal computer and use the Restore from My Computer option Backup destinations Table 72 lists the destinations to which you can back up configuration and application data Whichever destination you choose the backup operation replaces the BCM s own copy of the archive so that a copy of the most recent backup always remains on the BCM50 You can use this to restore your BCMS0 without transferring a backup from an external device or server Table 72 Backup destinations Destination Description BCM50 For an immediate backup saves backup archives to the hard drive of the BCM50 You cannot s
304. lication from the BCM50 web page See BCMS5S0 web page on page 31 for a description of the BCM50 web page The procedure Installing Element Manager on a Windows operating system on page 37 provides detailed steps for downloading and installing the BCM Element Manager on a Windows computer BCM50 Administration Guide 34 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment Managing BCM50 with Telset administration While BCM Element Manager is the primary management application BCMS0 also supports the programming of telephony and applications areas of BCM50 through set based administration This allows installers already familiar with this interface to perform programming from the keypad of any telephone connected to the BCM50 device This alleviates the need for access to a computer at the customer site For more information about using Telset programming on the BCM50 refer to the following documents BCMS0 Telset Administration Guide NN40020 604 e CallPilot Telephone Administration Guide NN40090 500 e Contact Center Telephone Administration Guide NN40040 600 Managing BCM50 Voicemail and ContactCenter CallPilot Manager The integrated voicemail and contact center applications are managed using CallPilot Manager which can be launched from Element Manager This is the same application used to manage voicemail and contact center applications for the BCM Release 3 software stream For more information about using CallPilot Manage
305. lidate Device R Pisconnect a Refresh s Auto retresh Customer Support Element Navigation Panel Task Navigati About Monitor Launch BCM Monitor Configuration Administration eneral F system Metrics lelephony Metrics Egg Vuiities o payana _ Irace koute Ethernet Activity a keset _ Diagnostic settings Backup and kestore Logs Sy Software Management F F BCM50 Administration Guide 68 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment Field level Help When you position the cursor over a field a pop up box provides a brief description of the information required in the field Figure 18 shows an example of a field level help pop up box Figure 18 Field level Help L jNortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager 192 168 249 27 Fie view Network Session Tools Help gat p ECE g Refresh 45 Aute refrest Element Navigation Panel 4 Task Navigation Panel System Identification Configuration I Description Jorny4 9 Systemname jecnw4o ime _ Keycodes Administrator Access Resources Ha Hoy lelephony urrent Software Version Vata Services Country or region horn arpa the BCM g Applications Voice Messaging Cor LAN Cle __ Music Lot Version 1 00 0 29 Context sensitive Help You can view context sensitive Help by clicking on a navigation tr
306. lients IP Set Details RTP Sessions UIP Line Monitor Usage Indicators Used licenses 0of1 DN Type IP Pot RTP Session Info 120xx Sets Enabled Connected 0 Active on call 0 m Wireless Sets Enabled 0 Connected Active on call 0 IP Trunks Used licenses N A Active on call 0 MCDN over IP Enabled RTP Sessions tab The RTP Sessions tab shows details about RTP Real Time Protocol over UDP sessions which involve either the BCM50 system or an IP set controlled by the BCM50 system You can use the information in this tab to monitor the direct path between two IP sets The tab displays information about local IP endpoints two sets both connected to the BCM50 combinations of IP to IP TDM to IP and TDM to TDM an estimate of network traffic generated by RTP sessions between TDM devices or local IP devices local to remote IP endpoints combinations of IP to IP TDM to IP an estimate of network traffic generated by RTP sessions remote IP endpoints IP to IP anestimate of network traffic generated by RTP sessions between remote IP endpoints the number of allocated Media Gateways that are providing a connection between a TDM device and an IP endpoint The RTP Sessions tab also displays detailed information about active RTP sessions The RTP Session Details area displays the following lin
307. lly the administrator accounts and change passwords regularly A Security note An integral part of your system security is password management This To change a user s password 1 Select Configuration Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges View by Account tab Select the user record from the table and click Modify In the Modify Account window delete the asterisks in the Password or Telset password field Enter a new password and click OK Re enter the password in the Confirm Password dialog box Provide the user with this password and request that they change it as soon as possible through the Current User panel Current Account on page 111 or click on Change Password on Login to make a password change mandatory Changing the current user s password As a user or an administrator you must change your password periodically To change the current user s password 1 Select Configuration Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges Current Account panel 2 Select the password field that needs to be changed BCM50 Administration Guide 94 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges Enter a new password that conforms with the system password policies which are defined by the administrator during system setup A confirmation dialog box appears In the confirmation dialog box enter the new password again Click OK The password takes effect the next time you log in
308. locked out 115 lockout counter 78 minimum password length 77 session time out 79 setting up callback 92 successful login 117 Utilities BCM Monitor 245 Utilities Ethernet Activity 266 Utilities ping 265 Utilities Reset 267 Utilities Trace Route 266 V V 90 setting up callback 92 Voice Ports tab 255 W Warm reset telephony services 268 NN40020 600
309. log box Delete Deletes the selected user account Modify Opens the Modify Account dialog box Security note You cannot delete the nnadmin user therefore ensure that you change the default password as soon as possible after system setup Keep a record of the password in a safe place If you select a user on the Users list two more panels appear in the lower frame e The General panel allows you to see the current status of the account See View by Accounts General on page 116 e The Group Membership panel allows you to associate the account to group profiles which determines what type of access the user has See View by Accounts Group Membership on page 117 BCM50 Administration Guide 116 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges View by Accounts General The General panel provides user account information and account control settings Table 26 describes each field on this panel Table 26 View by Accounts General fields Attribute Value Description D alphanumeric Displays the descriptive name and information for the user or the user Description function This field may be left blank Account Expriy disabled on Enable account expiry check box When selected specifies that the user account is scheduled to automatically expire at the specified date and time Account will be date Specifies the date and time when the use
310. m 177 critical Service Manager Service Manager Modem Call Control modemcc has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager This will affect Dial In and Dial Out using the integrated modem Reboot system and contact your local support group es es es es critical Service Manager Service Manager System Set Based Admin Feature9 8 ssba has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager Reboot system and contact your local support group Yes Yes es es critical Service Manager Service Manager Computer Telephony Service Cte has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager This will affect LAN CTE and the Line Monitor in BCM Monitor Reboot system and contact your local support group Yes Yes es Yes TOTT2 critical Service Manager Manager Service Manager Line Monitor Service Ims has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager This will affect the Line Monitor in BCM Monitor Media Services Manager Msm has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager This will affect all telephony operations on the system Reboot system and contact your local support group contact your local support group Yes Yes Yes Yes 169 ITOTT3 Critical Service Service Manager Reboot system and
311. m is the main unit The six BCM50 models are divided into two series standard and BRI The BRI or b series main units include BRI ports that replace the four analog lines on the standard series The two series are as follows e Standard series BCM5S0 main unit with Telephony only The BCM50 main unit provides call processing and simple data networking functions It provides connections for 12 digital phones 4 PSTN lines 4 analog station ports and 4 connections for auxiliary equipment auxiliary ringer page relay page output and music source The BCM50 main unit does not have a router but it does have 4 LAN ports one is the OAM port for technicians and the other three are for basic LAN connectivity BCM5S0a main unit with ADSL router The BCM50a main unit provides all of the same core functionality as the BCM50 main unit and it also has an integrated ADSL router for advanced data applications BCM50e main unit with Ethernet router The BCM50e main unit provides all of the same core functionality as the BCM50 main unit and it also has an integrated Ethernet router for advanced data applications e BRI series b series available only in EMEA and APAC regions BCMS50b main unit The BCM50b main unit provides similar functionality to the BCMS50 main unit The difference is that the BCM50b main unit has two integrated BRI ports that replace the four analog lines on the RJ 21 telephony connector BCM5S0ba main unit with
312. m password length 77 minimum user ID length 77 password complexity 77 user session timeout 79 enable lockout 78 enable telset interface 76 Ethernet activity Viewing 267 Ethernet Metrics 266 exclusive access time remaining 113 F failed login 117 H Hard reset telephony services 269 Hunt Group Metrics See Metrics l Immediate backups performing 275 277 278 279 280 Info tab 253 IP Devices tab 255 ISDN modem link setting up callback 92 K key private security key 124 L last failed login 117 Line Monitor tab 260 Lines viewing 261 locked out 115 lockout counter reset 78 Lockout duration 78 lockout policy lockout duration 78 Log files extracting 316 Log files retrieving 303 Log files transferring with the BCM Web page 312 Log files using the BCM Element Manager 304 Log files viewing with the Log Browser 318 Log Management Diagnostic logs 302 Operational Logs 302 Sensitive logs 302 System information logs 303 Logging UIP data 259 log in last successful 112 security message disable 76 maintenance exclusive access time 113 Mean Opinion Scores See QoS Monitor Media Card tab 254 Metrics System Metrics 219 CbC Limit Metrics 233 Accessing 234 Diagnostic Settings 238 Hunt Group Metrics 235 Accessing 236 NTP Metrics 225 Accessing 226 PSTN Fallback Metrics 237 Accessing 237 QoS Monitor 219 Refreshing 223 Viewing 222 Trunk Module Metrics 227 B Channel 229 230 CSU Alarm Histo
313. m status For detailed information on the Startup Profile see the BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide NN40020 302 Monitoring BCM50 BCM Monitor BCM Monitor is a monitoring and diagnostics tool that can monitor BCM systems It is installed as part of the BCM Element Manager installation See Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities on page 245 for information about the BCM Monitor for BCM50 Managing BCM50 remotely with SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a standard for network management BCMS0 supports a number of standard MIBs including e MIB II RFC 1213 e Entity MIB RFC 2737 BCM50 Administration Guide 36 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment e Host MIB RFC 2790 e IF MIB RFC2863 e SNMP Framework MIB RFC2261 SNMPv1 v2c and v3 are supported as well as SNMP traps See Chapter 6 Managing BCMS0 with SNMP on page 133 for more information about using Element Manager with SNMP Element Manager The BCM Element Manager is a client based management application that runs on a Windows computer or on a Citrix server The Element Manager allows for connection to BCM50 devices over an IP network It is used to configure administer and monitor BCMS0 devices The BCM Element Manager allows you to connect to the BCM50 devices to be managed either through an IP network connection or through the craftsperson OAM port on BCMS0 devices that include a craftsperson port This section includes the following
314. ment Model e BCMS50 Management Interfaces e BCMS50 Administration Guide overview About BCM50 The BCM50 system provides private network and telephony management capability to small and medium sized businesses The BCM50 system e integrates voice and data capabilities IP Telephony gateway functions and data routing features into a single telephony system e enables you to create and provide telephony applications for use in a business environment Business Element Manager is the primary management application for BCMS50 systems Formerly known as the BCM Element Manager the Business Element Manager manages BCM systems as well as other devices in Nortel s SMB portfolio The Business Element Manager encompasses not only telephony programming but also backup management software update management and log management For more information about the Business Element Manager see BCM50 Management Environment on page 31 The BCM50 system includes the following key components e hardware e applications BCM50 hardware The BCMS0 system includes the following key elements e BCMS50 main units e BCMS50 expansion unit e BCMS50 media bay modules MBM Analog direct inward dialing ADID BRIM BCM50 Administration Guide 24 Chapter 2 Overview of BCM50 Administration CTM4 CTM8 DTM GATM4 GATM8 4x16 ASM8 ASM8 GASM DSM16 DSM32 DDIM Main units The main hardware component in the BCM50 syste
315. mount of log data being collected and the speed of your devices and network To perform an immediate log transfer to your personal computer 1 2 Click the Administration tab and then open the Logs folder Click the Log Management task The Log Management panel opens Click the Immediate Log Transfer tab In the Transfer To selection field select My Computer Click the Transfer button The Transfer To window opens Select the log file categories that you want to include in the log file Click the OK button A confirmation window opens and displays applicable warnings NN40020 600 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs 307 8 Click the Yes button to initiate the transfer The Progress Update window opens When the log archive is ready to be saved the The Save window opens 9 Select the directory in which you want to save the log file transfer 10 In the File Name field enter the name of the log file followed by a tar extension For example log 1 tar Note If you do not specify a tar extension the transfer proceeds and the file will be written to the specified location The file however will be of an unknown type and your utilities may not operate with it Rename the file with the extension tar by right clicking on the file and renaming it 11 Click the Save button The Transfer Complete window opens 12 Click the OK button The log file is saved as a tar file in the location you specified Pe
316. mplexity 77 post log in message 76 private security key 124 system lockout counter 78 telset user ID 115 120 Unified Manager considerations 122 uploading a certificate 124 user ID 115 120 Service access points adding 140 Service access points deleting 141 Service access points details 141 Service access points modifying 142 Services access points configuring 140 session timeout 79 Snapshots dynamic 250 Snapshots static 249 SNMP trap destinations deleting 144 145 SNMP adding community strings 139 SNMP adding management stations 137 SNMP adding trap destinations 142 SNMP configuring community strings 138 SNMP configuring general settings 135 SNMP configuring service access points 140 SNMP configuring settings 136 SNMP configuring the agent 136 SNMP configuring trap destinations 142 SNMP deleting community strings 139 SNMP deleting management stations 138 SNMP management stations 136 SNMP modifying trap destinations 143 SNMP support for 133 SNMP supported MIBs 133 343 SNMP supported versions 133 Software inventory viewing 339 Software Update Overview 323 Scheduled Update Adding a new update 333 Modifying a new update 336 Update History BCM50 Administration Guide 352 Index Removing an update from Software History 337 Software updates applying 325 Software updates deleting a schedule 337 Software updates history 337 Software updates obtaining 323 Software updates r
317. ms in the Alarm Banner Select or clear the Include ACKed Alarms check box in the Alarm Banner Using the alarm set You can view core telephony alarms on a telephone set on the BCM system This allows a system administrator to monitor alarm activity without having a BCM Element Manager and a personal computer You can specify the telephone to serve as the alarm set in the BCM Element Manager The telephone set used for alarms must have a 2 line display and three soft keys The alarm set displays an alarm as follows XXXXXK YYYY Where XXXXX is the alarm ID and YYYY is additional alarm information The following options are available when an alarm is generated to the alarm set e Time indicates the date and time when the alarm occurred e Clear use this soft key to remove the alarm from the alarm set Note Clearing an alarm from the alarm set does not change the status of alarms on the BCM Element Manager or reset the LEDs on the front panel of the unit Note When an alarm is dislayed on the alarm set it remains visible until you clear the alarm using a softkey on the alarm set More recent alarms will not be displayed until the current alarm is cleared on the alarm set BCM50 Administration Guide 154 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System Figure 26 shows an example of an alarm on the alarm set Figure 26 Alarm set alarm oo To specify the alarm set Click the Configuration tab O
318. n support group Proxy Server lt exceptionType k lt FORCING EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN information Unistim Running the No Action Required Yes No No Terminal DEBUG version of Proxy Server UTPS version lt lt UtpsVersion information Unistim unning the No Action Required No No No 0 Terminal RELEASE version Proxy Server jof UTPS version lt lt UtpsVersion information Unistim BOM running in No Action Required Yes No No Terminal ISRG BCM mode Proxy Server information Unistim Terminal lt lt dn lt lt is No Action Required Yes No No fe Terminal lbeing deregistered Proxy Server from OAM information Unistim The IP Terminal at No Action Required Yes No No fe Terminal lt lt lpAddress lt lt is Proxy Server NOT configured to connect to the CM s published IP address please correct the IP Terminal s configuration information jUnistim System running in No Action Required Yes No No Terminal SRG mode Proxy Server information Unistim System NOT No Action Required No No No Terminal running in SRG Proxy Server mode information Unistim SRG Connection No Action Required Yes INO INO 0 Terminal Re established Proxy Server information Unistim Terminal lt lt dn lt lt No Action Required Yes No No fe Terminal firmware version Proxy Server being upgraded from lt lt loldFirwareVesrion lt lt to lt lt newFirmwareVersio n information Unistim Packet Loss No Action Required Yes Yes I
319. n the BCM50 management applications and BCM50 management tasks e Nortel s Contact Information A list of Nortel contact numbers BCM50 Administration Guide 32 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment The applications available from the BCM50 webpage are supported on Windows XP and Windows 2000 operating systems Some applications such as BCM Monitor are also supported on a Citrix operating system Table 2 Applications available on BCM50 web page Application User Administrator Administrator Management Tools Element Manager N Y Desktop Assistant Pro AE N Y NCM for BCM N Y BCM Monitor N Y CDR Clients N Y BCM MIBs N Y RADIUS Dictionary SSH Client PUTTY BCM Logs N Y Contact Center Applications zZ lt Reporting for Contact Center N Y Contact Center Reporting N Y Server Multimedia Contact Center N Y IP View Softboard N Y Digital Mobility Tools Digital Mobility Controller N Y Digital Mobility Service Tool N Y Templates Startup Profile Template N Y Factory Default Programming N Y Record User Applications Desktop Assistant Y Y Desktop Assistant Pro Y Y Unified Messaging Y Y Personal Call Manager Y Y LAN CTE Client Y Y IP Software Phone 2050 Y Y Mobile Voice Client 2050 Y Y Nortel VPN Client N Y Nortel Developer Program Developer Program N Y NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Envi
320. n Chassis Present ID Field Replaceable MBM E Asset ID MBM Field Replaceable L4 Lg n m ia m Expansion Chassis A 4 z a MO m0 Lo Jv Include ACKed alarms Viewing and updating BCM50 system expansion information The BCM50 system expansion area in the System tab provides information about the expansion unit connected to the BCM main unit if any If an expansion unit is present and populated with an MBM this information is also provided Table 34 provides information about the fields in the BCM50 system expansion area MIB Note Asterisk items can also be remotely queried by SNMP using the Entity Table 34 Expansion unit area and Fiber expansion media bay module area Column Name Column Description Column Value Read Write Expansion Chassis Lists the number of the expansion 1 or 2 Read chassis Present Indicates if an expansion unit to Yes if checked Read main unit is present Asset ID Customer defined tracking Initially zero Write number Field Replaceable Indicates if the unit is considered True if checked Read field replaceable by the manufacturer BCM50 Administration Guide 128 Chapter 5 Using the BCM50 Hardware Inventory Table 34 Expansion unit area and Fiber expansion media bay module area Column Name Column Description Column Value Read Write MBM Use the drop down menu to Drop down menu Write identify the type of MBM
321. n about how to configure a dial up interface as a primary connection for auto SNMP dial out refer to the BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Alarm severity levels The terminology used for alarm severity levels in the Alarms panel and in SNMP traps is not the same Table 46 lists Alarms panel terminology and the equivalent SNMP trap type Table 46 Terminology used for alarm severity levels Alarm Banner SNMP Trap Type Critical Error Major Error Minor Warning Warning Information Information Information While the BCM50 fault management system denotes the source of an alarm as ComponentID the SNMP system denotes the sources of this information as a trap of source eventSource BCM50 Administration Guide 146 Chapter 6 Managing BCM50 with SNMP NN40020 600 147 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System This chapter contains information about managing alarms generated by the BCM system and administering alarm settings The chapter provides information about the following e anoverview of BCM fault management tools e anoverview of BCM alarms e alarms and log files e administering alarms e configuring alarm settings e BCM alarm list e alarm severities Overview of BCM fault management You can view and manage real time alarms generated by the BCM system Alarms arise from components that are running on the system these alarms indicate faul
322. n one panel a Modify button may appear Click on this button to bring up a dialog box where you can change information as required To delete table settings click on the row you want to delete from the table then click the Delete button You can select one line or you can use the Shift or Ctrl buttons to delete a group of entries Figure 6 shows examples of how to select table entries for deletion Figure 6 Deleting table entries Exceptions Exceptions Select one Rocio ROstrO entry Roo Use Control key to select several entries Use Shift key ROstrO3 select range ROstrO4 ROstrO5 Add Delete Copying table information You can copy table information using the copy and paste method on tables that require a large amount of propagation of duplicate data For example tables within the Sets and Lines task tree items contain the copy and paste functionality BCM50 Administration Guide 54 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment Use the following steps to copy data within a table 1 Select the row from table that you want to copy by clicking on it 2 Press the Copy button 3 Select the row or rows to which you want to paste the information You can select multiple rows to paste data in by pressing either the Shift or Ctrl key 4 Press the Paste button Either the Paste Set Data or the Paste Line Data dialog box appears depending on whether you are copying data within the Sets or Lin
323. nal network and exceeded on the Irun loopback tests DTM The module is on the circuit to in a no new calls check for network state issues If long term alarms occur get your network provider to check the ircuit during problem conditions minor Core Core Telephony Check your cabling Yes INO INO Telephony Remote Alarm from any DTM Indication short modules to the term alarm external network and threshold has been iun loopback tests exceeded onthe on the circuit to DTM The module is check for network in ano new calls issues If long term state alarms occur get your network provider to check the ircuit during problem conditions minor Core Core Telephony Check your cabling Yes No No Telephony Loss of Frame from any DTM short term alarm modules to the threshold has been external network and exceeded on the Irun loopback tests DTM The module is on the circuit to in a no new calls check for network state issues If long term alarms occur get your network provider to check the ircuit during Grobler conditions BCM50 Administration Guide 166 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 54 B34 minor Core Core Telephony Check your cabling Yes No No Telephony Alarm Indication from any DTM short term alarm modules to the threshold has been external network and exceeded onthe Irun loopback tests DTM The module is on the circuit to in ano new calls check for ne
324. nate means of authenticating the user 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to configure the secondary server Vendor specific attributes The BCM requires Vendor Specific Attributes VSAs to be present in RADIUS client requests The BCM Webpage provides a RADIUS dictionary that defines the Nortel specific attributes The attributes in the dictionary are defined for a Funk RADIUS server however the RADIUS client in BCM complies with RFC 2865 and can be used on other RADIUS servers In an ACCESS REQUEST message the BCM will look for the attributes listed in Table 18 Table 18 Attributes in an ACCESS REQUEST message Attribute Name Description NAS Identifier The hostname of the BCM string IP The IP address of the BCM Calling Station ID The IP address DN of the client attempting the request In an ACCESS ACCEPT message the BCM will look for the attributes listed in Table 19 BCM50 Administration Guide 86 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges Table 19 Attributes in an ACCESS ACCEPT message Attribute Name Value Description RADIUS attribute type 26 Vendor specific attribute Vendor type 562 Northern Telecom Nortel Vendor attribute type 166 BCM privilege level of the user being authenticated Enter this level as a hex integer Privilege level 0 36 see Privilege level of user entered in Table 20 big endian network byte order BCM requires
325. nd a new file is started when the BCM system is rebooted You can retrieve the alarms systemlog files the current file plus the three previous files from the BCM system using the Log Management task in the BCM Element Manager You can view the files using the BCM Log Browser For more information see Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs on page 301 Alarm severities Alarm severities are as follows Table 48 Alarm Severities Alarm Severity Description Critical Immediate corrective action is required due to conditions such as loss of service loss of bandwidth outage loss of data and or functionality Major Urgent corrective action is required due to conditions such as pending loss of service outage loss of data and or functionality Minor Corrective action is required to prevent eventual service affecting degeneration Warning Indicates the detection of a potential or impending service affecting condition and that some diagnostic action is required Information Indicates audit type information such as configuration changes By default alarms are displayed in the Alarm Banner The BCM sends SNMP traps for alarms with a severity of Major and Critical The only exception is PVQM alarms for these alarms the BCM sends SNMP traps for all severity levels Table 49 provides the default mapping of each severity level against the Alarms Panel alarms set LEDs and SNMP Table 49 Default mapping of
326. nd manage technical support cases Getting Help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center If you don t find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support Web site and have a Nortel support contract you can also get help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center In North America call 1 800 4NORTEL 1 800 466 7835 Outside North America go to the following Web site to obtain the phone number for your region http www nortel com callus Getting Help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers you can use an Express Routing Code ERC to quickly route your call to a specialist in your Nortel product or service To locate the ERC for your product or service go to http www nortel com erc BCM50 Administration Guide 22 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM50 Getting Help through a Nortel distributor or reseller If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller NN40020 600 23 Chapter 2 Overview of BCM50 Administration The BCMS50 Administration Guide describes the tools available with which to administer or manage BCMS0 systems This section is an introduction to the BCM system and its management model The administration overview information is divided into three categories e About BCM50 e BCM50 Manage
327. nectivity to the monitored system You can open multiple instances of BCM Monitor on a single PC to monitor several remote BCM50 systems at the same time BCM Monitor supports BCM50 release 2 0 You can use BCM Monitor with BCM releases 2 5 and 2 5 FP1 but these releases provide only limited support for certain diagnostic queries and unsupported information elements appear as N A in BCM Monitor panels When BCM Monitor connects to a BCM system that does not support a particular information element this is indicated by N A in the relevant BCM Monitor panels BCM Monitor does not require significant hard disk space or memory on the client PC BCM50 Administration Guide 246 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities The following operating systems support BCM Monitor Windows 2000 Windows XP Citrix Installing BCM Monitor BCM Monitor is included with the installation of the BCM50 Element Manager You do not need to download and install the utility separately unless you are an administrative user who requires access to only this management tool and you do not have or require the BCM50 Element Manager If you do require BCM Monitor separately from the Element Manager you install the application from the BCM50 Web page To install BCM Monitor separately from BCM50 Element Manager 1 7 On the BCMS0 Web Page click the Administrator Applications link The Administrator Applications page opens Click the BCM Monitor link Th
328. ned to the user any other group assignments with less access are superseded The default privileges are arranged as profiles with access privileges Access privileges for each profile are listed in the sections below Voice Mail amp Contact Center access privileges SBA Voice Mail EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User EM CONFIG Applications Voice Messaging EM CONFIG Applications Contact Center Web Documentation User Documentation BCM50 Applications Applications CallPilot Manager Web User Applications Contact Center access privileges EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User Web Documentation User Documentation BCM50 Applications Applications CallPilot Manager BCM50 Administration Guide 102 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges e Web User Applications Security access privileges e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Security Policies e EM CONFIG Administrator Access SNMP e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Dial In e EM CONFIG Administrator Access Dial Out e EM CONFIG Telephony Call Security e EM ADMIN General Alarm e EM ADMIN General Alarm Setting M ADMIN General SNMP Trap Setting M ADMIN General Service Manager M ADMIN Utilities Reset E E E EM ADMI
329. ng configuration 446 warning Keycodes Keycodes Check requirements Yes No No fe Keycode could not for the keycode and be activated if the problem persists contact your local support group 447 40002 information Media MSM DSP No Action Required Yes INO INO 0 Services initialized Manager NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 201 critical Media MSM Unable to Reboot system and Yes es es es Services communicate with if problem persists Manager DSP contact your local support group warning Media MSM DSP audit Contact your local Yes No No 0 Services failed support group Manager critical Media MSM DSP reset If alarm 40002 Yes Yes es Yes Services proceeds this then Manager no action required otherwise contact your local support group major CTE CTE Cte table Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes corruption support group major CTE CTE Unsupported Restart system and Yes Yes es Yes KSU if problem persists contact your local support group major CTE CTE Incorrect Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes state index in the support group state machine warning CTE CTE Error replying Check your licensing Yes No No to licensing process information minor CTE CTE Error getting Check your licensing Yes No No feature from listin information licensing process warning CTE CTE Error Check
330. ning UPS UPS Reached No Action Required Yes INO INO 0 remaining time percentage limit on batteries B68 T3008 warning UPS UPS Failed to kill Check USB Yes No No 0 the power connection to UPS Attempting a REBOOT B69 T3009 Information UPS UPS Initiating System is going Yes No No system shutdown jdown due to power failures Check local power connected to the system B70 T3010 Information UPS UPS Power is No Action Required Yes No No back UPS running on mains B71 130TT Information UPS UPS Users No Action Required Yes No No requested to logoff B72 T3012 major UPS UPS Battery Check batteries in Yes Yes es Yes failure Emergency UPS and replace if needed B73 T3013 major UPS UPS UPSbattery Check batteriesn Yes Nes Yes Yes must be replaced UPS and replace if needed B374 3014 Information UPS UPS Remote No Action Required Yes No No shutdown requested 875 13015 major UPS UPS Check USB Yes Yes Yes Yes Communications connection to UPS with UPS lost 876 T3016 Information UPS UPS No Action Required Yes No No fe Communications with UPS restored B77 T3017 Information UPS UPS Self Test No Action Required Yes No No switch to battery 878 T3018 nformation UPS UPS Self Test No Action Required Yes No No 0 completed B79 3019 warning UPS UPS Master not No Action Required Yes No No responding B80 13020 Information UPS UPS Connect from No Action Required Yes No N
331. nistrator Applications Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help a Q O A D Dern krans O SE B a Address https 192 168 249 25 apps private admin pps htm E BE Links oot Google C Search SF check A Autolink fa Options NORTEL Home Contact Administrator Applications Administrator Management Tools BCM Element Manager Desktop Assistant PRO AE NCM For BCM BCM Monitor CDR Clients BCM MIBs SSH Client PuTTY Retrieve Log Files Contact Center Applications Reporting for Contact Center Click the Retrieve Logs link In the Get Logs area select a destination for the retrieved logs e Transfer to my computer e USB storage device e Send to e FTP e SFTP NN40020 600 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs 315 e Windows Shared Folder j Nortel BCM 4 0 Administrator Applications Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 x File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help ay i gt O O HAO fem OG se La Ss Address ja https 192 168 249 27 apps private logs htm X Go Links gt Google Search Web fe Options Administrator Management Tools BCM Element Manager Desktop Assistant PRO AE NCM For BCM BCM Monitor i A E Retrieve Log Files BCM MIBs SSH Client PuTTY Retrieve Log Files m Get Logs Contact Center Applications Transfe
332. nnections to the public network g critical Core Core Telephony Check configuration Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony Cold restart has change logs to see if occurred causing this was user loss of telephony initiated If not data contact your local support group 5 warning Core Core Telephony No Action Required Yes No No fe Telephony Media Bay Module firmware download started BCM50 Administration Guide 158 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 6 B5 critical Core Core Telephony Power down the es es es es Telephony Media Bay Module jsystem and check firmware download the expansion failure chassis connections Check for corresponding alarm 31 or 79 to determine which module is having issues If problem persists replace corresponding hardware 7 critical Core Core Telephony Power down the Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony Media Bay Module jsystem and check firmware download the expansion failure chassis connections Check for corresponding alarm 31 or 79 to determine which module is having issues If problem persists replace corresponding hardware 8B critical Core Core Telephony Restart system and Yes Yes es Yes Telephony Failure to download contact your local market profile support group protocol data from the Persistent Data Repository 9 critical Core Core Telephony Perform a restore Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony Persistent Data with a known
333. ns 00 314 To extract log files using the Element Manager ccsccceeessccceeeseseeeeeeseseeneeeeeees 316 To spociiy Tai ewe GENA sabini daokeeeeateerle 319 To filter information in the Retrieval Results table sssessssessssssrressrrrressrrnressrnnnnerennnn 320 To view log details for multiple log reCOrds seeccceeesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeenenseeneetens 320 Managing BCM50 Software Updates 000 cece e eee eens 323 To obtain updates from the Nortel Technical Support Web page c ccseeeeeeees 323 To view details about software updates iN PrOQreSsS eeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeeeeeeee 325 To apply an update from your personal COMPUTET ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeees 327 To apply a software update from a USB storage device ccccsccecceesstteeeeeesteeeeeees 328 To apply an update irom a shared THe cccascanitaiiinGuinennieninces 329 Te apply an update irom an FTP Senol arisini 330 To apply an update irom an HTTP SOI V GP iicctessscisecassnacteens ceeutvasi ancien vessneniaaaseanis 331 To create a scheduled Software update sscccscesscnsecscosccnestccescenseeconsanentensnanneceessnainens 333 To modify a scheduled software Update sc ccsniiticdiimonaunainie 336 To delete a scheduled software Update cccceceeeseceeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeteneeneeeteneeneeeeeee 337 To view the software update HISIONY cccccensveccscinsssnets cans toccvsasaisnctse
334. ntains the following areas e Retrieval Criteria area e Retrieval Results list e Log Details area Retrieval Criteria area The Retrieval Criteria area at the top of the Log Browser window displays a list of network element and alarm attributes that you can use to define the criteria for browsing a selected log file You can display or close the Retrieval Criteria area by clicking on the arrow to the right of the Retrieval Criteria field Retrieval criteria area specific to the log file that you are viewing For example log files with four columns have four possible retrieval criteria while systemlog files with six columns have six possible retrieval criteria You can define the criteria for browsing log files by selecting or deselecting criteria NN40020 600 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs 319 When you select an attribute from the Retrieval Criteria table the Criteria Definition area to the right of the table displays the corresponding details for the attribute you selected You can select or define the corresponding details 47 135 155 195 C Documents and Settings viyates My Documents operationalLogs tar BAX v Retrieval Criteria E m ae a Component Log Log Clear All Host Log scritical gt lt rmajor gt message Log O Priormy Log p Retrieve sminor o swarning gt rrocess Log You can click the Pane View buttons at the top right corner of the Retrieval Criteria
335. nts folder is at the top of Network Elements tree or if an unconnected device is selected Exit Click this icon to exit BCM Cut Select a network element and click this icon to mark that netowrk element for cutting Copy Select a network element and click this icon to mark that netowrk element for copying Paste With no network element selected click this button to paste a cut or copie network element into the list of available network elements Connect Connects the Element Manager to the selected device Delete Allows you to delete the selected device from the Network Elements tree New Folder Adds a new folder under the Network Elements tree This icon only works when the Network Elements title is selected Network Elements navigation panel This panel contains the Network Element Navigation tree which displays devices and groups of devices folders The following actions are available in the Network Element navigation panel Add items Add Network Elements or folders by right clicking or use the selections under the Network menu or the Icon tool bar Delete items Select the device or folder and right click or use the selections under the Network menu or the Icon toolbar Connect Disconnect Select the device and right click or use the selections under the Network menu or the Icon tool bar The following actions are available if you right click on an network element listed in the Network Element Navi
336. nts from the backup operation 9 Configure the schedule attributes Table 84 Configure schedule attributes Attribute Action Memo Enter a note for the scheduled backup as applicable Recurrence Select how often the scheduled backup is to occur Options are Once Daily Weekly Monthly Depending on the option you choose the window displays selections for the month and day of month If you select Weekly days of the week are displayed Select the check box for Daily to select the day Month Select the month in which the scheduled backup is to occur NN40020 600 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 289 Table 84 Configure schedule attributes Attribute Action Day of Month Select the day of the month on which the scheduled backup is to occur Time Select the time at which the scheduled backup is to occur 10 Click the OK button The scheduled backup is displayed in the Scheduled Backups table Modifying and deleting scheduled backups You can modify existing scheduled backups You can modify e the memo for the scheduled backup e optional components to include in the backup e schedule details for the backup You can also delete a scheduled backup Modifying a scheduled backup Caution A backup operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever the backup will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a backup t
337. o 0 master B8T M3021 Information UPS UPS Mans No Action Required Yes No No No returned No longer on UPS batteries B82 N6001 Information Configuration Configuration No Action Required No No No Change Change Configuration Change has occurred B83 17002 Information System Set System Set Based No Action Required No No No 0 Based Admin Admin Userld X Dn Y login success 384 17003 Information System Set System Set Based No Action Required No No No Based Admin Admin Userld X Dn Y logged off B86 17004 information System Set System Set Based No Action Required Yes No No Based Admin Admin Userld X user account created successfully Dn Y NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 197 B87 17005 Information System Set System Set Based No Action Required Yes No No Based Admin Admin Userld X user account deleted successfully Dn Y B88 17006 Information System Set System Set Based No Action Required Yes No No Based Admin Admin Userld X lpassword changed successfully Dn Y 889 17007 Information System Set System Set Based No Action Required Yes No No Based Admin Admin DHCP client enabled for eth1 B90 17008 Information System Set System Set Based No Action Required Yes No No Based Admin Admin DHCP client disabled for eth1 B91 17009 Information System Set System Set
338. o be added Adds lt BCM name gt to the filename in the Output Filename field Time Adds the time to the filename Position your cursor in the filename field where you want the name to be added Adds lt time gt to the filename in the Output Filename field Date Adds the date to the filename Position your cursor in the filename field where you want the name to be added Adds lt date gt to the filename in the Output Filename field 5 In Output Folder field enter the path of the folder where you want to store the static snapshots To browse for a folder click the button to the right of the Output Folder field The Browse for Folder dialog box opens 6 Select a folder or make a new folder and then click the OK button BCM50 Administration Guide 252 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities 7 Select the BCM Monitor tabs that you want to include in dynamic snapshots in the Tabs Saved in Snapshot box For example if you want the snapshots to include information about voice ports make sure that Voice Ports is included in the Tabs Saved in Snapshot box Snapshot Settings Static snapshot settings Dynamic snapshot settings Path and filename Output filename dynamic csv gt Output folder C Documents and Settings vipates E Tabs to save Tabs not saved in snapshot Tabs saved in snapshot BCM Info Voice Ports Media Card RTP Sessions IP Devices 3 UIP Line Monitor Usage Indicators Reset Li
339. occurs To apply an update from your personal computer In the task panel click the Configuration tab Select System gt Date and Time and verify that the date time and time zone are correctly set In the task panel click the Administration tab A OO N Open the Software Management folder and then click the Software Update task The Software Update panel opens The Updates in Progress tab is open 5 Click the Get New Updates button The Get New Updates window opens Select My Computer from the Retrieve From selection field Click the Browse button The Select window opens 8 Navigate to the directory where you unzipped the update file and click Select Note The Select dialog displays directories only and does not show the contents of the directories 9 Select the location from which you want to retrieve the update The Find Software Updates window opens and displays a list of updates found in the specified location 10 Select an update The update must have a status of Available 11 To view details about the update click the Show Details button The Details for Update window opens and displays any details about the update Click the OK button to close the details window Note If the information in the Find Software Updates window indicates that gt you are applying an upgrade rather than an update you will need to generate a keycode before proceeding BCM50 Administration Guide 328 Cha
340. odiy SSC UN CWE eissaia ane 289 TO delete a backup ICI seansini 290 Te restos tala trom the BEMS O asrar oaie a 293 To restore data from your personal COMputer cceesseneeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeenenseeneeeens 294 To restore data from a network folder sssaaa 295 To restore data from a USB storage device ssseesssessreesesrrresrensrnrsrtnsrinnerinnernnnt 296 To restore data from an FTP Sever sasaki nd ika 297 T restore data from an SFTP GOIN jacecsscsaisuasccace ievesapbasseeeresaisdesdidada sucenbacalavcibedanseeeie 298 To restore the faclory configurati Oaea aaa 299 Managing BCM50 LOGS nssannsannnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nunne 301 To perform an immediate log transfer to a USB storage deVICE ccccesseeeeeeeteees 305 To perform an immediate log transfer to your personal COMPUTET ceeeeeeeeeeeeee 306 To perform an immediate log transfer to a network folder 307 To perform an immediate log transfer to an FTP Server 308 To perform an immediate log transfer to an SFTP server ccssccccesessseeeeeessteeeeeeees 309 To perform a scheduled log transfer to a storage location cccceeteeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 310 BCM50 Administration Guide 6 Task List To modify a scheduled log ransiet sescacccastcsssassasceh seacescediatanetteedmesetednomeniecasimmaneee aml 311 To delete a scheduled log ansier orrsssaisnionsirnuunismnnnnnn 312 To use the BCM50 Web Page to transfer log files to other destinatio
341. og details for a single log record In the Retrieval Results list table select a log record Log details for the selected log record are displayed in the Log Details area To view log details for multiple log records 1 Inthe Retrieval Results list table hold down the Shift key and select log records to select multiple contiguous log records NN40020 600 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs 321 Log details for the selected log records are displayed in the Log Details area separated by dashed lines 2 Inthe Retrieval Results list table hold down the Control key and select log records to select multiple non contiguous log records Log details for the selected log records are displayed in the Log Details area separated by dashed lines 3 To toggle between viewing log details for single and multiple log records separated by a dashed line click the View Control buttons to the right of the Log Details area amp 47 135 155 195 C Documents and Settings viyates My Documents ope Baak lt informetion gt lt information gt lt informetion gt lt information gt lt information gt lt information gt w Log Details 2 items selected 2005 01 05 14 50 25 675293 2005 01 05 14 50 25 556473 2005 01 05 14 50 25 919602 2005 01 05 14 50 25 783116 2005 01 05 14 50 26 575315 2005 01 05 14 50 26 404348 2005 01 05 14 50 26 741585 2005 01 05 14 50 25 441147 2005 01 05 14 50 26 266419 2005 01 05 14 50 28 8413
342. olicy From the Account Management drop down menu select Local Authentication or RADIUS If you select RADIUS follow the procedure for Configuring an authentication server on page 84 Configuring an authentication server To authenticate users on a centralized RADIUS server you must configure the server using Element Manager To configure an authentication server in Element Manager 1 Select Configuration Administrator Access Security Policies gt Authentication Service Policy 2 Select a server to be the primary authentication server Click in each column of the table to enter the following attributes Column Value Server name Name of the server to be used for authentication Server IP address IP address of the server to be used for authentication NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 85 Server Port Port number of the server to be used for authentication Enabled Check to enable the use of a RADIUS server authentication 3 Click on the Configuration tab in the details area and enter the following attributes Column Value Shared Secret Key required for the BCM to communicate with the authentication server Server Message Timeout Length of time to wait for the server to respond to a request for authentication before timing out Server Retries Number of times to retry connecting with the primary server before using an alter
343. on aiid BCMS0 System Devices i aq eneral _ Alarms _ Alarm Settings o SNMP Irap Destinations Manufacturer f Additional BCM50 Main Unit Information Nortel Networks Manufacture date lelephony Metrics Utities backup and Restore Logs fal Software Management Hardware version Manufacturing information CSC CPC code CSC serial number CSC hardware version Hard disk drive description Hard disk drive PEC order code Hard disk drive serial number Ee jmc p M0 Lomo LM Vv Include 4CKed alarms To view additional information about the BCM50 hardware inventory In the BCM50 Element Manager connect to a BCM50 device 2 Select Administration General Hardware Inventory The Hardware Inventory panel opens 3 Click the Additional Information tab The Additional Information tab opens 4 View the information displayed in the Additional BCM50 Main Unit Information area NN40020 600 133 Chapter 6 Managing BCM50 with SNMP SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a set of protocols for managing complex networks SNMP compliant devices called agents store meta data in Management Information Bases MIBs and provide this data to SNMP requesters You can use external SNMP clients such as HP OpenView to monitor the BCM50 system by means of read only SNMP requests This chapter provides information about e BCMS5S0 support for SNMP e configuring BCM50 SNMP settings e using SN
344. on component and deselect the CallPilot Messages component which saves all CallPilot information except for personal voicemail messages When you perform a restore operation you can choose to restore any optional components that were included in the backup operation Viewing backup and restore activity A log archive tracks all backup and restore activities that occur on the system You can retrieve and view this file in the Operational logs category The archive name is lt archiver systemlog gt For information about logs see Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs on page 301 About backups A backup collects the configuration settings and the data generated during the normal operation of the BCM system Examples of configuration settings include e IP configuration details e telephony programming e SNMP settings e Call Detail Recording settings e BCM50 schedules for example the backup schedule and the log retrieval schedule e greetings prompts Examples of data generated during normal operations include voicemail messages e Call Detail Records e faxes NN40020 600 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 273 e email text to speech e envelope information Caution A backup operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever the backup will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a backup that does not affect the system you can exclude servi
345. one of a number of elements in a network network management tools at the network management layer facilitate monitoring and management across the network Nortel provided tools such as Enterprise Network Management System ENMS for network monitoring and third party tools supporting multi vendor networks can only deliver their value if the managed element itself has provided for the right functions at the manageable systems layer Also at the network layer system and configuration management tools can provide support for tasks such as bulk distribution of selected configuration information network wide inventory management and network wide backup management The Network Configuration Manager NCM server based management application provides these and other capabilities for managing a network of up to 2000 BCM50 devices For more information about NCM please consult the NCM User documentation NN40020 600 Chapter 2 Overview of BCM50 Administration 27 Figure 1 BCM50 network management model Network Management Layer e Event amp Alarm Mgmt Infrastructure access Performance amp optimization Communications e QoS Monitoring System amp Config Management Layer e Multi site configuration e Asset inventory mgmt e Bulk MACs Element Management Tools Troubleshoot events amp alarms Backup amp restore User applications amp capabilities e Event alarm generation
346. opens To start BCM Monitor from the Element Manager 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Open the Utilities folder and then click BCM Monitor The BCM Monitor panel opens 3 Click the Launch BCM Monitor button BCM Monitor opens and connects to the same BCM50 that the Element Manger is currently connected to jnortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager File view Network Session Tools Help P Exit Element Navigation Panel Task Navigation Panel oe amp Refresh g Auto refresh BCM Monitor Launch BCM Monitor system status lelephony Metrics _ tace Route o keset _ Diagnostic Settings _ Vata Networking Utities Backup and Kestore Logs Sottware Management BCM50 Administration Guide 248 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities Note You can also launch the BCM Monitor from within the Element Manager gt by selecting Tools gt BCM Monitor Disconnecting BCM Monitor from a BCM50 On the File menu of the BCM Monitor select Disconnect from BCM BCM Monitor disconnects from the BCM50 system and clears all the fields Note If you do not want to connect to another BCM50 system close the BCM gt Monitor application This terminates the application and disconnects BCM Monitor from the BCM50 system To connect to a different BCM50 1 On the File menu of the BCM Monitor select Disconnect from BCM BCM Monitor disconnects from the BCM50 system and clears all fields 2 On the File men
347. or BCM40027 loj x File Statistics Help BCM Info Media Card Voice Ports IP Devices RIP Sessions UIP Line Monitor BCM Info CPU 2 Physical memory MB 1170 of 249 68 Nonpaged mem MB 0 of 96 0 x m Used Media Card Resources Signaling channels 14 of 59 24 Media channels 4 of 59 7 Voice bus channels 9 of 62 15 DSP resources 9 of 64 14 Active Telephony Devices IP trunks IP sets 0of1 0 Voice ports Oof 10 0 Media gateways 0of3 0 Using statistical values BCM Monitor stores the minimum and maximum values for many of the statistics that appear on BCM Monitor tabs A statistic must be a numeric value and must change over time that is the value cannot be a static value Examples of statistics that have minimum and maximum values are CPU usage Active Lines and Enabled i20XX sets Examples of statistics that do not have minimum and maximum values are Dial up WAN which is not a numeric value and Serial Number which is static The values that BCM Monitor displays are the minimum and maximum values for the current BCM Monitor session The minimum and maximum values are reset when you exit the BCM Monitor You can do the following with statistical values e view minimum and maximum values e view the date and time of minimum and maximum values e reset minimum and maximum values Viewing minimum an
348. or password has full access to the system The default password should be changed as soon as the initial system setup is complete and The BCM comes with a number of default read only groups that provide a predetermined set of access privileges You can assign additional privileges to groups Table 22 lists the default privilege levels for each default group which are described in Default access privileges excluding set based privileges on page 101 and Telset access security on page 109 Table 22 Default user account groups Group Name Privileges Notes SBA Installer SBAlnstaller SBA Installer group access privileges on page 110 IP Set Registration IP Set Registration access privileges on page 102 SBA Coordinator SBASystemCoord SBA System Coordinator group access privileges on page 110 SBA Coordinator SBASystemCoordBasic SBA System Coordinator group access privileges on page 110 Guests Guests access privileges on page 105 SBA Basic SBABasic SBA Basic group access privileges on page 110 Voice amp Contact Center VoiceMailAdmin Only access to voicemail contact center administration if this is Group the only group assigned to a user account Voice Mail amp Contact Center access privileges on page 101 BCM50 Administration Guide 100 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges Table 22 Default user account groups Continued Group Name Privileges Notes
349. ording You can use information collected by Call Detail Recording to determine whether the telephone system is being used efficiently and to guard against abuse of the telephone system Call Detail Recording provides information about e the date and time of a call and digits dialed e the originating and the terminating line or station set e whether an incoming call was answered e elapsed time between origin of a call and when it was answered e whether a call was transferred or put on hold e call duration e call charges e calls associated with Account codes e incoming call Calling Line Identification CLID information e bearer Capability of the line in the call e hospitality records for room occupancy status e real Time records for ringing DNIS answered unanswered transferred and released events e for incoming calls with CLID information and Hospitality room occupancy status BCM50 Administration Guide 342 Chapter 14 Accounting Management CDR information can be collected for all calls outgoing calls only specific long distance prefix strings only or calls associated with an account code only to track calls for client billing purposes You can set parameters to specify whether additional information should be recorded such as hospitality information including room occupancy status and room number information Using Call Detail Recording BCM5SO Call Detail Recording is covered in detail in the Call Detail R
350. ore Attempt another Yes Yes Yes Yes Restore Internal error backup and if Component in problem perists configuration file not contact your local recognized support group B25 12026 major Backup and Backup and Restore Attempt another Yes Yes Yes Yes Restore Internal error backup and if Unrecognized problem perists transfer mechanism contact your local support group 826 12027 critical Backup and Backup and Restore Check the USB Yes Yes Yes Yes Restore File could not be connection and flash copied to USB device device B27 12028 minor Backup and Backup and Restore Use a backup from a Yes INO INO 0 Restore File is incompatible Supported software with current version software B28 112029 major Backup and Backup and Restore Attempt another Yes Yes Yes Yes Restore Internal error restore and if Could not restore problem perists the database contact your local support group B29 12030 Minor Backup and Backup and Restore Check your login Yes INO INO 0 Restore File could not be credentials to the transferred by sftp SFTP server B30 1203T minor Backup and Backup and Restore Check your login Yes No No fe Restore File could not be credentials to the transferred to the _ shared folder shared folder B3T T2032 major Backup and_ Backup and Restore Check the USB Yes Yes es Yes Restore Could not use the connection and USB device space on the flash evice B32 12033 minor Backup and Backup and Restore Check the USB Yes No No
351. ore Telephony Check your cabling No No Telephony l Line Code from any DTM Violation short term modules to the alarm threshold has external network and been exceeded on Irun loopback tests the DTM The ion the circuit to module is in a no check for network new calls state issues If long term alarms occur get your network provider to check the ircuit during problem conditions 49 minor Core Core Telephony Check your cabling No No Telephony Loss of Signal from any DTM short term alarm modules to the threshold has been external network and exceeded on the Irun loopback tests DTM The module is on the circuit to in a no new calls check for network state issues If long term alarms occur get your network provider to check the ircuit during problem conditions NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 165 minor Core Core Telephony Check your cabling Yes No No Telephony Loss of Frame from any DTM short term alarm modules to the threshold has been external network and exceeded on the Irun loopback tests DTM The module is on the circuit to in a no new calls check for network state issues If long term alarms occur get your network provider to check the ircuit during problem conditions minor Core Core Telephony Check your cabling Yes No No Telephony Alarm Indication from any DTM short term alarm modules to the threshold has been exter
352. ot be restarted by service manager This will affect the synchronization of time in the system Reboot system and contact your local support group Yes Yes es Yes critical Service Manager Service Manager Platform Status Monitor psm has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager This will affect the monitoring lof system hardware land drivers Reboot system and contact your local support group Yes Yes es Yes NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 179 critical Service Manager Service Manager Web Server httpd has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager This will affect the onbox web pages downloads and documentation Reboot system and contact your local support group es es es es critical Service Manager Service Manager On Box Management Framework owcimomd has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager Element Manager will be unable to connect with the system Reboot system and contact your local support group Yes Yes es Yes critical Service Manager Service Manager Service Manager monit has stopped unexpectedly Check for corresponding alarm 10322 to indicate a restart If 10322 doesn t happen then reboot system and contact your local support g
353. other Up to 256 characters Write information such as the administrator s name and contact information Location of this The location of the system Up to 256 characters Write system Last change to this Date and time when the information was example 2004 04 16 09 Read panel last modified 12 00 NN40020 600 Chapter 5 Using the BCM50 Hardware Inventory 129 To view or update other information about the BCM50 main unit In the BCM50 Element Manager connect to a BCMS0 device 2 Select Administration General Hardware Inventory The Hardware Inventory panel opens The BCM50 System tab is displayed View the information displayed in the Other Information area If you want to add or update information about the owner or administrator of the BCM50 system enter information in the Owner Name field 5 Ifyou want to add or update information about the location of BCM50 system enter information in the Location of the System field Viewing information about devices The Devices tab displays information about all devices attached to the BCM50 These devices may include e digital sets e analog devices e IP sets including IP clients You can view all Directory Numbers DNs and the type of set associated with the DN Table 36 lists the fields in the Attached Devices table Note DNs of type Analog are not necessarily be populated with a physical telephone device Table 36 Attached Devices fields
354. otocols Several protocols are used in the day to day management of a network of BCM50s These include e SNMP simple network management protocol Simple Network Management Protocol is the Internet standard protocol for network management software It monitors devices on the network and gathers device performance data for management information data bases MIB e HTTPS A secure version of HTTP implemented using the secure sockets layer SSL transmitting your communications in an encrypted form HTTPS is used between the Element Manager and the BCM BCM50 Administration Guide 30 Chapter 2 Overview of BCM50 Administration e FTP file transfer protocol FTP is a protocol used to transfer files over a TCP IP network Internet Unix FTP allows you to log into FTP servers list directories and copy files from other workstations e SSH and other protocols are also used for certain tasks These are covered in the section Secure Network Protocols and Encryption in the Security chapter NN40020 600 31 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment This chapter contains information on the different tools available for managing your BCM50 system It also describes the Element Manager application in detail It includes the following sections e BCM50 web page e BCMS50 Management Environment and Applications on page 33 e Element Manager on page 36 e BCM50 feature licensing on page 65 e
355. ou have entered the phrase 6 Click the OK button To view details associated with a service access point Click the Configuration tab Open the Administrator Access folder and then click SNMP Click the Service Access Points tab The Service Access Points panel is displayed 4 Select a service access point in the Service Access Points table Details are displayed in the Details pane including the encrypted authentication pass phrase and the encryption pass phrase To delete a service access point 1 Click the Configuration tab 2 Open the Administrator Access folder and then click SNMP BCM50 Administration Guide 142 Chapter 6 Managing BCM50 with SNMP 3 Click the Service Access Points tab The Service Access Points panel is displayed In the Service Access Points table select a service access point Click the Delete button A confirmation dialog box opens 6 Click the Yes button The selected service access point is deleted from the Service Access Points table Configuring SNMP trap destinations An SNMP trap is a signal that tells the SNMP manager that an event has occurred on the system The SNMP system enables SNMP traps to be generated based on all or some events and alarms generated on the BCM50 system Any information that is displayed in the Alarms panel can generate an SNMP trap For information about the Alarms panel see Using the Alarms Panel on page 150 BCM50 alarms that meet the
356. ounts and Privileges 115 Table 25 describes each field on the View by Accounts panel Table 25 View by Accounts fields Attribute Value Description User ID alphanumeric Displays the accounts by User ID Telset User ID numeric Displays the accounts by Telset User ID Locked Out checkbox Indicates whether or not the user has been locked out When checked the user cannot access the system This field becomes checked when a user enters an incorrect password too many times and the system locks the user account The user either has to wait for the lockout timer to run out or an administrator can unlock the user s access using Re enable a locked out user on page 96 Locked Out Telset checkbox Indicates whether or not the user has been locked out When checked the user cannot access the system This field becomes checked when a user enters an incorrect password too many times and the system locks the user account The user either has to wait for the lockout timer to run out or an administrator can unlock the user s access using Re enable a locked out user on page 96 Disabled checkbox Indicates whether a user account has been disabled When checked the user cannot access the system This field becomes checked when the account expiry date is reached Refer to Enabling and disabling an account on page 96 Buttons Add Opens the Add Account dia
357. p See Backup and Restore Log Data BCM Monitor 245 BCM Monitor Installing 246 BCM Monitor Removing 246 BCM Monitor Starting 247 BCM system Connecting to 246 blocking interface access time remaining 113 BMC Monitor installing 246 Business Communications Manager Overview 23 C Call Detail Recording CDR Toolkit 342 Overview 341 Using CDR 342 callback 92 user accounts 116 CbC Limit Metrics See Metrics certificate private security key 124 uploading a security certificate 124 challenge key 77 Community string values configuring 138 Community string adding 139 Community string deleting 139 complexity password 77 Configuring dynamic snapshots 251 Configuring static snapshot settings 249 Conventions guide 19 button options 19 buttons 19 command line 19 copyright 2 counter rest lockout counter 78 current user 111 current user change password 112 current user telset password 112 current user telset user ID 112 D Diagnostic Settings 270 Diagnostic Settings See Metrics dialback 92 dial in setting up callback 92 disable telset interface 76 disable user accounts 115 Disconnecting from a BCM 248 Display 19 Dynamic snapshot Starting 252 Dynamic snapshot Stopping 253 Dynamic snapshots 250 Dynamic snapshots configuring 251 Dynamic snapshots starting 252 Dynamic snapshots stopping 253 BCM50 Administration Guide 350 Index E Element Manager last successful log in 112 minimu
358. pecify a path Each backup rewrites any pre existing backup of the same type My Computer For an immediate backup saves backup archives to any accessible location on the client PC on which the BCM50 Element Manager is installed You can specify a name for the backup so that the pre existing backup is not automatically overwritten Network Folder Saves data to a shared network folder The remote server must provide a Microsoft Windows like shared file resource and a user account with rights to create and write files in the destination location You cannot browse the network directories to select the destination folder but you can specify a directory by identifying the path USB Storage Device Saves backup archives to a USB storage device The files will be written to the top directory level You cannot specify a path to a different directory on the storage device Each backup overwrites any pre existing backup of the same type A USB storage device must be formatted as FAT32 FTP Server Saves backup archives to a File Transfer Protocol server Credentials and backup data are sent without encryption The remote server must provide an FTP server application and a user account with rights to allow the BCM50 to create and write files in the destination location You cannot browse the FTP server to select the destination folder but you can specify a directory by identifying the path SFTP Server Saves ba
359. pen the Telephony folder Open the Global Settings folder and then click the Feature Settings task The Feature Settings page opens 4 Inthe Feature Settings area enter the DN of the telephone set that you want to use for the alarm set in the Alarm Set field To clear an alarm from the alarm set On the alarm set press the Clear soft key The alarm is cleared from the alarm set Note Clearing an alarm from the alarm set does not change the status of alarms on the BCM Element Manager or reset the LEDs on the front panel of the unit Alarms and LEDs When an alarm condition occurs on the system the Status LED on the front of the BCM main unit changes to reflect the alarm condition In normal operation both LEDs are green All alarms with a severity of Major and Critical change the Status LED to solid red on the BCM front panel except in the event of a Failed Startup Profile which is indicated by a flashing red LED NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 155 Using the BCM Element Manager you can reset the Status LEDs on the front panel of the BCM to a normal state Note Once the Status LED has changed to red in response to a Critical or Major alarm condition it remains in the alarmed state until you reset it using the BCM Element Manager To reset the Status LED 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Open the General folder and then click the Alarms task The Alarms panel opens 3
360. pherals initialize connected land function Remove any lunsupported set types NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 167 minor Core Core Telephony Check the system es No No Telephony CAP KIM error while for CAP KIM retrieving key modules and reset information them If the problem persists contact your local support group minor Core Core Telephony No Action Required Yes No No Telephony ISDN call processing error minor Core Core Telephony Check that the Yes No No 0 Telephony DASS2 DPNSS DASS2 DPNSS error on a DTM circuit is online If it module is not disable enable the expansion chassis and try to get the circuit back online If problem persists contact your local support group critical Core Core Telephony Restore a known Yes Yes es Yes Telephony Persistent Data good backup into the Repository system to get it back corruption online and contact your local support group minor Core Core Telephony Geta protocol trace Yes INO INO 0 Telephony IBRI protocol call lof the BRI loop using control error BCM monitor and contact your local support group warning Core Core Telephony Contact your local Yes INO INO 0 Telephony Unknown alarm support group major Operating Operating System Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes System Major operating support group system error Kernel Oops cr
361. pped No Action Required Yes No No Warning Service Manager Service Manager Quality of Service Monitor qmond has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped No Action Required Yes No No Warning Service Manager Service Manager Call Detail Recording Service CDRService has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped No Action Required Yes No No BCM50 Administration Guide 182 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System m98 10208 Warning Service Manager Service Manager Voice Application Interface Service ctiserver has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped This will affect CallPilot System Set Based Admin and the modem No Action Required es INO No Warning Service Manager Service Manager Modem Call Control modemcc has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped This will affect Dial In and Dial Out using the integrated mod
362. pport group Proxy Server store registration password in registry 50112 major Unistim Error lt lt errorCode Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal lt lt changing support group Proxy Server AutoAssignDN flag in registry 50113 major Unistim Failed to send Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal message cannot support group Proxy Server process OAM command 50114 major Unistim terminalldentitier lt lt Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal Could not register Support group Proxy Server terminal with UNIStimlOHandler bOTTS major lUnistim ferminalidentifier lt lt Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal No public media support group Proxy Server address available EchoServer may be down or misconfigured 50116 major Unistim failed to insert lt lt Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal element lt lt in support group Proxy Server m_maplnstantiated Terminals 50117 major Unistim Firmware download Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal session rejected support group Proxy Server Reason is lt lt rejectionCause 5011S major Unistim UTPS has failedto Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal authenticate the support group Proxy Server supplied user ID due to an internal error error code lt lt lerrorCode 50119 major Unistim UTPS has failed to Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal authenticate the support group Proxy Server supplied
363. pter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates 12 Click the Apply button to apply the update A warning dialog box opens 13 Click the OK button The Software Update Complete confirmation window opens 14 A dialog box opens to display the options available for this update The options available depend on the update that you are applying Select the appropriate options and click the OK button If no options are available click the OK button to continue 15 The Updates in Progress table lists the update as In Progress Click the OK button A software update that has the Reboot Required field checked automatically restarts the BCM50 once the update has been applied Applying a software update from a USB storage device Before you apply an update from a USB storage device make sure that e the USB storage device is formatted as a FAT32 device e you know the path to the location of the updates on the device e the device is connected to the BCM50 e the size of the software update is not greater than the capacity of the storage device Caution Applying a software update to the BCM50 is a service affecting operation Nortel recommends that you schedule updates for low traffic hours Caution If a software update has a checkmark applied against it in the Reboot Req d column of the Find Software Updates window the BCM50 will automatically reboot as soon as the update has been applied You will not receive a reboot confirmation be
364. quired Yes No No Information Service Manager Service Manager IP Terminal Service EchoServer has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 189 Information Service Manager Service Manager IP Terminal Firmware upload Service UftpServer has been successfully restarted No Action Required es INO No Information Service Manager Service Manager Doorphone service BCM_Doorphone has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No Information Service Manager Service Manager IP Music Service BcmAmp has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No Information Service Manager Service Manager IP Music Service ToneSrvr has been successfully restarted No Action Required Yes No No Information Startup Sequence System Startup Operating system and alarm subsystem available Power LED flashing green Status LED flashing yellow No Action Required Yes No No Information Startup Sequence System Startup Telephony and Voicemail active Power LED flashing green Status LED flashing green No Action Required Yes No No Information Startup Sequence System Startup Element Manager is avai
365. r refer to the CallPilot documentation on the BCM50 web page CallPilot Manager can be launched only by users with sufficient security privileges BCM50 administrators must assign privileges See Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges on page 75 for more information on security privileges Managing Digital Mobility Digital mobility is managed using applications that you can download from the BCM50 webpage Two applications are available e Digital Mobility Controller DMC OAM program e Digital Mobility Service Tool You can use the DMC OAM program to configure operate and administer the wireless system through the DMC Use the Digital Mobility Service Tool to program repeaters and adjust handsets For more information about these applications see the Digital Mobility System Installation and Configuration Guide N0000623 Programming telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio Element Manager supports the programming of button functions for the digital and IP telephone sets Some administrators may want to use the Desktop Assistant family of products to complete the customization of button programming and generate labels for the telephone sets The Desktop Assistant family of applications can be downloaded from the BCM50 web page Documentation for these applications is included within the application interface The Desktop Assistant family of products consists of e Desktop Assistant NN40020 600 C
366. r account will expire The pull down menu opens a calendar Account Textual Cred entials Change password on login check box When selected forces a user to change his or her password when logging in Password expiry drop down menu Specifies the date to force a password change Account Telset Crede ntials Change password on login check box When selected forces a Telset user to change his or her password when logging in Password expiry drop down menu Specifies the date to force a Telset password change View by Accounts Remote Access The Remote Access panel provides callback settings for verifying user information Table 27 describes each field on this panel Table 27 View by Accounts Remote Access Attribute Value Description Modem Callback telephone Specifies the number the system will call to verify the dial up user Number access Modem Callback User ID Specifies the passcode the system uses to confirm the callback is Passcode legitimate ISDN Callback telephone Specifies the number the system will call to verify the ISDN user access Number ISDN Callback User ID Specifies the passcode the system uses to confirm the callback is Passcode legitimate IP Address BCM IP Address IP address Specifies the PPP IP address of the BCM when connecting with an analog modem or ISDN terminal adaptors When you enter an IP address in this
367. r of errored seconds ES the number of severely errored seconds SES and the number of unavailable time seconds UAS Click the 24 hour summary heading for an overall summary of the previous 24 hours The Number of intervals Errored Seconds Severely Errored Seconds Unavailable Seconds appear in the summary Click the Reset Statistics button to reset any new settings The system displays a message indicating that this will remove all of the statistics 7 Select OK to erase all the current statistics and begin collecting statistics again Checking trunk module alarms To check the CSU alarms 1 Choose Administration Telephony Metrics Trunk Module Metrics Choose an expansion module Click the CSU Alarms tab The display shows all the active alarms of the types LOS loss of signal OOF out of Frame RAI Remote alarm indicator or AIS Alarm indication signal For more information on these types of transmission defects refer to Statistics collected by the system on page 230 To check carrier failure alarms 1 Choose Administration Telephony Metrics Trunk Module Metrics Choose an expansion module Click the CSU Alarm History tab The display shows LOS loss of signal OOF out of Frame AIS Alarm indication signal and RAI Remote alarm indicator For more information on these types of transmission defects refer to Statistics collected by the system on page 230 Choose the type of alarm you wis
368. r to My Computer Reporting for Contact Center Store on USB storage Multimedia Contact Center device ipNiew Softboard C Send to ETP hd Digital Mobility Tools Digital Mobility Controller Remote Resource Digital Mobility Service Tool Directory Templates UserID E Startup Profile Template aw pe Password Factory Default Programming Record User Applications 7 Submit Reset Desktop Assistant Desktop Assistant Pro Unified Messaging Ei a CET i B nemne 6 Ifyou selected a Send To option configure the destination attributes Table 95 Configure destination attributes Attribute Action Remote Resource Enter the FTP or SFTP address or the network pathway as appropriate Directory Enter the path of the directory to which you want to transfer the log files UserID Enter the user ID associated with the remote resource Password Enter the password associated with the remote resource This option does not apply when the destination is an SFTP server 7 Click the Submit button A Working screen opens When the log retrieval is complete the screen displays Done 8 Click the Click Here to Download Logs link The File Download screen opens 9 Click the Save button to save the backup tar file The Save As screen opens 10 Specify the location where you want to save the zipped file and enter a name for the file in the File Name field The file must have a tar extension For ex
369. ral panel if you want to configure and use SNMP trap destinations from the SNMP Trap Destinations panel on Administration panel To modify a trap destination 1 Select Configuration gt Administrator Access gt SNMP gt SNMP Trap Destinations or Administration gt General gt SNMP Trap Destinations 2 Inthe Trap Destinations table select a trap destination BCM50 Administration Guide 144 Chapter 6 Managing BCM50 with SNMP 3 Click the Modify button The Modify Trap Destination dialog box opens 4 Configure the Modify Trap Destination attributes Table 45 Modify Trap Destination Attributes Attribute Action Name Enter a name for the trap Host Enter the IP address of the trap destination Port Enter the UDP port number from which the trap will be sent The default value is 162 SNMP Version Select the version of the SNMP Agent for the trap Options are v1 v2C and v3 Community String Enter the community string to use for the SNMP trap User Name For v3 only enter the user name for the SNMP trap 5 Click the OK button The modified trap destination is displayed in the Trap Destinations table To delete a trap destination 1 N OA Select Configuration gt Resource gt Dial Up Interfaces The Dial Up Interfaces Panel apprears In the Dial out Interfaces table select the Automatic Dialout checkbox The Details for Interface panel appears in the lower half of the Dial
370. rations through SNMP Variables that are not supported are displayed as 0 Configuring routers to use Element Manager with SNMP Before you use the BCM for SNMP management you must ensure that the BCM and the optional integrated router are configured to allow SNMP queries to be received and responded to You will need to correctly configure NAT and Firewall settings for the router For information on using the router web based interface to modify these settings see the BCM50 Installation Guide and the BCMS50 Networking Guide The sections below provide an overview of configuring the router to enable SNMP management Connecting through the WAN In this scenario the LAN is configured as a private network with no public access Before beginning configuration ensure that both the BCM50 and the SNMP Management Station are working correctly If you are using the BCM50a or BCM50e only SNMPv1 is supported If you are using an external router you can use those versions of SNMP supported by that router To enable SNMP you must configure firewall settings add NAT rules and configure the SNMP port Configuring firewall settings If the firewall is enabled on the router several rules must be added so that the SNMP Management Station and the BCM50 can communicate If you are using a BCM50a or BCMS0e these settings are configured in the Router manager The first rule allows WAN to WAN communication e Source address Management station s IP Ad
371. rchased for your BCM50 To obtain and load a keycode you require the following e authorization code for the desired feature to demonstrate proof of ownership e system ID of the system to which you want to apply the new feature The authorization code is a six digit code you receive for each of the features you purchase The authorization code can be found on the label affixed to the Keycode information sheet on the last page of the Keycode Installation Guide NN40010 301 Figure 16 on page 66 shows the Element Manager keycode panel See the Keycode Installation Guide NN40010 301 for details on BCM50 keycodes Note You receive one keycode whether you purchase one feature or a bundle of features You receive an authorization code for each feature you purchase For example if you have one feature you receive one authorization code and one keycode If you purchase four features you receive four authorization codes and one keycode BCM50 Administration Guide 66 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment Figure 16 BCM50 Keycode panel iojxi Fie View Network Session Tools Help E Exit Element Navigation Panel 4 Task Navigation Panel p Berst amp Refresh 3 Auto retresh Keycodes Configuration administration 4 Feature licenses elcome a System Expiry Date Mentitication _ Vate and lime satiated oy Administrator Access fy Resources Di Fax Messaging pa telephony D ax M
372. rdware Inventory The BCMS50 Hardware Inventory panel provides information about the BCM50 physical system There are three tabs on the main Hardware Inventory panel Table 2 Hardware Inventory panel Tab Description BCM50 System Provides information about the key components of the BCM50 For more information see Viewing and updating information about the BCM50 system on page 126 Devices Provides information about any non BCM50 components connected to the system For more information see Viewing information about devices on page 129 Additional information Provides manufacturer details about the BCM50 For more information see Viewing additional information about the BCM50 hardware inventory on page 130 Note You can also add information about certain devices such as an asset ID and location information to facilitate tracking of the BCM50 hardware inventory in asset management systems Note You can save all of the information configured and displayed on the Hardware Inventory panels as a programming record See Saving programming records on page 58 for information about how to generate this record BCM50 Administration Guide 126 Chapter 5 Using the BCM50 Hardware Inventory Viewing and updating information about the BCM50 system You can view and update certain information about the BCM50 main unit using the System tab on the Hardware Inventory panel The Syst
373. re Update task The Software Update panel opens The Updates in Progress tab is open Click the Scheduled Updates tab In the Scheduled Software Updates table select a scheduled update Click the Modify button The Modify Scheduled Software Update window opens aj Modify Software Update S Retrieve 2005 01 11 1228 08 Apply 2008 01 11 12 28 08 6 Click the Retrieve field to select a date and time at which to retrieve the update A calendar window opens Select a retrieve date and time and then close the window Click the Apply field to select a date and time at which to apply the update A calendar window opens 9 Select an apply date and time and then close the window 10 Click the OK button The modified software update is displayed in the Scheduled Software Updates table The modification may take a few minutes to appear in the table NN40020 600 Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates 337 To delete a scheduled software update In the task panel click the Administration tab Open the Software Management folder and then click the Software Update task The Software Update panel opens The Updates in Progress tab is open Click the Scheduled Updates tab In the Scheduled Software Updates table select a scheduled update Click the Delete button The Confirm Delete window opens Click the Yes button to delete the update The scheduled update is removed from the S
374. red For an alphanumeric password the level is from 0 to 4 For a numeric password the level is from 0 to 5 Variable Table Variable Value 0 no complexity checks 1 only one character type is required 2 at least two character types are required 3 at least three character types are required 4 all four character types are required A password complexity higher than 0 will ensure that the user name is not used as the password The four character types are e lowercase letters e uppercase letters e numbers e A amp and spaces Complexity Level Element Manager Complexity Level Telset 0 no complexity checks 1 one unique digit 2 two unique digits 3 three unique digits 4 four unique digits 5 prevent consecutive numbering For example 1935 or 8634971 are valid passwords Passwords such as 1234 3456 2468 8642 8765 or 9753 would be invalid Setting lockout policy for failed logins Setting Lockout on Failed Login allows the administrator to set lockout rules Administrators can unlock accounts that have been locked out see Re enable a locked out user on page 96 for more information To set lockout policy for failed logins 1 Select Configuration Administrator Access Security Policies gt Local Authentication Policy 2 Inthe Lockout on Failed Login section select the Enable lockout check box to enable lockout capabilities 3 Inthe Lockout counter box enter
375. resh F5 Allows you to refresh the data shown on the window BCM50 Administration Guide 44 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment Table 3 Initial Element Manager window attributes Continued Network This menu is not available when a connected device is selected When the Network Elements folder icon is selected in the Network Elements tree the following options are available e New Folder Allows you to create a new folder on the Network Elements tree Folders allow you to organize your devices e New Network Element Allows you to create a new entry under the Network Elements tree This menu item opens up a dialog box that allows you to enter access parameters for a new Business Communications Manager device to which you want to connect Once you have connected to the device this information is saved by Element Manager and the device remains present in the Network Elements tree Required information is the IP address for the device with which you want to connect e Find Network Elements Opens a search dialog box that allows you to do search for devices within a range of IP addresses by using an SNMP query This function only locates BCM50s that have SNMP turned on by default SNMP is turned off When an unconnected device is selected in the network element tree the following options are available under the Network selection e Delete Allows you to delete the original entry in the Element Manager
376. rforming an immediate log transfer to a network folder Note The time required to transfer log files varies with the amount of log data Es being collected and the speed of your devices and network To perform an immediate log transfer to a network folder 1 Click the Administration tab and then open the Logs folder 2 Click the Log Management task The Log Management panel opens Click the Immediate Log Transfer tab In the Transfer To selection field select Network Folder Configure the Transfer to Network Folder attributes Table 90 Configure the Transfer to Network Folder attributes Attribute Action Network Folder Enter the hostname or IP address of the network folder and the resource name For example enter lt server gt lt resource gt User Name Enter the user name associated with the network folder Password Enter the password associated with the network folder Directory Enter the path to the subdirectory as applicable optional 6 Click the Transfer button The Transfer window opens BCM50 Administration Guide 308 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs Select the log file categories that you want to include in the log file transfer Click the OK button A confirmation window opens and displays applicable warnings 9 Click the Yes button to initiate the transfer The Progress Update window opens When the log files are transferred the Transfer Complete window opens
377. rics e PvOM e Utilities e BCM Monitor Ping Trace Route a Fthornot rtinihe BCM50 Administration Guide 60 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment Figure 10 ene record in an Excel subunit EG Microsoft Excel programming record oj x rea File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Adobe PDF Type ac stele S lt 1D a ed 3 4 9 Bi ava z1 eo 2 283 ia fa 2a d D ps o A By oa Ye Reply with Changes End Review B Ad 52 fe Hardware Inventory __ Ga earn A eee cn CE B C D E m Hardware Invento l 2 3 15 Gites Value System Nortel Business Communications 6 Manager 7 Type chassis 8 System name bem50R2 9 System ID 0016C4417D10 10 Model BCM50be 11 Serial number NNTMH400069Y 42 Customer asset ID 13 Owner name 14 Location of this system 15 Last change for the system 2006 09 14 10 16 17 16 BCM50 Expansion Chassis Expansion Chassis Present Asset ID Field Replaceable MBM 19 1 talse true 20 false true 21 23 Attached Devices DN Model 26 233 Analog 27 234 Analog 28 385 1120E 2002 29 Property Value at Moa gt i Summa Alarms AlarmSettings SNMPTraps SvcMor HwInvnt QosMon UPSM Ready NUM A To create this file you use the Save Programming Record command on the Session menu The Save Programming Record provides four menu options Figure 11 shows the menu options a
378. rity and privacy features of SNMP v3 The Service Access Point tab is not visible if SNMPv3 is not selected on the SNMP General Settings tab You can view and configure the following parameters associated with service access points the user name associated with the service access point the authentication protocol the type of access the encryption protocol the authentication pass phrase the privilege pass phrase You can add modify and delete service access points To add a service access point 1 2 3 5 Click the Configuration tab Open the Administrator Access folder and then click SNMP Click the Service Access Points tab The Service Access Points panel is displayed Click the Add button The Add Service Access Point dialog box opens Configure the Add Service Access Point attributes Table 42 Add Service Access Point Attributes Attribute Action User Name Enter the name of the user associated with the service access point Authentication Select the authentication protocol Options are None MD5 SHA Protocol Type of Access Select the type of access Options are Read Only and Read Write Encryption Select the encryption Options are None DES 3DES AES Engine ID Enter an engine ID when you add a user that will be used for SNMP v3 communications The engine ID is made up of hexidecimal digits with a colon separating each digit Leave the engine ID blank when you add a user that w
379. ronment 33 Provides a description of the application and information about where to find it Administrator documentation is provided in English User documentation is provided in the following languages English French Danish German Spanish Dutch Italian Norwegian Swedish Portuguese BCM50 Management Environment and Applications A number of tools are available to help manage your BCM50 This section describes the following tools Managing BCMS0 with Element Manager Managing BCM50 with Telset administration on page 34 Managing BCM50 Voicemail and ContactCenter CallPilot Manager on page 34 Managing Digital Mobility on page 34 Programming telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio on page 34 Performing initialization Startup Profile on page 35 Monitoring BCM50 BCM Monitor on page 35 Managing BCM50 remotely with SNMP on page 35 Managing BCM50 with Element Manager The primary management application for configuring and administering the BCM50 system is the BCM Element Manager The BCM Element Manager is a client based management application that runs on a Windows computer or on a Citrix server The BCM Element Manager allows for connection to BCM50 devices over an IP network It is used to configure administer and monitor BCMS0 devices See Element Manager on page 36 for more information about the BCM Element Manager You can download the BCM Element Manager app
380. roup Yes Yes Yes Yes critical Service Manager Service Manager IP Terminal Service EchoServer has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager This will affect IP terminals from operating properly Reboot system and contact your local support group Yes Yes Yes Yes critical Service Manager Service Manager IP Terminal Firmware upload Service UftpServer has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager This will affect the ability to download new firmware to IP terminals Reboot system and contact your local support group Yes Yes es es BCM50 Administration Guide 180 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System m85 10129 critical Service Manager Service Manager Doorphone service BCM_Doorphone has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager This will affect the ability to use a doorphone on the system Reboot system and contact your local support group es es es es critical Service Manager Service Manager IP Music Service BcomAmp has stopped unexpectedly and could not be restarted by service manager This will affect the ability to use IP music Reboot system and contact your local support group Yes Yes es critical Service Manager Service Manager IP Music
381. ry 233 CSU Alarms 232 CSU statistics 230 Disabling or enabling a port chan nel setting 229 Viewing D Channel information 229 Viewing Performance History in formation 229 Viewing Trunk Module status 227 UPS Monitor Accessing 223 Telephony Metrics Overview 227 Minimum and maximum values resetting 264 Minimum and maximum values viewing 263 NN40020 600 Index 351 Minimum and maximum values viewing the date and time 264 minimum password length 77 minimum user ID length 77 modem callback number users 116 N Nortel service challenge key 77 NTP Metrics See Metrics P password complexity 77 current user 112 current user telset 112 last successful log in 112 lockout duration 78 minimum length 77 Ping 265 Ping to ping a device 265 post log in message enable disable 76 private security key 124 Q QoS Monitor See Metrics R Rebooting the BCM system 268 regulatory information 2 related publications 20 Reset 267 reset lockout counter 78 Restore options 290 Restores performing 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 Restoring Logs See Backup and Restore Logs Restoring about 290 Restoring data from the BCM 293 294 295 296 297 298 RTP Sessions tab 256 S security callback number user accounts 116 challenge key 77 change password 93 disable user accounts 115 locking out users 115 lockout duration 78 minimum password length 77 minimum user ID length 77 password co
382. s Attribute Value Description Group History Group created read only Specifies the date the group account was created Created by Specifies the user who created the account NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 119 Table 31 View by Groups General panel fields Continued Attribute Value Description Last modified read only Specifies the last date the group account was changed Modified by Specifies the user who performed the changes Group Privileges Privileges Description read only Lists the system access privileges that are allowed to members of the selected group Actions Add Opens the Add Privilege to Group dialog box Allows the privilege to be added to the group Delete Opens the Confirm Delete dialog box Allows the privilege to be deleted from a group BCM50 Administration Guide 120 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges View by Groups Members For a selected group in the Groups table View by Groups on page 118 you can use the Members panel to assign the group to existing user accounts and to view which accounts have the selected group assigned Table 32 describes each field on this panel Table 32 View by Groups Group Membership fields Attribute Value Description Description read only Lists the user accounts in the selected group User ID alphanum
383. s occur much more quickly than network or FTP transfers depending on the speed of the USB drive The USB storage device must be connected to the BCM50 The backup and log information can be saved only to the top level of the USB storage drive file hierarchy Transfers from the BCM50 to a USB storage device are relatively secure but a USB storage device is small and can be stolen easily if it is not in a secure location The USB storage device must be formatted as a FAT32 drive The following USB storage devices have been tested and are supported e SanDisk 512 MB Cruzer Mini USB 2 0 Flash Drive e SanDisk 256 MB Cruzer Mini USB 2 0 Flash Drive e Lexar 512 MB Jumpdrive Sport 2 0 Rubber C e Kingston 256 MB 2 0 DataTraveler Memory DataTraveler PLUS e Kingston DataTraveler USB FlashDrive 256 DataTraveler ELITE e Apacer 256 MB USB 2 0 HT202 Handy Drive If your USB storage device is not on this list and you are encountering problems transferring information to or from the BCM50 device Nortel recommends using one of the devices listed here NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 73 HTTP HTTPS server HTTP and HTTPS servers are available as an option only for software updates It can be a good solution if you have many BCM50s that require software updates from a centralized location See Table 16 for the information required to use an HTTP or HTTPS server Table 16 Configure HTTP or HTTPS server attributes
384. sanacbosigueks bese isinen santero ani 141 Te odie tap destinati Oesia a i Ea eUas nae 143 Gees ei a tap de 1 0 2 UL Oihecnsnian reer er terre Prete eret rene or erree rere ere ree 144 Te Contains cate SNMP CaO rriei ann TEE 145 Using the BCM Fault Management System 0000eee eee 147 Tovon anmala eee reeenet reer errr reece e rere erent rier ects treat rere terior tera rrrr ea Tree tenet rrr ert yt 151 Te Sc bowled Ge ail GAN ansaa eaten 151 We en WAS AU AN VU PO aa ads measbaaneaaiedaieal 151 To include or omit acknowledged alarms in the Alarm Banner ccccceeeeeeeeees 153 To Spec e aAa eo eer eee eee eee ene ete et mere eter rere rete ere error een frre 154 Te cleat all alarm irom the alarmi Bet ick acetal arate i a aae 154 To resetiho SS LED os ass cas case Sick toiamas aiii 155 To enable or disable SNMP traps for AlarMs ccececeeeeceeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeaeeeenaeees 156 To enable or disable viewing of selected alarms in the Alarms table cceee 156 To View stings for The alarm Bet si casissnsdiavietienetetivda east ae a eles 156 gg Coote Vee E01 1 Renee era rer peer terre renner reer reer Cr rere RR eet opr rier ter ener ey ree rittcry creer rer et 157 Using the BCM50 Service Management System 22006 215 Te view details abaut Soi assais eiaa eerie Ges 217 Torsion ASICS e R EEE 218 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics 00ce ee enews 219 TO conigure Montonng ModGesssnd
385. secured mode CIM XML is the main management protocol used by the BCM and is only available through an authenticated and authorized SSL connection User access is controlled based on assigned privilege levels Multiple data transfer protocols are supported for the various applications including SCP SAMBA and FTP SSH is used by customer support personnel for troubleshooting purposes only There are special authentication parameters for this interface BCM50 Administration Guide 122 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges Security audits A security log file is created at system startup to record user logins and transactions This log is rolled each day and kept until the maximum log size is reached When the maximum size is reached the oldest record is deleted to make room for the newest record For information about managing logs see Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs on page 301 Administrators can view security logs using the Log Management capabilities found under the Administration tab Each security log record contains e the time of the event e the user ID e a summary of the action performed in the configchange systemlog System security considerations To define security parameters for the system and for users you must consider what level of security you need to meet your network security standard Note that the default security settings are not set to their maximum secure settings and
386. ser Nortel recommends WordPad since this application retains the column structure of the logs Overview of transferring and extracting log files You use the BCM50 Element Manager to transfer log files from the BCM50 to an external location You must transfer the log files to an external device before you can view them If you are using the BCM50 Element Manager Log Browser to view the logs you will also have to extract the log files from the log archive that is transferred from the BCM50 The log archive contains a collection of log files When you transfer the log archives to another device you can specify e the location to which you want to transfer log files such as your personal computer or a network folder e the category of logs you want to transfer such as Sensitive Information logs e a schedule for a log file transfer You can also transfer log files using the BCM50 Web page if you cannot access the BCM50 Element Manager After you transfer the log archives several options are available to you for extracting the log file information and for viewing the log files If you are using the BCM50 Element Manager recommended the Log Browser prompts you to extract the actual log files from the tar file If you prefer you can use the WinZip application to expand the tar file into its included log files As an alternative to using the Element Manager Log Browser you can use an application such as WordPad to view the log files
387. severity levels Alarm Set core telephony Alarm Severity Alarms Panel LEDs SNMP alarms only Critical Yes Yes Yes Yes Major Yes Yes Yes Yes Minor Yes No No No Warning Yes No No No Information Yes No No No BCM50 Administration Guide 150 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System Administering alarms Alarm information can be delivered to you by any of the following means e the Alarms Panel in the BCM Element Manager e the Alarm Banner in the BCM Element Manager e the alarm set core telephony alarms only e Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP traps for remote management of faults e LEDs on the BCM main unit Using the Alarms Panel You can view real time alarm information using the Alarms Panel in the BCM Element Manager Each alarm has a unique identifier Alarms are displayed in the Alarms table sorted by date and time by default with the newest at the top of the table The Alarms table displays from 50 to 400 alarms For information about modifying the maximum number of alarms that are displayed see Configuring alarm settings The Alarms table contains the following elements e Time the date and time of the alarm e Alarm ID the unique alarm ID associated with the alarm e Severity the severity of the alarm Critical Major Minor Warning and Information e Problem Description a description of the alarm condition e Component ID the proc
388. sis read ainda eae ian Oa asda aa ae 220 WRG NIRS FOCI ING IIMS supii tate ede 221 Te view the QoS monitoring MfOnMANOND riris eecccdearmmasnentcanenceeess 222 To refresh the QoS monitor data isscssccecscassceicaxaaicess mcibsteeianmarasesaassxeeticmaieectionsnentaens 223 te access UPS DRE naon 223 Toacoess hie NTF Diet ee cirios te diinbealqeneainds 226 Te view Tiunk Module SARIS arseron nEaN TAANE 227 To disable or enable a B channel Setting s iissirserrisiisirssnsisnissenidnsirvursinsinisdnanni reanna 229 Te prevision a FPA B naniel seiis s aa S a a N 230 To enable the intemal CSU ccc sessinasiecacasnbntedaure ties tacaansetumedionmalesinaeaaseelaanetinuinn 231 To CHEEK THE psrormance statisties sic siessceerecessinervssivrsrestasssiuaaseussideasidtiemnidenianiiests 231 To check ihe CSU alame ericsson ieeeanamenreersieneecrawereuaainesna eens 232 Te check Caries failure SBMS ineas ie a eee 232 Toone opaa viO e ietabaiaca tied saeab esau eonleataataaetie 232 Tocheck Shorten Aamunsini rer teers reer mr erry cert rer tert ett 233 TP OAC ODO G ede iuee ad vacts eased 233 Te view Coll Alpini HEO aeie a hu eh 233 To access the COG limit MetriCS ss ssccissensrcetiamastccranienisenioninceladinsa bearamedioeiomnisestaars 234 Te access ihe Hunt Group MetiCS soc cctcecsscrsstssiscreidirnantiar it tE a EE R 236 To access PSTN Fallback iets ss scccsssssacanicesnanaaiiansninesaeesnnananin naanin naniii araa 237 To configure PYQM threshold setig S enecens nnan
389. sk The Software Update panel opens The Updates in Progress tab is open BCM50 Administration Guide 334 Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates 3 Click the Scheduled Updates tab The Scheduled Software Updates panel opens CREE het nent Manager 192 168 249 27 General System Status lelephony Metrics ee eam nll ial onl csi nl sil na call 4 Click the Add button The Get New Updates window opens 5 Inthe Retrieve From selection field select the location where the software update is stored USB Storage Device My Computer Network Folder FTP Server HTTP Server 6 Select an update location and or complete the appropriate access information For more information see the procedures in Applying software updates NN40020 600 Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates 335 7 Click the OK button The New Updates Found window opens and displays a list of updates found in the specified location E New Updates Found Select the update s you want to schedule Software Update Narne J Version Description i Size ija Req d I Status ecovery Update 1 0 0 0 ackup and res ation file stalled Security Update 1 0 1 2 Disables security settings for build 1 18 Security Update 1 0 1 4 Disables security settings for build 1 19b Show Details Schedule Select an update The update must have a status of Available 10 11 12 13 14 15 To view the det
390. st Save all tabs Automatic snapshot Enable automatic snapshot Iv Automatic snapshot interval sec 5 Number of snapshots 5 OK Cancel 8 To remove a tab from the snapshots select a tab from the Tabs Saved in Snapshot box and use the arrow button to move the tab to the Tabs Not Saved in Snapshot box 9 Inthe Automatic Snapshot area click the Enable Automatic Snapshot check box to enable automatic snapshots If you disable automatic snapshots BCM Monitor will take a single snapshot instead of a series of snapshots If you enable automatic snapshots the Automatic Snapshot Interval sec field and the Number of Snapshots field become available 10 In the Automatic Snapshot Interval sec field enter the interval in seconds between successive automatic snapshots 11 In the Number of Snapshots field enter the number of snapshots from 1 to Infinite 12 Click the OK button Starting a dynamic snapshot Once you have configured dynamic snapshot settings you can start a dynamic snapshot Once you start dynamic logging BCM Monitor continues taking snapshots until it reaches the number of snapshots you defined when you configured dynamic snapshot settings or until you stop a dynamic snapshot When you start dynamic snapshots the BCM Monitor status bar displays Dynamic snapshot active the figure below shows the status bar portion of the panel NN40020 600 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities 253 Voice ports
391. st quality according to ITU T G 107 3 Configure the polling interval PVQM alarms If an alarm is generated to report a threshold violation additional information is included in the alarm to indicate the source of the alarm and provide other troubleshooting information Table 63 lists the abbreviations used in the alarm text to present this additional information Table 63 PVQM alarm information Abbreviation Attribute Value Description cT codec type alphanumeric Vocoder type used on this call eT endpoint type SorD S indicates softclient D indicates desktop nLR network loss rate percentage scaled by Rate of network packet loss 256 e g 354 1 4 dR average discard rate percentage scaled by Average rate of discards due to jitter 256 bD burst loss density percentage scaled by Density of lost and discarded 256 packets during burst periods bL burst length milliseconds Average length of bursts gD gap loss density percentage scaled by Density of lost and discarded 256 packets during gap periods gL average length of gap milliseconds average length of gap BCM50 Administration Guide 242 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics Table 63 PVQM alarm information Abbreviation Attribute Value Description eSD end system delay milliseconds Average end system delay on the call aNL noise level dBm Measured received silent period noise level aSP av
392. stamp the system up time Table 110 lists the BCM50 specific SNMP variable bindings Table 110 BCM50 specific variable bindings Trap Field Description Binding 1 Contains the corresponding alarm ID OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 562 37 3 1 1 0 Binding 2 Contains the name of the software component that generated the alarm trap This is in the 3 part DN format defined in the Nortel Common Alarm Framework The 3 part DN is in the format systemld BCM entityld System Name subEntityld Component Name OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 562 37 3 1 2 0 Binding 3 Contains the alarm trap Date and Time OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 562 37 3 1 3 0 Binding 4 Contains the alarm trap problem description OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 562 37 3 1 4 0 BCM50 Administration Guide 348 Appendix A Management Information Bases NN40020 600 349 Index A account created users 117 account expiry users 116 account failed login 117 account modified users 117 account successful login 117 Application backups about 272 applications callback numbers users 116 Backing up and restoring overview 271 Backup and Restore Data Backup Backup destinations 274 Creating a scheduled backup 283 284 285 286 288 Overview 271 Restore 290 Options 290 Backup schedule creating 281 Backup schedule creating or modifying 289 Backup schedule deleting 290 Backup schedule modifying 289 Backup destinations 274 Backu
393. stopped Element Manager will be unable to connect with the system No Action Required Yes No No 214 Warning Service Manager Service Manager IP Terminal Service EchoServer has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped This will affect IP terminals from operating properly No Action Required Yes No No BCM50 Administration Guide 186 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 215 10225 Warning Service Manager Service Manager IP Terminal Firmware upload Service UftpServer has been stopped leither due to user laction or because Service Manager has stopped this service due toa dependency on another service that has been stopped This will affect the lability to download new firmware to IP terminals No Action Required es INO No Warning Service Manager Service Manager Doorphone service BCM_Doorphone has been stopped either due to user action or because Service Manager has stopped this service due to a dependency on another service that has been stopped This will affect the ability to use a doorphone on the system No Action Required Yes No No Warning Service Manager Service Manager IP Music Service BcmAmp has been stopped either due to user act
394. store folder and then click Restore The Restore panel opens In the Restore From selection field select Network Folder Configure the Restore from Network Folder attributes Table 86 Configure Restore from Network Folder attributes Attribute Action Network Folder Enter the hostname or IP address of the network folder and resource name For example lt server gt lt resource gt User Name Enter the user name associated with the network folder Password Enter the password associated with the network folder Directory Enter the path to the subdirectory as applicable optional File Enter the name of the backup file A window opens and displays information about the backup file including a warning that the selected backup file will replace the backup file currently stored on the BCM Caution When you proceed to the next step the selected file will overwrite the backup file that is stored on the BCM Ensure that the correct backup file is selected before proceeding 5 Click the Open button The Select Components to Restore window opens Select the optional components that you want to include from the backup file Click the OK button A warning window opens and displays information about components that will be affected by the restore operation Read the warning carefully before proceeding BCM50 Administration Guide 296 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 8 Click
395. system EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User EM CONFIG Resources all M CONFIG Telephony all M CONFIG Data Services DHCP Server Setting M CONFIG Applications LAN CTE M CONFIG Applications Voice Messaging M CONFIG Applications Contact Center M ADMIN General Alarm EM ADMIN General Alarm Setting EM ADMIN Utilities Inventory EM ADMIN General Alarm EM ADMIN General Alarm Setting EM ADMIN System Status Qos Monitor EM ADMIN System Status NTP Metrics E E E E E E BCM50 Administration Guide 106 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges EM ADMIN Telephone Metrics all EM ADMIN Utilities BCM Monitor EM ADMIN Utilities Reboot EM ADMIN Software Management all as read only Web Documentation User Documentation Backup Operators access privileges EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User EM ADMIN Backup and Restore Admin Backup EM ADMIN Backup and Restore Admin Restore Web Documentation User Documentation Web User Applications Remote Monitoring access privileges EM CONFIG Administrator Access Current User EM ADMIN General Alarm as read only M ADMIN General Alarm Setting as read only M ADMIN General SNMP Trap Destinations M gt DMIN General Service Manager as read only M ADMIN General Inventory as r
396. system outage CFA types reported can be mapped to CFAs defined in TIA 547A and TR62411 as shown in Table 57 Table 57 Carrier failure alarms Business Communications Manager TIA 547A TR62411 LOS CFA RED CFA RED CFA OOF CFA RED CFA RED CFA AIS CFA RED CFA AIS CFA RAI CFA YELLOW CFA YELLOW CFA The criteria for declaring and clearing the alarms is selectable to meet those in TIA 547A or TR64211 You can also view Carrier Failure Alarms as Core Telephony Alarms in the Alarm Viewer Enabling the internal CSU Use the following procedure to enable the internal CSU to gather performance statistics for your T1 lines or PRI with public interface To enable the internal CSU 1 Choose Configuration Resources Telephony Resources The window displays the expansion modules Choose the appropriate expansion module For example select Expansion 1 For the selected module choose the Trunk Module Parameters tab In the T1 Parameters section select the Internal CSU check box to enable the Internal CSU To check the performance statistics 1 Choose Administration Telephony Metrics Trunk Module Metrics 2 Choose the appropriate expansion module that contains the module that you want to check 3 Choose Performance tab BCM50 Administration Guide 232 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics 4 The Current interval displays the duration of the current 15 minute interval of the selected card the numbe
397. t The Element Manager attempts to connect to the selected element Ifthe connection is successful Element Manager opens the Configuration and Administration tabs associated to the selected device See Element Manager panels on page 51 for an explanation of the Element Manager screen layout Ifthe Element Manager fails to connect an error message appears describing the connection problem Correct the problem and perform the steps again If you have a recurring problem contact Nortel Support for help in resolving the problem Disconnecting from an element You can disconnect Element Manager from a BCMS0 by using one of the following Disconnecting in the Element Navigation Panel on page 41 Disconnecting through the menu bar on page 42 Disconnecting in the Element Navigation Panel 1 Right click the IP address that you want to disconnect in the Network Element Navigation Panel Select Disconnect Click Yes in the Confirmation dialog box to confirm the disconnect request BCM50 Administration Guide 42 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment Disconnecting through the menu bar 1 Click Session on the menu bar 2 Select the IP address of the device you want to disconnect 3 Select Disconnect from the list of tasks that are displayed 4 Click Yes in the Confirmation dialog box to confirm the disconnect request Warning Clicking the X box on the upper right corner causes the Element A Manager applic
398. t If this field is left blank the session is only ended when the user logs off Active sessions User ID read only Displays the user ID of the active session IP address read only Displays the IP address of the active session Login date read only Displays the login date of the active session SSL and SSH Policy tab SSL BCM50 Administration Guide 80 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges Table 17 Security Policies fields Continued Attribute Value Description Install Web Server Button Downloads application security certificates to the server where Certificate SSL SSH is running to ensure a secure copy connection for operations like backup and restore upgrades and patches SSH Fingerprint alphanumeric Displays an indentifier for the application security certificate Button Opens the file system browser to allow a system specific Generate new SSH security certificate and the accompanying Private key to be key pair selected for SSL Transfer Public Key Button Downloads a public security certificate or an SSH key pair to an SFTP server Configuring system security policies This section provides procedures for setting system level security that applies to all configured users for installing the web server certificate and for downloading the SSH key pair Use the tabs on the security policies panel to perform the following procedures En
399. t error gt 606 63012 Critical Media MGS lt entity gt Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Gateway kinterface gt returned support group Server error lt error gt 607 63018 critical Media MGS Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Gateway ResourceMediaCon Support group Server itroller OID lt oid gt DSP Task Lost 608 30T9 information Media MGS Shutting down No Action Required Yes No No Gateway due to IP address as service manager Server change will restart 609 66003 major IP Telephony P Telphony Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Provider Provider fatal error support group was detected 610 6004 minor IP Telephony IP Telpnony Contact your local Yes No No fe Provider Provider error was Support group detected 61T 66005 major IP Telephony IP Telpnony Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Provider Provider software support group lexception 12 6006 minor IP Telephony IP Telphony Contact your local Yes No No fe Provider Provider shutting Support group down due to fatal error 613 57002 warning Survivable Survivable Remote No Action Required Yes No No Remote Gateway DN XXX Gateway Test Local Mode 614 67003 warning Survivable Survivable Remote Check your firmware Yes No No Remote Gateway DN XXX jon the system to Gateway Local Mode ensure it s the same Firmware is out of revision as the main sync with Main office Office Call Server 615 67004 warning Survivable Survivable Remote No Act
400. t module type module is is programmed for programmed as the the expansion wrong module type chassis 24 62 critical Core Core Telephony Perform a restore Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony Persistent Data with a known good Repository backup If problem corruption in the persists contact your auto answer area local support group NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 161 critical Core Core Telephony If this happens more Yes es es es Telephony No DTMF receivers than once ina 5 available minute span check that any auto answer lor DISA configured trunks are operating properly If they are not operating properly reboot the system and contact your local support group critical Core Core Telephony Power down the Yes Yes Yes Yes Telephony __ Invalid trunk media system and check all bay module connections to the connected to an expansion chassis expansion chassis containing the digital lor analog trunk module Check that the hardware being lused is supported in the market your have selected in Core Telephony If the problem persists replace the module critical Core Core Telephony Disconnect the set Yes Yes es Yes Telephony Unsupported set peripheral from the peripheral port and reconnect it connected to a valid port If the problem persists replace the set peripheral critical Core Core Telephony Reboot system and Yes Yes Yes Y
401. tch Information CTI Return Code Pld 12 Warning Modem Call Modem Call Control Contact your local Yes No No Control MCC Failed to support group Answer Modem Call CTI Return Code ld 113 B030 Warning Modem Call Modem Call Control Contact your local Yes No No Control MCC Failed to support group Acknowledge Modem Request CTI Return Code Pld TTA Warning Modem Call Modem Call Control Contact your locat Yes No No Control MCC Failed to support group Originate a Call CTI Return Code ld 115 B032 Warning Modem Call Modem Call Control Contact your local Yes No No Control MCC Failed to support group Disconnect a Call CTI Return Code Pld 16 Warning Modem Call Modem Call Control Contact your local Yes No No Control MCC Received support group Unknown Request from Modem Request ld TT7 information Modem Call Modem Call Control No Action Required Yes INO INO Control MCC Modem Auto Disabled information Modem Ca odem Call Control No Action Required Yes 0 Control MCC Modem Call Put on Hold Disconnecting NN40020 600 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 171 Warning Modem Call Modem Call Control Contact your local es No No Control MCC Failed to support group Open Prompts Library NNU Return Code ld information Modem Call Modem Call Control No Action Required
402. terprise network model NOC Domain BCM Network Domain Network Sio Configuration Server Manager NCM DE g S A Wireless VolP NCM Element Manager Database Workstation SNMP Network Manager Workstation PSTN l V 90 l Modem SNMP Network oi m Manager Server Remote es Dialup J BCM50 interfaces The BCM50 network can be distributed geographically across different sites The network administrator must be able to remotely access each BCM50 in the network BCM50 offers alternatives for connecting to the BCM50 devices depending on the network configuration and telephony resources available with a given system LAN A Local Area Network LAN is a communications network that connects workstations and computers within a confined geographical area Often the customer LAN has access to a router forming a connection to the Internet NN40020 600 Chapter 2 Overview of BCM50 Administration 29 A network administrator can connect to and manage a BCM50 via an IP over LAN interface If the administrator is accessing the BCM50 system from an external network then a connectivity path would need to be provided from the corporate LAN network to the customer s WAN network or to the customer s ISP provider over another device such as a router elsewhere on the customer s premises Dialup The modem supports callback for management user access to the BCM50 It can be used to support au
403. the Administrator Access folder and then click SNMP Click the General tab The General panel is displayed Configure the SNMP Agent settings Table 38 SNMP Agent Settings Attribute Action Engine ID The engine ID is the SNMP agents engine ID This field is read only and is for information purposes only Port Number The port number is a read only field that shows the SNMP agent s local port number The port number is 161 To configure BCM50 SNMP settings 1 Click the Configuration tab Open the Administrator Access folder and then click SNMP Click the General tab The General panel is displayed In the SNMP Settings area click the Modify button The Modify SNMP Settings dialog box opens NN40020 600 Chapter 6 Managing BCM50 with SNMP 137 5 Configure SNMP settings Table 39 Configure SNMP Settings Attributes Attribute Action Enable SNMP Agent Select whether to enable or disable the SNMP agent by selecting the check box Minimum Required Security Select the minimum required security for SNMP Options are AuthNoPriv or NoAuthNoPriv Valid for SNMP v3 SNMP Version Support Select the appropriate version from the drop down list The following combinations of SNMP versions are allowed Option 1 SNMP v1 SNMP v2 and SNMP v3 Option 2 SNMP v3 only This option provides more stringent security protection than option 1 does Option 3 SNM
404. then click Trace Route The Trace Route panel opens 3 In the Maximum Number of Hops field enter the maximum number of hops on the route The default is 5 hops 4 Inthe Address field enter the IP address of the element for which you want to perform a trace route 5 Click the Trace Route button The results are displayed in the Results area Ethernet Activity The Ethernet Activity panel is a utility that you can use to view ethernet activity in the BCM50 system NN40020 600 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities 267 To view Ethernet activity 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Open the Utilities folder and then click Ethernet Activity The Ethernet Activity panel opens 3 In the Ethernet Activity area click the Retrieve button Details are displayed in the Results area Reset You can use the Reset utility to e reboot the BCM50 system e perform a warm reset of telephony services e perform a cold reset of telephony services e perform a cold reset of the router Table 68 lists the Reset functions Table 68 Reset functions defaults for that software level Function Description Impact Reboot BCM50 System Restarts the operating system of the Temporarily stops all services on the BCM50 system system Restarts all services This operation does not affect configuration parameters or programming Warm Reset Telephony Restarts telephony services running Restarts all telephony services Services on the
405. tion and active calls Dynamic snapshots are captured according to a frequency that you define Once dynamic snapshots are enabled BCM Monitor saves dynamic snapshot information to a file on your personal computer using the comma separated value csv file format You can open this file using a spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel NN40020 600 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities 251 You can e specify which information you want to dynamically log e enable or disable automated dynamic snapshots e specify the interval of time between successive snapshots Time intervals are specified in seconds You can specify a maximum number of snapshots or infinite logging To configure dynamic snapshot settings 1 On the File menu select Snapshot Settings The Snapshot Settings panel opens Click the Dynamic Snapshot Settings tab In the Path and Filename area enter the filename for the dynamic snapshot in the Output Filename field For additional options click the Arrow button to the right of the Output Filename field 4 Configure the Output Filename attributes Table 66 Output filename attributes Attribute Action Auto Increment Counter Automatically increments the filename so that subsequent files do not overwrite earlier files Adds lt counter gt to the filename in the Output Filename field BCM Name Adds the name of the BCM to the filename Position your cursor in the filename field where you want the name t
406. to dialout on SNMP traps as well as automated sending of Call Detail Records CDR to aremote CDR collection point Due to modest dialup speeds the administrator will find that the Element Manager panels take longer to load than if the Element Manager is directly connected through the OAM port or over a high bandwidth connection Configuration backups can be less than 1 Mbyte in size however if voicemail greetings and messages are included they could grow considerably larger If the performance being realized over the modem does not meet expectations the administrator may choose to run backups to the local hard drive or a USB memory device For more information on modem configuration see the BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 WAN A Wide Area Network WAN is a communications network that covers a wide geographic area such as state or country A WAN usually consists of two or more local area networks LANs Computers connected to a wide area network are often connected through public networks such as the telephone system or can be connected through private leased lines Management access over dial or BRI ports You can remotely manage the BCMS0 using ISDN BRI Dial over ISDN is supported for any type of BRI PRI Media Bay Module MBM in an expansion chassis and is also supported on the main unit for the BCM50b series models On the BCM50b series only RJ 45 ports provide connectivity for BRI trunks from the PSTN Pr
407. tory Last successful login read only Specifies the date the user last successfully logged on to Telset Failed login count read only Specifies the number of times the user tried and failed to log on before successfully logging in or being locked out If the count matches the failed login threshold a value of true is displayed in the Locked Out column on the Accounts table Last failed login read only Specifies the date that the user last tried and failed to logon From read only Telset Displays the DN of the telephone used to log into the system View by Accounts Group Membership The Group Membership panel allows you to associate the user account with one or more functional groups The user will have all the privileges assigned to each group that is added to the list Table 29 describes each field on this panel Table 29 Group membership fields Attribute Value Description Account is Default groups Lists groups the user is a member of Refer to Default groups Member of on page 99 for a list of the default groups and the privileges Groups associated with each Note Groups are added modified or deleted from the View by Groups on page 118 panel BCM50 Administration Guide 118 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges Table 29 Group membership fields Attribute Value Description Buttons Add Opens the Add Account di
408. try Policy tab Use the Entry Policy tab to perform the following procedure e Setting system access control policies on page 81 Local Authentication Policy tab Use the Local Authentication Policy tab to perform the following procedures e Setting credential complexity on page 81 e Setting lockout policy for failed logins on page 82 e Setting password expiry policy on page 83 e Setting password history policy on page 83 Authentication Service Policy tab Use the Authentication Service Policy tab to perform the following procedures e Setting the authentication method on page 83 e Configuring an authentication server on page 84 NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 81 Session Management Policy tab Use the Session Management Policy tab to perform the following procedure Setting the idle session timeout on page 88 SSL and SSH Policy tab Use the SSL and SSH Policy tab to perform the following procedures Uploading a Web Server Certificate on page 88 Transferring an SSH Key Pair on page 89 Setting system access control policies Setting system access control policies allows the administrator to set system access rules To set system access control policies 1 2 Select Configuration gt Administrator Access gt Security Policies gt Entry Policy Click in the Disable post login message box to prevent the Warning m
409. ts or informational conditions that may require resolution from the system administrator Examples of alarm conditions include e a Tl circuit on the system is down e a service running on the BCM has been stopped by an administrator Alarm information can be delivered to you by any of the following means e the Alarms Panel in the BCM Element Manager e the Alarm Banner in the BCM Element Manager e core telephony alarms show on the alarm set e Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP traps for remote management of faults e LEDs on the BCM main unit You can manage alarms and alarm information by e configuring alarm settings for example filtering alarms so that only the desired subset of alarms are displayed in the BCM Element Manager Alarms Panel or sent as SNMP traps e administering alarms for example acknowledging selected alarms and clearing the alarm log You can keep a record of alarm settings using the programming record For information about using the programming record see Saving programming records on page 58 BCM50 Administration Guide 148 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System About BCM alarms Alarms are generated by software components that are running on the BCM system and cover BCM services and applications Each component has a range of alarm IDs so that each BCM alarm has a unique alarm ID Table 47 lists the components and the alarm ID ranges Table 47 BCM components and Alarm ID rang
410. ttribute Action Memo Enter a note for the scheduled backup as applicable Recurrence Select how often the scheduled backup is to occur Options are Once Daily Weekly Monthly Depending on the option you choose the window displays selections for the month and day of month If you select Weekly days of the week are displayed Select the check box for Daily to select the day Month Select the month in which the scheduled backup is to occur Day of Month Select the day of the month on which the scheduled backup is to occur Time Select the time at which the scheduled backup is to occur 8 Click the OK button The scheduled backup is displayed in the Scheduled Backups table BCM50 Administration Guide 284 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data Performing a scheduled backup to a network folder Caution A backup operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever the backup will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a backup that does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a backup at a time when the system is typically not in use To perform a scheduled backup to a network folder 1 In the task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Backup The Backup panel opens and displays the Immediate Backup tab
411. tware updates e view the software inventory of the BCM50 e apply software updates at a scheduled time Overview of BCM50 software updates Using the Software Management task an administrator can view and manage software updates and upgrades to the BCM50 The Software Management interface consists of three panels e Software Updates used to manage the application of software updates to the BCM50 e Software Update History used to view the history of updates that have been applied to the BCM50 and to remove an applied update e Software Inventory used to view a complete list of software components their version and the functional group to which they belong Obtaining software updates Before you can apply a software update to your BCM50 you must obtain the software update and unzip the file Authorized Nortel partners can download BCMS0 software updates from the Nortel Technical Support web page To obtain updates from the Nortel Technical Support Web page 1 In your web browser enter lt address gt and then click the Go button The Nortel Technical Support Web page opens Download the required updates Create a directory for each update and unzip the downloaded file into a directory BCM50 Administration Guide 324 Chapter 13 Managing BCM50 Software Updates Viewing software updates in progress You can view the status of software updates that are transferring or waiting to be transferred or waiting to
412. twork state issues If long term alarms occur get your network provider to check the ircuit during problem conditions 55 minor Core Core Telephony Check your cabling Yes No No Telephony Remote Alarm from any DTM Indication short modules to the term alarm external network and threshold has been run loopback tests exceeded onthe on the circuit to DTM The module is check for network in ano new calls issues If long term state alarms occur get your network provider to check the circuit during problem conditions 56 information Core Core Telephony No Action Required Yes No No Telephony _ The Digital Trunk T1 E1 PRI has recovered 57 minor Core Core Telephony Determine whether Yes No No Telephony Digital Trunk Media this alarm occurred bay module reset due to the system rebooting If the system was not rebooting when the alarm occurred then contact your local support group 58 warning Core Core Telephony No Action Required Yes No No Telephony Clocking on the Digital Trunk Media lbay module has changed sources 569 40T minor Core Core Telephony Werity that all types Yes No INO Telephony Digital station loop fof attached sets initialization error peripherals initialize land function If something is not working reset it If the problem persists contact your local upport group 60 608 minor Core Core Telephony erify that all types Yes INO INO Telephony Unsupported set of attached sets peripheral peri
413. tworking technology Acronyms The following is a list of acronyms used in this guide Table 1 List of acronyms Acronym Description 3DES Triple Data Encryption Standard AES Analog Encryption Standard Als Alarm Indication Signal BCM Business Communications Manager BRI Basic Rate Interface CbC Call by Call CDR Call Detail Recording CFA Carrier Failure Alarms CLID Calling Line Identification CPE Customer Premises Equipment CSU Channel Service Unit DES Digital Encryption Standard DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DN Directory Number DNIS Dialed Number Idenification Service DTM Digital Trunk Module ES Errored Seconds HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol IP Internet Protocol ISDN Integrated Switched Digital Network LAN Local Area Network MBM Media Bay Module MIB Management Information Base MGS Media Gateway Server BCM50 Administration Guide 18 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM50 Table 1 List of acronyms Acronym Description MOS Mean Opinion Score MPS Media Path Server NAT Network Address Translation NCM Network Configuration Manager NOC Network Operations Center NTP Network Time Protocol OOF Out of Frame PPP Point to Point Protocol PRI Primary Rate Interface PBX Private Branch Exchange PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network PVQ
414. u must configure CIM XML services for NAT using the following rules e Name CIM XML e Start port 5989 e End port 5989 e Server IP address BCM LAN IP address BCM50 Administration Guide 124 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges Security certificate The BCM50 is delivered with a generic SSL security certificate The self signed certificate that is included in BCM enables SSL encryption functionality providing the necessary encryption keys There is also a facility to generate SSH certificates which are required in the setup of a SSH server if SCP is used as a transfer method Security certificates rely on an NTP server for time and date information The NTP server synchronizes the clocks of computers over an IP network therefore manual time settings are unnecessary for security certificates Understanding BCM50 SSL certificate properties When you first log on to the Element Manager a security alert appears which indicates site validation of the default certificate This security alert does not appear if you e add a site specific certificate e suppress the message on your client browser If you want a site specific certificate obtain a site certificate for your system from a CA Certificate Authority vendor Certificate files must use the PEM format When you are provided with a certificate and a private security key these must be installed on the BCMS0 Security note Ensure that
415. u of the BCM Monitor select Connect to BCM The Enter Logon Information window opens 3 Inthe System Name or IP Address field enter the system name of the BCM50 you want to monitor In the Connect As field enter your BCM50 user name In the Password field enter your password Click the Connect button The BCM Monitor panel opens Using BCM Monitor to analyze system status System Administrators and support personnel can use BCM Monitor to obtain real time troubleshooting data about the BCM system and to save data to generate system utilization and traffic reports BCM Monitor tabs provide information about the following e the overall BCMS50 system e utilization of resources e operation of telephony applications for example Voice Mail and Contact Center e lines e PRI BRI and IP trunks You can capture information about the BCM50 system by using e static snapshots e dynamic snapshots NN40020 600 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities 249 Static snapshots You can capture an instantaneous snapshot of system information in a text file You specify which BCM Monitor tab you want to capture and then save the information to the txt file The file name embeds the time date and BCM50 name information so that you can view the data using Microsoft Word or another application at another time Before you start a snapshot you must configure static snapshot settings To configure static snapshot settings 1 4 On the
416. um number of 5 Limiting the number of SNMP communities will reduce degradation of system performance To add a community string 1 2 3 5 Click the Configuration tab Open the Administrator Access folder and then click SNMP Click the Community Strings tab The Community Strings panel is displayed Click the Add button The Add Community String dialog box is displayed Specify the community string attributes Table 41 SNMP Community String Attributes Attribute Action Community String Enter the entry name used as a key to uniquely identify an individual community entry on the SNMP agent Type of Access Specify the read and write access for this community Available options are Read Only and Read Write 6 Click the OK button The community string is added to the Community Strings table To delete a community string value 1 Click the Configuration tab Open the Administrator Access folder and then click SNMP Click the Community Strings tab The Community Strings panel is displayed In the Community Strings table select the community string that you want to delete Click the Delete button A confirmation message is displayed Click Yes The community string is removed from the Community Strings table BCM50 Administration Guide 140 Chapter 6 Managing BCM50 with SNMP Configuring service access points Service access points are associated with the enhanced secu
417. up is displayed in the Scheduled Backups table BCM50 Administration Guide 288 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data Performing a scheduled backup to an SFTP server Caution A backup operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever the backup will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a backup that does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a backup at a time when the system is typically not in use TO perform a scheduled backup to an SFTP server 1 In the task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Backup and Restore folder and then click Backup The Backup panel opens and displays the Immediate Backup tab 3 Click the Scheduled Backups tab The Scheduled Backups panel opens 4 Click the Add button The Add Scheduled Backup window opens In the Backup To selection field select FTP Server Configure the SFTP Server attributes Table 83 Configure SFTP Server attributes Attribute Action SFTP Server Enter the hostname or IP address of the SFTP server User Name Enter the user name associated with the SFTP server Directory Enter the path to the subdirectory optional 7 Click the OK button The Add Scheduled Backup window opens 8 Inthe Optional Components table select or clear the check box to include or exclude these compone
418. up to 200 accounts that require privileges in Element Manager such as IPSec and PPP This number does not include accounts supported for voicemail users and contact center agents The User ID of the account profiles created through the set based interface cannot be modified through the Element Manager Two default user accounts are provided e The nnadmin account is read only and cannot be deleted or disabled e The nnguest account provides customers with web only access All access to the Apache web server requires a valid administrator username and password Auditing for user accounts includes e creation date time and the user ID that created the account e modify date time and the user ID that modified the account e expiry date and time if enabled e login history including failed attempts and the date and time of the last successful attempt e an audit log that tracks logged in user transactions including user account changes Remote users can have a callback number assigned as well This feature allows authentication of remote users calling in through a modem After authentication the BCM50 will call the user back at the number specified Nortel recommends that each user have a separate user account User Name with a unique password These are set up by a user with administrator privileges in the Element Manager The password only shows up as asterisks on the Element Manager panel If the password is lost the administrator c
419. uration tab Open the Administrator Access folder and then click SNMP Click the General tab The General panel is displayed In the SNMP Manager List area select a manager in the Manager IP Address table Click the Delete button A confirmation message opens 6 Click the Yes button The manager is removed from the Manager IP Address table Configuring SNMP community strings An SNMP community string is a value similar to a user ID or a password that allows access to a device s statistics SNMP managers send a community string along with each SNMP request If the community string is correct the BCM50 responds with the requested information If the community string is incorrect the BCM50 discards the request and does not respond Community strings are used for SNMP v1 and v2C only BCM50 ships from the factory with community strings set It is standard practice for network managers to change all the community strings to prevent outsiders from seeing information about the internal network Before you can send SNMP messages to an SNMP workstation you must configure community strings NN40020 600 Chapter 6 Managing BCM50 with SNMP 139 You can define the value of a community string as well as the type of access You can also delete a community string Caution Although there is no limit for the number of SNMP communities that you can set Nortel recommends that you limit the number of SNMP communities to a maxim
420. urce port lt gt destination IP lt gt destination port lt gt cT lt gt eT lt gt nLR k gt dR lt gt bD lt gt bL k gt gD lt gt gL lt gt leSD lt gt aNL KkI gt aSP lt gt rTT lt gt No Action Required Yes Yes No BCM50 Administration Guide 210 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 668 P1010 warning oIP olP Gateway Restore a known es No No Gateway configuration good backup into the lparameters not system If the found problem persists contact your local support group 569 61014 Information VoIP VoIP Gateway No Action Required Yes No No Gateway succeeded to ping gatekeeper address 570 61015 warning VoIP VoIP Gateway failed Check that the Yes No No Gateway to ping gatekeeper gatekeeper is address configured correctly land is accessible The system will keep trying to make contact with the gatekeeper at 3 minute intervals 571 61016 warning VoIP VoIP Gateway Verity the remote Yes No No fe Gateway remote gateway gateway is mismatch supported for interopability ritica ateway failed Contact your loca es es es es Gateway to initialize h 323 support group stack 573 61024 major VoIP VoIP Gateway can t Check the status of Yes Yes Yes Yes Gateway communicate with ithe QoS monitor in QoS monitor Element Manager 674 61100 major VoIP VoIP Gateway Ensure the codecs Yes Yes Yes Yes Gateway r
421. user ID due to an internal error error code lt lt lerrorCode 50120 major Unistim Attempt to Hot Desk Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal lt lt dnToHighjack lt lt support group Proxy Server from lt lt hijackerDn lt lt has failed Debug information lt lt sessionld lt lt lt lt errorCode lt lt BCM50 Administration Guide 206 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 636 p0T2ZT major Unistim Attempt to Hot Desk Contact your local es es es es Terminal lt lt dnToHighjack lt lt support group Proxy Server from lt lt HighjackerDn lt lt has failed because stand by Hot Desking service could be started Debug information k lt sessionld lt lt lt lt errorCode lt lt 537 60122 major Unistim Hot Desking Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal Session initiated by Support group Proxy Server lt highjackerDn lt lt has failed to start with internal error 638 60123 major Unistim HotDesking session Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Terminal termination between Support group Proxy Server k lt Dn1 lt lt and lt lt Dn2 lt lt failed internal data structure out of synch 539 60124 major Unistim HotDesking session Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Terminal termination between Support group Proxy Server k lt Dn1 lt lt and lt lt Dn1 lt lt
422. vailable Figure 11 Session selections for saving programming records ORES BCM 4 0 Element Manager Acmrisirater Access Kesources leseprony Leta services NN40020 600 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment 61 Use the following steps to save the data programming 1 Select the item on the task navigation panel for which you want to save the data into an HTML report or Excel workbook An item can be a task item task bullet or a folder 2 Click on Session gt device IP address gt Save Programming Record gt Save Selected Data A Save dialog box appears Figure 12 Save dialog box In the Save field choose the path where you want the file stored In the Files of type field choose the format in which you want to save the data HTML or Microsoft Excel spreadsheet 5 Enter a File name Nortel recommends that you make the current date and system name part of the file name 6 Click on Save Note The Save All Data selection can take up to 45 minutes to complete Your computer must stay connected to the element during this time as the Save All Data function is actively writing into the file specified until the function is complete BCM50 Administration Guide 62 Chapter 3 BCM50 Management Environment Element Manager application logging This section describes the logging performed by Element Manager to generate a record of its tasks There is usually no need to monitor Element M
423. vileges on page 89 provides procedures for managing access to both the Element Manager and to the telset configuration menus User account and user group management fundamentals on page 97 provides information about user accounts passwords and privileges Accounts and Privileges panel on page 111 describes the fields on the Accounts and Privileges panel BCM50 security fundamentals on page 120 provides an overview of the BCM50 security policies such as firewalls protocols encryption audits certificates and site authentication Security Policies panel The fields that make up the Security Policies panel are described in this section When you set security policies they apply to the entire BCM system rather than to individual users BCM50 Administration Guide 76 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges Figure 20 Security Policies panel jNortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager 192 168 249 25 File View Network Session Tools Help yes SyPisconnect Retesh gp Auto retresh New Folder em New Folder renamed tolder 5 i Element Navigation Panel Task Navigation Panel Configuration l Administration Administrator Access _ Accounts and Privileges o i e Modem Resources lelephony Data Services Applications Security Policies Entry Policy Local Authentication Policy Authentication Service Policy Session Management Policy SSL and SSH Policy 8
424. way due to gateway support group Server initialization error critical Media MGS shutting down Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Gateway due to a fatal error support group Server critical Media MGS shutting down Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Gateway due to MSM support group Server communication failure critical Media MGS shutting down Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Gateway due to MPS support group Server communication failure critical Media MGS shutting down Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Gateway due to resource support group Server limits query failure critical Media MGS shutting down Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Gateway due to configuration support group Server query failure critical Media MGS Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Gateway MediaTransport support group Server Received bad ports Kport1 gt lt port2 gt critical Media MGS Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Gateway MediaTransport support group Server Codec and or frames per packet mismatch lt details gt BCM50 Administration Guide 212 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 604 63010 critical Media MGS Contact your local es es es es Gateway MediaTransport support group Server Transport mismatch Kdetails gt 605 63011 critical Media MGS MsmProxy Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes Gateway lt interface gt returned support group Server error l
425. whether the software update causes the BCM50 to reboot when the update has been applied If a reboot is required the check box is checked Location The storage location of the update For example FTP server Status The status of the update See Table 103 for information Retrieve The date and time at which the update will be retrieved Apply The date and time at which the update will be applied Table 103 lists the statuses of scheduled software updates Table 103 Statuses of scheduled software updates Status Description Scheduled The software update has been scheduled Removed The scheduled software update has been deleted Modified The scheduled software update has been modified Applied The scheduled software update has been applied to the BCM50 Creating a scheduled software update Caution Applying a software update to the BCM50 is a service affecting operation Nortel recommends that you schedule updates for low traffic hours Caution If a software update has a checkmark applied against it in the Reboot Req d column of the New Updates Found window the system will automatically reboot as soon as the patch has been applied You will not receive a reboot confirmation before the reboot occurs To create a scheduled software update 1 Inthe task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Software Management folder and then click the Software Update ta
426. will eliminate the security warnings For further information about security certificates see Security certificate on page 124 To upload a Web Server Certificate N Oo OF FB WO DN Select Configuration Administrator Access Security Policies gt SSL and SSH Policy In the SSL section click the Install Web Server Certificate button On the Transfer Certificate browse panel locate and select the security certificate file Click the Transfer Certificate button On the Transfer Private Key browse panel locate and select the private key file Click the Transfer Private Key button On the Install Web Server certificate window click OK to install the certificate NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 89 Transferring an SSH Key Pair Transferring an SSH Key Pair allows the administrator to download a public security certificate or an SSH key pair The new certificate must be installed on each sftp server the BCM50 communicates with to ensure a secure connection for operations like backup and restore and software updates To transfer an SSH Key Pair 1 Select Configuration Administrator Access Security Policies gt SSL and SSH Policy 2 Inthe SSH section click the Generate New SSH Key pair button The new key is put on the computer running BCM50 3 Click OK to save the new pair or click Transfer to transfer the pair Configuring user accounts user groups and privileges
427. with other operations All passwords and database records included with your backup file are encrypted You can perform backup operations on demand or you can schedule a single backup or recurring backups You can view the backup schedule and change it as required and you can also save a record of the backup schedule that you set For information about saving programming records see Saving programming records on page 58 A restore operation can be performed on demand only Backup and restore options You can backup and restore the settings and service data of your BCM50 BCM50 Administration Guide 272 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data During the backup procedure you can exclude a number of optional services from the backup operation to ensure that service is not interrupted The remainder of the services and settings are automatically included during a backup operation Table 71 lists the components that you can choose to include or exclude from the backup operation Table 71 Optional components Component Description CallPilot Configuration Includes Voicemail and ContactCenter configuration information CallPilot Messages Includes Voicemail and ContactCenter configuration Voicemail and ContactCentre messages Select the optional components that best fit your backup strategy For example if you do not want to backup personal voicemail messages you can select the CallPilot Configurati
428. x Restore Down Disable telset login j Disable post loginmessage j Post login message ARNING This computer system and network is a PRIVATE and PROPRIETARY and may only be accessed y authorized users Unauthorized use of this computer system or network is strictly rohibited and may be subject to criminal rosecution employee discipline up to and E Nortel Support Hide Challenge Key j Challenge key E X co M 0 Looms wo Vv Include ACKed alarms The following table describes the fields on this panel Table 17 Security Policies fields Attribute Value Description Entry Policy tab Disable telset login check box When selected specifies when users cannot access the system through any telset interface Default unchecked Tip If this is enabled and DHCP changes the system IP address you can determine the new IP address by way of the OAM port Disable post login check box When checked specifies that the post login security warning message will not open on login Default not checked Post login message text Displays the post login security warning The warning can be edited to customize the message for your system Nortel Support NN40020 600 Chapter 4 BCM50 Security Policies and Accounts and Privileges 77 Table 17 Security Policies fields Continued Attribute Value Description Challenge key
429. y a computing or network device and the extent of control over that device About SNMP MIBs A MIB enables access to the managed objects of a system MIBs are managed using a network management protocol such as Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The BCM50 main unit supports the following MIBs e MIB II RFC1213 e SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB RFC2261 e ENTITY MIB RFC273 e HOST MIB RFC2790 e TF MIB RFC2863 e BCM Small Site MIB e BCM Small Site Events MIB BCM50 units equipped with an integrated router BCM50e BCM50a BCM50be and BCMS0ba also support RFC 1231 MIB II and a private MIB For more information see the BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 You can use BCM MIBs to monitor the network element you cannot use BCM MIBs to configure the element Read only access is provided for all supported MIB objects MIB file descriptions BCM50 MIBs belong to two categories e Standard MIBs include MIB II RFC1213 SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB RFC2261 ENTITY MIB RFC273 HOST MIB RFC2790 and IF MIB RFC2863 e Nortel MIBs include BCM Small Site MIB and BCM Small Site Events MIB BCM50 Administration Guide 344 Appendix A Management Information Bases Table 106 lists the file names and file descriptions of each supported standard MIB Table 106 MIB file descriptions for standard MIBs MIB File Name Notes MIB II rfc1213 mib This MIB defines the Management Information
430. y enter sensitive information using their telephone sets for example when performing telephone banking Sensitive logs are grouped in a separate category to allow the administrator to decide whether to include this category of log files in a log file transfer depending on the nature of the connection being used for the transfer Administrators may choose to exclude Sensitive logs when the network or the destination is not sufficiently secure or when there are other privacy or security concerns NN40020 600 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs 303 The Sensitive Logs category includes only three log files for core telephony LAN CTE and Voice CTI Caution The Sensitive Logs category can become very large due to the large core telephony log files Security Note Once logs are transferred to an external location the administrator is responsible for securing the information and controlling access to it Additional System Information A set of System Information files is included with every log file transfer These are reports rather than log files and contain a snapshot of operating state of the BCM50 system at the time of the log file transfer These reports are automatically collected and included with every log file transfer The files included in this category are txt files You can open these files with an application such as WordPad or Microsoft Word but you cannot open or view them using the Element Manager Log Brow
431. y that allows you to determine the level of system reporting you require for released ISDN or VoIP calls You can choose to have no text a simple explanation or a detailed explanation This section provides the procedures To set Release Reasons To set Release Reasons To set Release reasons follow these steps 1 2 Click Administration Utilities Diagnostic settings Click the Telephony tab The Release Reasons panel appears See Figure 39 BCM50 Administration Guide 270 Chapter 10 BCM50 Utilities Figure 39 Telephony diagnostic settings jnortel BCM 4 0 Element Manager loj xj File View Network Session Tools Help Exit Disconnect 3 Refresh g utorefresh eh oe Element Navigation Panel 4 Task Navigation Panel Diagnostic Settings Telephony System Status lelephony Metrics ISDN Call Release 2y Himes Release reasontext None g Bem montor X _ Hing 2 tace koute Backup and Restore Logs Software Management co p M92 m0 wo Vv Include ACKed alarms 3 From the Release Reason drop down menu select the level of reporting that you require Table 70 lists the possible values for Release reasons Table 70 Release reasons Attributes Values Description None Default Value No text will accompany a dropped call notification Simple Cause Code Off Off no text is provided On On the code only is provided Note if you select Simple text you must turn off the Cause code This is
432. you maintain a copy of your certificate and private security keys in a secure place preferably offsite This provides you with a backup if your system ever requires data re entry Site authentication Site authentication is not provided with the generic SSL certificate This means that the generic SSL certificate is not signed by a recognized signing authority However the SSL certificate used by the http server may be upgraded to a customer s private SSL certificate which offers site certification along with the encryption Site authentication requires system specific information such as an IP address company name and so on A site specific certificate ensures that when users point their web browser at the SSL web interface the user is no longer asked to accept the certificate If the default BCM50 generic SSL certificate is used the user is prompted to accept an unsigned certificate NN40020 600 125 Chapter 5 Using the BCM50 Hardware Inventory This chapter describes how to use the BCM50 Hardware Inventory The Hardware Inventory task in the Element Manager displays information about the BCM50 system including e connected expansion units e populated Media Bay Modules MBMs e attached telephone devices You can view the information in the Hardware Inventory remotely using Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP management systems and the Entity Management Information Base MIB RFC2737 About the BCM50 Ha
433. your licensing Yes No No fe processing Data information Status in licesning process warning Call Detail CDR Transfer minor Check your Yes No No fe Recording error onfiguration Transfer Laana critical Call Detail CDR Transfer Contact your local Yes Yes es Yes Recording linitialization error support group Transfer critical Call Detail CDR Transfer Check your es Yes Yes Yes Recording processing error onfiguration Transfer parameters and if problem persists ontact your local support group critical Call Detail CDR Transfer Check your Yes Yes Yes Yes Recording _ working error onfiguration Transfer parameters and if problem persists ontact your local support group warning Voice CTI Voice CTI no voice Contact your local Yes No No channels allocated support group critical Voice CTI Voice CTT unable to Contact your local Yes es Yes Yes regsigter with MSM support group critical Voice CTI Voice CTI Contact your local Yes es Yes Yes subcomponent support group failure critical Voice CTI Voice CII software Contact your local Yes Yes Yes Yes error Support group warning Voice CTT Voice CTI Contact your local Yes No No application did not support group register properly BCM50 Administration Guide 202 Chapter 7 Using the BCM Fault Management System 43008 information oice CTI oice CTI More than 20 percent voice file space available No Action Required es INO
434. ys information about the backup file including a warning that the selected backup file will replace the backup file currently stored on the BCM Caution When you proceed to the next step the selected file will overwrite the backup file that is stored on the BCM Ensure that the correct backup file is selected before proceeding 6 Click the Open button The Select Components to Restore window opens Select the optional components that you want to include from the backup file Click the OK button A warning window opens and displays information about components that will be affected by the restore operation Read the warning carefully before proceeding 9 Click the Yes button to proceed A progress window opens When the operation is complete the Restore Complete window opens 10 Click the OK button NN40020 600 Chapter 11 Backing Up and Restoring BCM50 Data 295 Restoring data from a network folder Caution A restore operation can interrupt services running on the BCM A warning displays whenever restoring data will cause a service interruption If you want to perform a restore operation that does not affect the system you can exclude services that would be affected Alternatively you can include these services and perform a restore operation at a time when the system is typically not in use To restore data from a network folder 1 Inthe task panel click the Administration tab 2 Open the Backup and Re
435. ystem Status and then select NTP Metrics in the navigation tree See Figure 31 Figure 31 NTP Metrics 18 x File View Network Session Tools Help gt Geet E Refresh g Autorefrest Element Navigation Panel4 Task Navigation Panel Hetwork Time Protocol Metrics work Elements Configuration aera Last synchronized ya aH eneral bes system Metrics 205 Monitor Minimum time difference s 0 UPS Metrics overs Maximum time difference s mi lelephony rics 0 h Ututies oa Backup and Restore Last synchronization status hot runnin hia Logs g 7 y Software Management one co M0 m6 EO v Include ACKed alarms The NTP Metrics panel displays information contained in Table 56 Table 56 NTP Statistics Parameter Name Description Minimum time difference s The minimum time change that occurred since NTP was running Maximum time difference s The maximum time difference that occurred since NTP was running Last Synchronized When the last synchronization occurred Last Synchronization Status The results of the last synchronization successful or unsuccessful If unsuccessful the reason for the failure is given failed to contact or failed security check A status of Not Running indicates that NTP is not configured NN40020 600 Chapter 9 Monitoring BCM50 Status and Metrics 227 Telephony Metrics The following sections provide a general overview of the
436. ystemlog Desktop gi ail E gmon E security systemlog My Documents 93 My Computer w File name security systemlog Open My Network Save astype Network Element log files log systemlog x Nanna BCM50 Administration Guide 318 Chapter 12 Managing BCM50 Logs 10 Select a systemlog file or a log file and click the Open button The Log Browser opens and displays retrieval results for the selected log file Viewing log files using the Log Browser The Log Browser is an application that you can use to search for and view information about log events from different types of data sources You can determine what type of information you want to see and customize how you want to display the information You can view the following log files using the Element Manager Log Browser e all log files of type systemlog e most log files of type log e log files of type txt or other file extensions that cannot be viewed using the Log Browser You can use an application such as WordPad or Microsoft Word to view log files that you cannot view using the Log Browser Table 96 lists the log files that you can view using the Log Browser Table 96 Log files and the Log Browser Log File Can be viewed in the Log Browser Operational logs systemlog Yes Diagnostic logs Some can System Information No Sensitive Information No The Log Browser co

Nortel Networks BCM50 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents